Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7

DS2000INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL

SYSTEM

OPERATOR MANUAL

for

The Ambulance Trusts

Volume 1 -- Operator Functions

Preface

Issue 7

SunGard Public Sector Limited reserves the right to change this information without notice.

This document does not form part of any contract or licence except as may be expressly agreed.

© SunGard Public Sector Limited 2010

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic,mechanical, photocopied, recorded or otherwise) or stored in any retrieval system of any nature withoutthe written permission of SunGard Public Sector Limited.

SunGard Public Sector LimitedMarshfieldChippenhamWiltshireSN14 8SR

Telephone : 08456 041999Part No. 809--Amb--0000--25 Fax : 08456 052999

VOLUME 1PREFACE

DS2000OPERATOR MANUAL

Preface_ E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025ii

Amendment Record

Issue Reason Author Date Approved

A First draft SS 25.04.06

B Second draft to incorporatelatest functionality changes

SS 24.06.06

C Third draft to incorporatechanges post review

KJL 22.08.06

D Third draft to removenon -- ARP functionality

SS 30.08.06

1 First Issue JC 11.12.06

1a Amend referencing andcorrect type errors

SS 11.06.07

1b Draft Incorporate Changesto reflect V161

TS 20.09.07

2 Second Issue toIncorporate Changes toreflect V161

SS 01/11/07

2a Draft to IncorporateChanges to reflect V171

KJL 06/11/07

2b Second Draft to IncorporateChanges Post Review

KJL 07/12/07

3 Third Issue to IncorporateChanges to Reflect V171

KJL 20/12/07

4 Fourth Issue to Incorporatechanges to company nameand screen shot updates

SS 09/07/08

5 Fifth Issue to IncorporateInter--Site ACD to Ch 5 andamendments to Ch 6.12

SS 02/04/09

6 Ch 5 and Ch 6 amendments DSW 02/09/09

7 Add Amb Listen passwordfunctionality to Ch6 andamend Inter--site CommonCall Queue functionalitydescription in Ch5

DSW 03/06/10

VOLUME 1PREFACE


Preface_E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 iii

Contents

1.1 Introduction 1 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 System Features 1 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3 User Positions (Terminals) 1 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4 Visual Presentation 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.1 Touch Screen 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2 Help 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3 Typical Main Screen 1 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5 Audio Presentation 1 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 Audible Indications and Alarms 1 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7 Keyboard 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8 Fallback Facilities 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9 Call Logger 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10 Internal Intercom 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11 Instant Replay Recorder 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12 Database 1 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Introduction 2 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 Introduction to DS2000 Log On 2 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1 The Log On screen 2 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.2 Changeover Log On 2 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 The Greeting Screen 2 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.1 ID Accepted 2 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.2 User Type 2 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.3 Functional Area at Log On 2 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 The Preselections Menu 3 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2 Clean Screen 3 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3 Calibrate Screen 3 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4 Main Screen 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 Terminal Override 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 New Password 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7 Update Database 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Events/Fault Log 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 Remote Access 3 --10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Introduction 4 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 Major Function Selection Keys -- Typical Configuration 4 -- 6. . . . . . . .

4.2.1 Top Row Function Keys 4 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.2 Bottom Row Function Keys 4 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 New Logon 4 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025iv

5.1 Telephone Page 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.1 Introduction 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.2 Active Telephone Page 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.3 Number of Telephone Pages Available 5 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.4 Telephone Key Types 5 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI 5 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.6 Audible Incoming Call Indications 5 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Taking a Call 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue View 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.1 Tetra Call Summary Key 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Queue View 5 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2.1 Telephone Call Summary Key 5 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.3 PABX Call Capture 5 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.4 Answering a Call 5 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.5 Microphone On/Off 5 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.6 Clearing a Call 5 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.7 Holding a Line 5 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.8 Releasing a Held Line 5 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Emergency Call -- CLI (Calling Line Identity) 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1 Enhanced CLI 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1.1 Calls Received from a Fixed Location 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.2 Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines 5 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.3 Calls Received from a Mobile 5 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.4 Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls 5 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.2 Last Caller Details 5 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.3 C&C Links 5 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3.1 C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface) 5 -- 225.4 Making a Call 5 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.1 Telephone Page Tabs 5 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection 5 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.2 Telephone Dial Pad 5 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.1 Telephone Dialling 5 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling 5 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.3 Tetra ISSI Dialling 5 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling 5 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.4 Redial -- Last Numbers 5 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.5 Dial In/Out List 5 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 Telephone Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1 Web--Based Telephone Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1.1 View Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.2 Regional Partitioning 5 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.3 Searching 5 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.4 Pre--defined Category Search 5 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.5 Favourites 5 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.6 Sensitivity Classification 5 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen 5 -- 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite 5 -- 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.9 View/Delete Referenced Favourite 5 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 v

5.5.1.10 New Favourite -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6 Monitoring 5 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.1 Normal Call Monitoring 5 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7 Transferring Calls 5 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1 Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL) 5 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7.2 PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX) 5 -- 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8 PABX Key 5 -- 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9 Telephone Eavesdrop 5 -- 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.9.1 How to Use Tele Eaves 5 -- 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.10.1 Introduction 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10.2 Using the ACD Key 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10.3 Wrap Up 5 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11 Common Call Queue 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.1 Introduction 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.2 Available Sites and Free Operators 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.3 Handoff Modes 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11.3.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.3.2 Parallel Mode 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.4 Incoming External Call 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.5 Incoming Handoff Call 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.6 Call Hand--off Mechanism 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.7 Lines and Extensions 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.8 Call Logging 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11.8.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.8.2 Parallel Mode 5 -- 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.12 Conferencing 5 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Airwave Functions 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1.1 Talkgroup Keys 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1.2 Talkgroup Key Description 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1.3 Caller Identity 6 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1.3.1 Caller Identity Area 6 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2 Talkgroup Setup and Key States 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.1 Talkgroup Setup Key 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.2 Preselecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.3 Un-preselecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.4 Rearranging Talkgroup Keys 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.5 Talkgroup Base State 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection 6 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.7 Talkgroup Un-Preselection 6 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.8 Talkgroup Event Monitor 6 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.9 Monitoring a Talkgroup 6 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect) 6 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.11 Selecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.12 Transmit 6 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.13 Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor) 6 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States 6 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025vi

6.2.15 Talkgroup Show Subs 6 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Unmonitored Talkgroups 6 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.1 Talkgroup not Monitored 6 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4 Talkgroup Selections 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.1 Talkgroup List 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Last Dispatcher Warnings 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.1 Introduction 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.2 Last Audio Monitored 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.2.1 Last Audio Monitored Warning 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.3 Last Audio Monitored Confirmation 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.4 Last Event Monitored 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.4.1 Last Event Monitored Warning 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.5 Last Event Monitored Confirmation 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.6 Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen 6 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6 Talkgroup History 6 -- 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6.1 Talkgroup History List 6 -- 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.1.1 List Entry Time-Stamps 6 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 Subscriber Profile 6 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.1 Subscriber Profile 6 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.2 Radio Status Description 6 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.3 Main Tab Operations 6 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.4 Alias Update 6 -- 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.5 DGNA -- Dynamic Group Number Assignment 6 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . .6.7.6 DGNA -- Add Talkgroup 6 -- 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.7 DGNA Remove Group 6 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio 6 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.9 Stunning a Radio 6 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.10 Enabling a Radio 6 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.11 Radio Check 6 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.12 Ambient Listen 6 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7.12.1 Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen 6 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8 Subscriber Search 5--45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.8.1 Searching for a Subscriber 5--45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.2 Using the Search Results 5--47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.9 Subcriber Selection List 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.1 Subs List Function Key 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.2 Subscriber List 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.3 Associated Functions 6 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.4 Refresh 6 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10 Radio User Identity (RUI) 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.1 RUI Introduction 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.2 RUI Profile Screen 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.3 Main -- Sub Menu 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10.3.1 Subscriber Profile Key 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.3.2 Rui Query Key 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10.4 Book -- Sub Menu 6 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 vii

6.10.5 New Pin -- Sub Menu 6 -- 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11 Call Events 6 -- 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11.1 Call Event History Log 6 -- 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11.1.1 Associated Functions 6 -- 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12 Individual Calls 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1 Single Point to Point Call 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.1.1 Individual Call via a List 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.2 Individual Selection by ISSI 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.3 Mobile Resource Screen 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.4 Resource Group Screen 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.2 Interupt Priority Individual Call 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.3 Multi Point Call 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.4 Individual Call in Progress 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.5 Radio Group Key 6 -- 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13 Inbound Individual Calls 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.1 CCI Port Assignments 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.2 Individual Call Key 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.3 Individual Tetra Calls List 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13.3.1 Active Calls 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.3.2 List Entries 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.14 In-progress Individual Calls 6 -- 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 Individual Call Hold 6 -- 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.15.1 Placing a Call On Hold 6 -- 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold 6 -- 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.16 Individual Call History 6 -- 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16.1 Individual Call History List 6 -- 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.17 Individual Callback Operation 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.1 Queuing Callback Requests 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.2 Individual Callback Requests Key 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.3 Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback 6 -- 72. . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.4 Individual Callback List 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.5 Clearing a Callback Request 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.8 Callback Alarm 6 -- 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.18 Group Callback Operation 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.1 Queuing Callback Requests 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.2 Group Callback Requests Key 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.3 Restrictions Accepting Group Callback 6 -- 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.4 Group Callback List 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.5 Clearing a Callback Request 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance 6 -- 78. . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.8 Callback Alarm 6 -- 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025viii

6.19 Emergency Calls 6 -- 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.1 Emergency Alarms 6 -- 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.2 Emergency Key 6 -- 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.3 Emergency Calls List 6 -- 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.4 Clearing Emergency Calls 6 -- 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.5 External Acknowledgement 6 -- 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing 6 -- 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.7 Emergency Alarm Timeout 6 -- 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement 6 -- 86. . . . . . . . . . .

6.20 Short Data Message Functions 6 -- 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.1 Accessing SDM Functions 6 -- 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.2 Sending a Short Message 6 -- 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.3 Sent Message List 6 -- 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.4 Sent Message Details 6 -- 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.5 Received Message List 6 -- 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.6 Received Message Details 6 -- 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.7 SDM History List 6 -- 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.8 History Message Details 6 -- 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21.1 Accessing the Predefined SDM Function 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21.2 PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . .6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys 6 -- 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.22 Mute All 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.1 Introduction 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.2 Muting of Audio 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.3 De--Muting 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.23 Alert Tone 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23.1 Introduction 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23.2 Sending An Alert Tone 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.24 Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage 6 -- 108. . . . . . . . .6.24.1 CCI Summary Display 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24.2 CCI Port Calculation 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24.3 Threshold Exceeded Warning 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.25 CCI Port Summary 6 -- 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.1 CCI Port Details 6 -- 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.2 Icon ‘A’ 6 -- 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.3 Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.4 Reserved for Individual Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 112. . . . . . . .6.25.5 Reserved for Group Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 113. . . . . . . . . . .6.25.6 Summary Area 6 -- 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.7 Help Area 6 -- 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.26 Status Code List 6 -- 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.1 Status Code List 6 -- 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.3 Refresh List 6 -- 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 ix

6.27 Mobile Resource 6 -- 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.1 List Entries 6 -- 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.2 Display Types 6 -- 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27.2.1 Multi Column List 6 -- 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.2.2 Single Column List 6 -- 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27.3 Dropdown Menus 6 -- 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.1 Functional Area Dropdown Menu 6 -- 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.2 List Ordering Dropdown Menu 6 -- 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.3 Resource Key 6 -- 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.4 List Updates 6 -- 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28 Radio Resource Group 6 -- 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.1 Introduction 6 -- 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.2 Resource Group Edit 6 -- 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.2.1 Primary Area 6 -- 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.2.2 Secondary Area 6 -- 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.3 Secondary Area -- Function Keys 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.1 Keyboard 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.2 Search 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.3 Add 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.4 Remove 6 -- 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.5 Auto Alias 6 -- 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.6 Subs Prof 6 -- 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.4 Resource Group Functions 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.1 OK 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.2 Updating and Alias Validation 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators 6 -- 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.4 Delete 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.5 Multicall 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.6 Dflt Alias 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.7 Cancel 6 -- 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.29 Group Repeat 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.1 Introduction 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.2 Group Repeat Key 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State 6 -- 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.4 External Group Repeat State Change 6 -- 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.30 Radio Revert 6 -- 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.30.1 Radio Revert Key 6 -- 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.31 Analogue Radio Introduction 6 -- 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31.1 Radio Channel Keys 6 -- 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31.2 Radio Key Description 6 -- 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.32 Radio Setup 6 -- 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.1 Radio Setup Table 6 -- 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels 6 -- 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.3 Removing Radio Channels 6 -- 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions 6 -- 146. . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025x

6.33 Use of Radio Keys 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.1 Introduction 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.2 Radio Key Access 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.3 Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute) 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.34 Talkthrough 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.34.1 Introduction 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.34.2 Setting up Talkthrough (T/T) 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.35 Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.1 Radio Monitor 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.2 Radio Select 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.3 Transmit 6 -- 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect 6 -- 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36 Combining Channels 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.1 Combine 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.2 Uncombine 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.3 Radio Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36.3.1 Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.3.2 Uncombine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36.4 Talkgroup Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.4.1 Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.4.2 Uncombine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.37 Remote Radio 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.1 Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.2 Using the Remote Radio 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.3 Leaving (Un--preselecting) the Remote Radio 6 -- 157. . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 Connect Group Options 7 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.1 Introduction 7 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2 Connect Conferencing 7 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.2.1 Telephone Only Connect Groups 7 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.2 Radio and Telephone Connect Groups 7 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups 7 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.4 Talkgroup Only Connect Groups 7 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.5 Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups 7 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.6 Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups 7 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups 7 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.8 Individual Call and Single Telephone 7 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Connect Groups -- Connecting 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.1 The Connect Keys 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.2 Opening and Closing Connect Groups 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.2.1 Opening a Connect Group 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.2.2 Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call -- Option) 7 -- 127.2.2.3 Closing a Connect Group 7 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.3 Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 14. . .7.2.3.1 Adding Telephones to a Group (From held) 7 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.3.2 Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call -- Option) 7 -- 147.2.3.3 Removing Telephones from a Group 7 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 xi

7.2.4 Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 16. . . . . . .7.2.4.1 Adding Radios to a Group 7 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.4.2 Removing a Radio from a Connect Group 7 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.5 Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 18. . . .7.2.5.1 Adding Talkgroups to a Group 7 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.5.2 Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.6 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups 7 -- 19. . . . .7.2.6.1 Monitor and Select for Closed Groups 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.6.2 Monitor and Select for Open Groups 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.6.3 DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect 7 -- 20. . . . . . .

7.2.7 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups 7 -- 20. .7.2.8 Talkthrough and Connect Groups 7 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.9 Operator Push-To-Talk Override. 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.10 Open Connect Group Restrictions 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.11 Individual Call Restriction 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.12 Connect Group Security 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Operator Intercom 7 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.1 Making an Intercom Call to Other Users 7 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.2 Receiving an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.3 Clearing an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference 7 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Operator Intercom (Partitioned) 7 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.1 Internal Intercom Screen 7 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.2 Function Keys 7 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.3 Making an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.4 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.5 Taking an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.6 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1 Local Recording -- Instant Replay 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.1 Introduction 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.2 Replay Keys 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.3 Accessing Another Operator Terminal’s Recording 8 -- 6. . . . . . . . .8.1.4 Types of Call Recorded 8 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5 Recording Precedence 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.5.1 Recording Start and Stop 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5.2 Emergency Events 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5.3 Examples 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.6 Replaying a Recording 8 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.6.1 Screen Description 8 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.6.2 Screen Function 8 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.7 Cancelling a Replay 8 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications 8 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms 8 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.3 New PIN or Password 8 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.1 Changing Your PIN or Password 8 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels 8 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025xii

8.5 Call Supervisor (Console Request) 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5.1 Introduction 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5.2 Method of Operation 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.5.2.1 Making a Call Supervisor Request 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5.2.2 Confirming a Call Supervisor Request 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.6 Area Set Up 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.1 Introduction 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.2 Selecting Functional Areas 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.3 Rearranging Functional Area Positions 8 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.4 Deselecting Functional Areas 8 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.7 Remote Access 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.1 Introduction 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.2 Accessing the Remote Site 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.3 Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site 8 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.1 Introduction 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.2 Method of Operation 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.3 Alphanumeric Keypad 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.4 Numeric Keypad 8 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9 Operator Note Pad 8 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9.1 Operator Note Pad List 8 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9.1.1 Searching 8 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9.1.2 New Note 8 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10 System Partitioning 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1 Operator Groups Overwiew 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.1.1 Operator Terminal Positions 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.2 Legacy Radios 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.3 Talkgroups 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.4 Functional Areas 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.5 ICCS Sites 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.6 Telephone Lines 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.7 Telephone Extensions 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.8 Telephone Groups 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.2 Operator Selection 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.3 Call Supervisor Segregation 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.4 Fault Message Segregation 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.4.1 Critical Fault Log Filtering 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.11.1 Functional Overview 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.1 Operator Group 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.2 Terminal Identifier 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.3 User Name 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.4 Status 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.5 Other Terminal Number 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.6 Activity Icon 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 xiii

8.11.2 Function Keys 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.2.1 Refresh Key 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.2.2 Priming an Operator 8 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.12 Browser 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12.1 Introduction 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12.2 Browser Screen 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop 9 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.1 How to Terminal Eavesdrop 9 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 Mimic 9 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2.1 Mimic (Standard) 9 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2.2 Mimic with Group Partitioning 9 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic 9 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3 Terminal Override 9 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4 System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.1 Overview 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4.2 Fault Log 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4.3 System Log 9 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5 Call Logger 9 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen 9 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6.1 Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen 9 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display 9 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.3 Icon Description 9 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication 9 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.5 ACD Indication 9 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.6 Telephone Activity 9 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.7 Radio Activity 9 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity 9 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.9 Tetra Individual Call Activity 9 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.10 Internal Intercom Activity 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.11 Instant Replay Activity 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.12 Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6.12.1 Adding a New Position 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.12.2 Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon 9 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.7 Critical Faults 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.1 Overview 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.2 Operator Presentation 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.3 Displaying the Critical Faults List 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.4 Acknowledging Critical Faults 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.5 Clearing Critical Faults 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.6 Adding a Reference Tag 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.7 Customised Help 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.8 Web Based Help 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.1 Overview 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.2 HTML Based Help Screen 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.3 HTML Edit Tool 9 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.4 Help Data 9 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025xiv

9.8.5 HTML Link Error 9 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 Introduction 10 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.1 Introduction 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2.2 To Enable Terminal Logon 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2.3 To Disable Terminal Logon 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Enable/Disable Line 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.1 Introduction 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.2 To Disable a Line 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.3 To Enable a Line 10 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 Enable/Disable Channel 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.1 Introduction 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.2 To Disable a Channel 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.3 To Enable a Channel 10 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5 Route Tone 10 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6 Radio Configuration 10 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6.1 Introduction 10 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.2 First Level Configuration 10 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3 Second Level Configuration -- Physical Channels 10 -- 17. . . . . . . . .

10.6.3.1 Options 10 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults 10 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.3 Bay and Channel Selection 10 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.4 Configure Pip Tone Parameters 10 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters 10 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.1 To Access the Edit Function 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.2 To Add a Terminal Icon 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.3 To Edit or Delete an Icon 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.8 Calibrate Screen -- Adjustment 10 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 xv

Products and systems from SunGard Public Sector Limited are subject to continuous development andwe reserve the right to amend specifications without notice. This document is not part of a contract orlicence except as may be expressly agreed.

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025xvi

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

High voltages are generated within the equipment.

Before carryingout any maintenance or repair work, ensure that theequipment is isolated from the electrical supply.

When the electrical supply cannot be isolated for specific reasons,testing, maintenance and/or repair tasks are to be undertaken only bycompetent technicians who are aware of the dangers involved, andhave taken all the necessary safety precautions.

Installations using VoIP contain media from

Portions Copyright E 2002--2007 Global IP Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved .

Global IP Solutions,GIPS,MediaWare, GIPSVoiceEngine, NetEQ, iLBC, iPCM--wb, iSAC,

GIPS Enhanced G.711, Remote Extension, Click--To--Talk and associated designmarks

and logos are trademarks of Global IP Solutions, and may be registered in certain

jurisdictions.

Patents and Patents Pending, Global IP Solutions, Inc. www.gipscorp.com

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 xvii

Customer Functionality

The purpose of this table is to give the customer a quick reference to the functionality supplied to theirsystem.

The following table should be completed on installiation to reflect the functionality of your system.

NOTE: Functionality and screen layout is totally dependent on your system specification.

Yes No

Chapter 5 -- Telephone

5.1 Telephone Page p

5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue p

5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Call Queue

5.2.3 PABX Call Capture

5.3 Calling Line Identity (CLI)

5.3.2 Enhanced CLI ( BT EISEC)

5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling

5.4.4 Last Number Redial

5.5 Web--Based Telephone Directory

5.6 Monitoring

5.7.1 Call Transfer to Another Terminal

5.7.2 PABX Transfer

5.8 PABX Key

5.9 Tele Eavesdrop

5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

5.11 Inter--Site Automatic Call Distribution

5.12 Conferencing

Chapter 6 -- Radio

Tetra Radio Functions

6.2 Talkgroup Setup

6.3 Unmonitored Talkgroup

6.4 Talkgroup Selection

6.5 Last Dispatcher Warning

6.6 Talkgroup History

6.7 Subscriber Profile

6.8 Subscriber Search

6.9 Subscriber List

6.10 RUI Profile

6.11 Call Events

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025xviii

6.12 Individual Calls

6.13 Inbound Individual Call

6.14 Clearing Individual Call

6.15 Individual Call Hold

6.16 Individual Call History

6.17 Individual Callback Operation

6.18 Group Callback Operation

6.19 Emergency Calls

6.20 Short Data Message Functions

6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages

6.22 All Audio Mute

6.23 Alert Tone

6.24 CCI Port Usage

6.25 CCI Port Summary

6.26 Status Code List

6.27 Mobile Resource

6.28 Radio Resource Group

6.29 Group Repeat

6.30 Radio Revert

Analogue Radio Functions

6.32 Radio Set Up

6.33 Use of Radio Keys

6.34 Talkthrough

6.35 Monitoring and Selecting

6.36 Combine

6.37 Remote Radio

Chapter 7 -- Conferencing and Internal Intercom

7.1 Connect Groups--Options

7.2 Connect Groups--Connecting

7.3 Standard Operator Intercom

7.4 Partitioned Operator Intercom

Chapter 8 -- Miscellaneous

8.1 Instant Replay (Local Recording)

8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications

8.2.3 Ancillary Key Alarms

8.3 New PIN or Password

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 xix

8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels

8.5 Call Supervisor (Console Request)

8.6 Area Set Up

8.7 Remote Access

8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads

8.9 Operator Note Pad

8.10 System Partitioning

8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning

8.12 Browser

Chapter 9 -- Support Functions

9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop

9.2 Mimic

9.3 Terminal Override

9.4 Fault Log

9.5 Call Logger

9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen

9.7 Critical Faults Screen

9.8 Web Based Help

Chapter 10 -- System Maintenance (ENG FNS)

10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On

10.3 Enable/Disable Line

10.4 Enable/Disable Channel

10.5 Route Tone

10.6 Radio Configuration

10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration

10.8 Calibrate Screen

VOLUME 1PREFACE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025xx

This page is intentionally blank.

Chapter 1

Introduction

VOLUME 1INTRODUCTION


Amb_Chapter_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 2

Amendment record


A Draft to IncorporateChanges to reflect V171

KJL 06/11/07

B Second Draft to IncorporateChanges Post Review

KJL 07/12/07

1 First Issue to IncorporateChanges to Reflect V171

KJL 20/12/07



Amb_Chapter_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 1 -- 3

Contents

1.1 Introduction 1 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 System Features 1 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3 User Positions (Terminals) 1 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4 Visual Presentation 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.1 Touch Screen 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2 Help 1 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3 Typical Main Screen 1 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5 Audio Presentation 1 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 Audible Indications and Alarms 1 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7 Keyboard 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8 Fallback Facilities 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9 Call Logger 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10 Internal Intercom 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11 Instant Replay Recorder 1 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12 Database 1 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 4





Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 1 -- 5

1.1 Introduction

This manual describes the operation and use of the Sungard Public Sector DS2000Integrated Communications Control System.

The DS2000 description and basic operation is described in the first part of the manual.Day-to-day operations are divided into chapters covering the main functions: Telephone,Radio, Miscellaneous, Support, and System Maintenance.

System administration of the database egBack Up andRestore etc are located in Volume 2.

Chapters 2 to 10 describe how to perform tasks or access particular functions. Themanualassumes that each sequence flows without interruption. However, to cover situations whereproblemsmay occur or if alternatives are available, there is a ‘HelpfulHint’ box to provide tipson the particular subject.

Appendices at the rear of the manual are: Glossary of Terms; Conditions of Approval forConnection toServicesProvidedbyUKPublic TelecommunicationsOperators; LineGroups;Site ID Codes and Legends.

1.2 System Features

The system provides connection of a wide variety of communication devices to otherdevices, either one-to-one or in conference. The DS2000 controls and receives data fromuser terminals. The terminals are provided with a touch screen Visual Display Unit (VDU)which ensures fast access to operational functions and eliminates the need for a keyboard.

TheDS2000 connects to PSTNandPABX lines, Private Circuits andmultiple radio systems.Calls pass via the DS2000 over the Local Area Network (LAN) to the Personal Computer(PC) at each user terminal. The PC provides aural and visual presentation of the calls in aform that enables the user to control and respond to inputs from the various types ofequipment.

Users logon to the systemwith aUser IDandPassword. This selects the telephone linesandradio channels etc to which the user has access to.

Users can answer and make telephone and radio calls, speak to other operators, haveinstant playback of recordings, and set up telephone and radio conferences etc.

A printer is provided as an administration aid to produce printouts from the systemfaults/events log.

Provision can be made for a call logger if required.

The switching equipment is duplicated so that there is always a standby ready to take overshould the working system fail. The equipment continually tests itself for malfunction andreports any faults to the Control Room. If a malfunction occurs to the working side, allexternal calls are switched to the standby without loss of service.

In the event of mains failure the DS2000 can be supported by an Uninterruptable PowerSupply (UPS) to maintain service until the standby generator operates or power is restored.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 6

1.3 User Positions (Terminals)

Below is an illustration of a typical User Terminal:

Bar Foot-switch

Typical Operator Position

Keyboard(Optional)

Touch-sensitivescreen withspeakers

VAIU comprising:

Mouse(Optional)

Headset SocketsHeadset volume control

P2 Keyboard socketLoudspeaker volume control

A User Terminal comprises:

S A touch-screen VDU

S A VOIP Audio Interface Unit (VAIU)

S A handset or headset

S A radio transmit footswitch

S A mouse (optional)

A keyboard is provided at all operator positions; however, the keyboard is generally removedonce the operator PC has been booted.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 1 -- 7

1.4 Visual Presentation

1.4.1 Touch Screen

TheVisual Display Unit (VDU) incorporates a touch screen. By touching the screen, you canselect items displayed on the screen such as keys or directory entries. In most cases thetouch screen is only activatedwhen you remove your finger from it. This permits you to touchit in one place and drag your finger along until you reach the item you want to select. Somekeys (e.g., Transmit) only operate while the key is being touched.

In all cases selected items change appearance on the screen. As well as indicating an activeor passive state, keys on the screen can incorporate identification codes and can bemade tochange colour or flash to indicate when an action is required by you.

The touch screen comprises a protective layer, across the surface of which harmlesshigh-frequency sound waves are transmitted. When you touch the screen, the sound isdamped at the point of contact, sensors around the edge of the screen detect the positionand relate it to the key or line of text.

A mouse may also be provided; use this in the normal way -- ‘point and click’.

1.4.2 Help

On-screen Help can be accessed by the HELP key. The Help facility provides a textualexplanation/description for each of the function keys available to you. The operation of thisfacility is explained in Chapter 9 (Support Functions).




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 8

1.4.3 Typical Main Screen

In the illustration below, the far left of the screen relates to the Mobile Resouce area. Thecenter area is the General Work Area currently displaying the Active Telephone Page. Thearea to the far right of the screen is the Integrated Call Queue where up to eight ‘queued’telephone calls can be shown (i.e., calls waiting to be answered) and the EMERGENCY,INDIVIDUAL CALLBACK REQUEST, TALKGROUP CALLBACK REQUEST, andINDIVIDUALCALLS keys canbemaximised for display. A detailed description of telephoneoperation and the Integrated Call Queue is given in Chapter 5.

The TAKE CALL key is displayed when the telephone queue is maximised in the IntegratedCall Queue area. When touched, incoming telephone calls are taken in priority and longestwaiting order.

Access to the various operational facilities is provided by three horizontal rows of keys, onerow at the top of the screen and two rows at the bottom. The TX key can be used as analternative to the footswitch when you want to transmit.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 1 -- 9

1.5 Audio Presentation

Each user position has a headset and a loudspeaker to receive speech. A VOIP AudioInterface Unit (VAIU) is provided at each operator position which can be mounted above orbelow the desk. The VAIU provides the interface between an operator’s headset/handsetand the DS2000 system. The VAIU additionally provides stereo interfaces to the operatorposition sound device to support instant recording.

In some cases the VAIU can be mounted to the rear of the operator desk with the volumecontrols and headset connections brought to the front on flying leads to facilitate a tidy desk.

The headset can be plugged into either of the two sockets, located on the VAIU. A secondheadset can be plugged in to the other socket as required. Both headsets will hear the sameaudio and both microphones are live.

The VAIU contains:

S Connection for two local headsets

S A headset volume control

S A loudspeaker volume control

S A USB socket

S A foot--switch connection

An audible incoming call alarm is generated by a wave file which is output to the operator’sloudspeaker. Two different tones are used to differentiate between ‘Urgent’ and ‘Normal’incoming calls.

Themaximum volume of the alarms is preset in the factory; however, they can be disabled ateach operator position.

A second audible tone is generated at the operator terminal, which sounds on incomingfaults/alarms. This sounder is also controlled from the operator console and is generatedfrom another wave file resident in the software.

Incoming audio signals are routed to the headset and/or to the loudspeaker according to therules summarised in the following table:




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 10

Function Earpiece Loudspeaker

Monitor Radio Monitored radio Monitored radios

Selected Radio Selected radio Selected radios

Select + Monitor Radio Selected + Monitored radio(1) Selected + Monitored radios(1)

Telephone Telephone None

Telephone + Monitor Radio Telephone Monitored radios (1)&(2)

Telephone + Select Radio Telephone Selected radios (2)

Other (3) Other (3) None

Other (3) + Monitor Radio Other (3) Monitored radios (1)&(2)

Key: (1) = The audio of Monitored radios is reduced by the valuepreset in the database, usually 16dB.

(2) = The Loudspeaker is forced on, if manually turned off.

(3) = Internal Intercom, Motorway Telephone, LocalRecorder replay

Note: Selecting a radio channel reduces audio levels on the active audio device for the monitoredradio channels at your terminal.

You can normally only select radio with telephone by the use of the HOLD OVERRIDE key.The SystemManager can configure the database to operate both simultaneously for certaintypes of user, if required. If youaremonitoring a channel and a second user selects the samechannel, your audio for that channel is reduced by 16dB. (This figure is set during installationin the System Default file.)

Helpful HintYour terminal audio may behave differently from the rules listed in thetable. Check with your System Manager to see whether these detailshave been changed in the database.

1.6 Audible Indications and Alarms

Audible incoming call indication is provided by a sounder fitted at the terminal position. Twodifferent tones are used to differentiate between Urgent and Normal incoming calls. Theaudible indications can be individually disabled at each user position. A further audible alarmin the form of a continuous tone is provided by another sounder at all user positions whichoperates on incoming faults/alarms and radio alarms for users enabled to receive them.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 1 -- 11

1.7 Keyboard

A keyboard is only required for carrying out the database update and editing functions, andfor use with the Facility Sockets.

Database editing and updating is performed by designated personnel. A keyboardconnection on the VOIP Audio Interface Unit permits a keyboard to be connected at anyoperator position when required.

1.8 Fallback Facilities

The DS2000 switch equipment is duplicated for high reliability. However, because ofregulations that govern communications systems connected to the Public SwitchedTelephone Network (PSTN), it is also necessary to have alternative equipment available tohandle essential telephone traffic in the event of a complete failure of the switch.

In the DS2000, besides the essential telephone lines (PSTN), some of the PABX and mainradio channels are also routed to the fallback equipment. In the case of telephones, fallbackcan be to an HTEC key and lamp unit, to another DS2000, or a local arrangement with yourtelecommunications provider can be made. In the case of analogue radios, fallback istypically to aCyfasC10controller. Talkgroup fallback canbe to handsets, a fixedmobile radioset located in the control room or to a remote control unit i.e., Zetron. Switching to thesefallback units is normally automatic, but it can be initiated manually (by a qualified person).

Operation of the fallback units is described in the manufacturers’ manuals.

When theDS2000switch is restored to service, telephone calls in progress using the fallbackequipment are not immediately switched back to it. The individual lines are monitored andswitched back to normal operation at the end of the call.

1.9 Call Logger

If a call logger is provided as part of your system, refer to the call logger manufacturer’sliterature for details. The call logger has its own printer -- it does not use the DS2000 systemprinter.

1.10 Internal Intercom

To reduce noise in the Control Room internal intercom provides direct connection betweenuser positions.

1.11 Instant Replay Recorder

Each terminal’s voice traffic is recorded digitally and is available to you for instant playback.Each message is labelled with a message number, date, time of starting and duration. Therecording is doneat the terminal and streamed to anaudio server for storeage . Speech is notrecorded when using the tannoy.

The capacity of the digital recorder is dependent on customer requirements.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0251 -- 12

1.12 Database

DS2000 functionality is determined by the database which is stored in themain and standbyservers. Much of this database is configured at the factory to specifications agreed betweenSunGard Vivista and the customer. However, using the Database editing facilities, specificitems can be configured locally by the Engineer or System Manager.

Chapter 2

Start Up and DS2000 Log On

VOLUME 1START UP AND DS2000 LOG ON



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 2

Amendment record



KJL 06/11/07


KJL 07/12/07


KJL 20/12/07




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 2 -- 3

Contents

2.1 Introduction 2 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 Introduction to DS2000 Log On 2 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1 The Log On screen 2 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.2 Changeover Log On 2 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 The Greeting Screen 2 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.1 ID Accepted 2 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.2 User Type 2 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3.3 Functional Area at Log On 2 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 4





Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 2 -- 5

2.1 Introduction

TheMulti--HomeSelection screen allows you to connect to and logon to anumber of differentsites from the same terminal position. On start--up the terminal automatically displays theSite Selection screen as shown below, from which to select a site.

Touching one of the site keys will initiate a connection to that site and a screen displaying thedownload of the DS2000 operator configuration files as shown below.

When the download is complete the DS2000 Log On screen appears. If you are unable toconnect to the selected site theDownloadFailure screenwill be displayed. Touching theQuitkey returns the terminal to the Site Selection screen.

Helpful HintYouwill not beable to logon if there are no audio lines available or anaudioconnection cannot be established.

A ”No audio lines available”message will be displayed in the messagearea if this is detected.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 6

2.2 Introduction to DS2000 Log On

The facilitieswhichare available to youare decidedby theaccess rights given to your LogOn(User ID and Password) and/or to the terminal used.

Each individual User ID andPassword is allocateda defined level of authority whichprovidesaccess to particular facilities. The facilities that can be accessed by you are preset by theSystem Manager into the database. The database recognises each User ID and Passwordas it is entered when you log on and releases only the facilities available to you and/or to thatterminal postition.

2.2.1 The Log On screen

At the top of the Log On screen you will see -- from left to right:

a) The date and time

b) The Site ID and the number of the terminal

c) A data connection state icon

d) An audio connection state icon

e) A message area

f) Two ‘keys’ labelled HELP and QUIT

The centre of the screen contains the ‘General Work Area’ displaying a qwerty keyboard.

Enter your User ID by touching the appropriate characters on the keypad then touch theENTER key.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 2 -- 7

Note: The characters you enter for your password are input to the text area but they are displayedas stars for security reasons.

You are then prompted to enter your Password. Touch the appropriate characters thentouch the ENTER key.

If you make a mistake when logging on, touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the lastnumber/character entered, or the ERASE key to delete all the numbers/characters en-tered.

Helpful HintIf you see the message: LOG ON INVALID; RE--ENTER

displayed in the message area, it is because:

a) The USER ID is not recorded in the database (UserProfile file)

b) The USER ID is already being used by another user

c) The USER ID is valid but the Password is incorrect

Three successive Log On failures will cause the terminal to be disabled.When this occurs refer to the System Manager to re-enable the terminal.System failure will also prevent logging on.

If you see the message:

a) DATABASE NOT AVAILABLE it is due to DS2000Network Server failure. The terminal is unable toaccess the database to perform Log On checks

b) SYSTEM BUSY PLEASE RETRY it is due to DS2000Common Equipment failure. The DS2000 is unableto inform the switch that a user is logging on

c) LOGON INITIALISATION FAILURE it is due to theDS2000 Server Database being incomplete orcorrupted

Likewise system failure can prevent logging off.

If you see the message:

a) DATABASE NOT AVAILABLE it is because the terminalcannot access the DS2000 Server to effect loggingoff

b) SYSTEMNOTAVAILABLE it is due to DS2000CommonEquipment failure and prevents auto Log Off




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 8

If you want to close down the operator screen touch QUIT.

TheHELP key is used when additional information about a particular function key isrequired. To obtain help, first touch the HELP key and then touch the key corre-sponding to the function forwhich youwant help. Help information is displayed in theGWA of the screen.

The table below shows all the possible states of theData andAudio Connection Icons on theterminal:

Icon State Description Data Connection Data Ok

The data connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is ok.

SVR Lost

The DS2000 SVR has been lost. It is still possible to perform certain functions on the OP, however database download and logon/logoff are not available when the system is in this state

SNP Lost/Unable to connect to.

The DS2000 SNP has been lost the user will be presented with the logon screen; the OP will remain in this state until the system recovers.

Audio Connection

Audio Ok

The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is established ok.

Audio Not connected

The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is not yet established although there are audio connections available.

No audio lines available.

The audio connection from the OP to the DS2000 system is not yet established there are no audio connections available.

2.2.2 New Log On

Some systems provide a takeover Log On facility. This can be used to log on at an existingin--use operator position without the need to disrupt facilities currently being serviced at thatposition. The current user is automatically logged off and you take over that position and itscurrent active main screen. The NEW LOGON key is used to initiate the takeover andinvokes the Log On screen in the GWA of the screen. Enter your User ID and Password asnormal.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 2 -- 9

2.3 The Greeting Screen

TheGreeting screen is displayedwhen you have successfully logged on. Your name or ID isincorporated into theGreeting screen so that you can confirm that you are recognised by thesystem.

Touch any part of theGreeting screen to display theUser Type Selection screen, whichgivesyou your initial set up choice for the task(s) allocated to you.

2.3.1 ID Accepted

Helpful HintIn situations where someone else has tried to use your ID whilst you arelogged on, or has tried to change their User ID to yours, the warning:

**** ID NOT SECURE ***

will be displayed prominently in the Greeting screen.

Depending on local circumstances, you should change your ID and/or ad-vise your System Manager.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 10

2.3.2 User Type

A screen similar to the one below is displayed after you have touched the GREETINGSCREEN.

TheUser Type last usedwith your User IDwill be highlighted; if this is still satisfactorytouch the RESUME key. If you need to change to another User Type, touch theappropriate key. After touching your choice the system advances to display theFunctional Area Select screen.

Helpful HintKeys that are not valid for your User ID will be displayed in their quiescent(idle) colours.

If this is the first time you have logged on using this User ID, theRESUMEkey will not be displayed.

If the User Type last used is valid for the User ID you are now using, or ifthat User Type is no longer authorised for your User ID, theRESUME keywill not be displayed. Refer to your Supervisor or System Manager.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 2 -- 11

2.3.3 Functional Area at Log On

A screen similar to the one below is displayed after you have made you choice on theprevious User Type Selection screen.

The Functional Area(s) last used with your User Type, will be highlighted. If this ar-rangement is still satisfactory touch the DONE key. When you need to add or deleteFunctional Areas, touch the appropriate Functional Area key(s) before touching theDONE key.

The Preselection menu will now be displayed. The Preselection Menu screenprovides your initial options.

Helpful HintFunctional Area keys that are not valid for yourUser Typewill be displayedin their quiescent (idle) colours.

If you touchQUIT your selectionwill be abandoned, youwill be LoggedOffand you are returned to the Log On screen.

Refer to Chapter 8, Functional Areas, for further details of Functional Areakeys.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0252 -- 12


Chapter 3

Initial Options

VOLUME 1INITIAL OPTIONS



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0253 -- 2

Amendment record



KJL 06/11/07


KJL 07/12/07


KJL 20/12/07




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 3 -- 3

Contents

3.1 The Preselections Menu 3 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2 Clean Screen 3 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3 Calibrate Screen 3 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4 Main Screen 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 Terminal Override 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 New Password 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7 Update Database 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Events/Fault Log 3 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 Remote Access 3 --10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0253 -- 4





Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 3 -- 5

3.1 The Preselections Menu

The Preselections menu provides access to the working screens, as well as to the ScreenCleaning and Calibration options.

Someof theother keys displayedbelowmaynot beavailable to you. The items displayedaredependent on your User ID authorisation.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0253 -- 6

3.2 Clean Screen

By touching the VDU screen it will become dirty, and so it must be regularly cleaned.However, to avoid malfunction it should only be cleaned whilst the ultrasonic grid isdeactivated or the monitor is switched off; the most convenient time to clean thescreen is before you call up the main working screens.

Touch theCLEANSCRN key in the Preselectionsmenu. Youwill see themessage:

and will then have 14 seconds to clean the screen.

Use an anti-static screen cleaning fluid applied to a soft cloth or cleaning pad. Donot put fluid directly onto the screen and do not over-moisten the cloth, ex-cess cleaning fluid may interfere with the action of touch screen sensors locatedaround the edge of the screen.

As you clean the screen, the display counts down to show the number of secondsremaining before the screen becomes ‘live’ again. When there are only three sec-onds left, the screen display changes to:

At the end of the screen-cleaning time the Preselections menu will reappear.

CLEAN SCREEN NOW

STOP CLEANING NOW 3 SECONDS TO GO




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 3 -- 7

3.3 Calibrate Screen

TheCalibrate Screen facility is used tomatch the screen to your working position. Itensures that when you touch the screen, the facility or the directory line you see isthe one you actually touch.

Whilst sitting in your normalworkingposition, touch theCALIBSCREEN key. Whenthe display changes to the Calibration screen, touch the target on the screen asprompted without moving from your normal seated position.

Youwill be asked to touch the targets at different areas on the screenand thenasked“Does the cursor jump to your fingertip?” To confirm this touch the grey area of thescreen in several places. If the cursor follows your finger touch the YES key asshown in the following screen.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0253 -- 8

If ‘Yes’ is chosen the calibration is done successfully. The new calibration data will be savedafter a countdown of 30 seconds and then the Preselections menu will reappear. From nowon, any keys and directory information lines that you touch will be matched to your personalrequirements.

Note: The calibration settings that have been saved are applicable only to the terminal at which youare sitting.

You will need to recalibrate the screen when you sit at another terminal.

Helpful HintBefore you can return to the Preselections menu, you must touch all threecalibration targets.

Touching the screen too far from a target causes problems with thecalibration process.

If you cannot escape or select the NO key due to calibration problemsseek help from your Supervisor.

Do not reset or switch off the PC.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 3 -- 9

3.4 Main Screen

Touch the MAIN SCRN key to display the working screen.


Touch the TERM OVRD key to take control of a console where an operator is al-ready loggedon. (This key is not accessible to all users andmaynot bedisplayedonall screens.)

The message:

is displayed and the Terminal Select screen replaces the Preselections menu.

To take control of a terminal, touch the appropriate terminal position key entry.

The response you get is determined by the state of the terminal you select.

SELECT A TERMINAL POSITION

3.6 New Password

The NEW PASSWRD key is used when it is necessary to change your password.Touch this key to replace the Preselections screen with the Change Passwordscreen. Enter the new password, and then re--enter the new password to validateas prompted.

When the new password has been accepted, the Preselections menu is displayedagain.

3.7 Update Database

Touch the UPDATE DBASE key to display the Update Database Menu screen.The databasemenu consists of a set of keys which give access to all the databasefiles which you are permitted to edit.

3.8 Events/Fault Log

Touch theFAULT LOG key to display a log of specified events, alarms andsystemfaults. The most recent report is entered at the top of the log. The file typicallycontains the latest 240 (24 x 10 pages) logged events.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0253 -- 10

3.9 Remote Access

Provided that the Intersite link is available for use, touch the REM ACC key toenable your terminal to become a virtual terminal at a selected remote site.

When you touch the key, the Remote Access screen is displayed in the GWA andthe message

is displayed in the message area.

Refer to Section 8.13 for further details.

CHOOSE A SITE TO ACCESS

Chapter 4

Main Screen

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0254 -- 2

Amendment record



KJL 06/11/07


KJL 07/12/07


KJL 20/12/07

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 4 -- 3

Contents

4.1 Introduction 4 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 Major Function Selection Keys -- Typical Configuration 4 -- 6. . . . . . . .

4.2.1 Top Row Function Keys 4 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.2 Bottom Row Function Keys 4 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 New Logon 4 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0254 -- 4


VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 4 -- 5

4.1 Introduction

The Main Screen is accessed from the Preselections screen by touching the MAINSCREEN key.

The default type of screen is dependent on your User Type. A typical screen is illustratedbelow.

The Main Screen is divided into groups and panels of Function keys, Operational keys andQueue lists. The exact position of function keys and panels displayed is dependent on theway the system has been configured at the factory. However, there will always beaDate andTime panel, Terminal Identity, a Message Area and the HELP and QUIT keys.

The key layout displayed at your terminal may differ from the illustration because your UserIDand terminal number ultimately govern the facilities andoptions displayed. The variations,under the control of the System Manager via the database setup, enable specific positionsand/or operators to be designated.

In nearly every case however, themajor function selection keys listed on the following pageswill be present on the operational Main Screen. These keys determine which of the othermajor function screens can be invoked to replace the screen you are currently using.

The General Work Area displays Priority Telephone Pages, Telephone Directory, Dial Pad,etc. The areas at the side of the screen display Mobile Resources, incoming telephone andradio calls etc. These are covered in this manual under their relevant functions.

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0254 -- 6

4.2 Major Function Selection Keys -- Typical Configuration

4.2.1 Top Row Function Keys

Most top row keys are explained later in themanual. The following five top rowkeys are usedto switch between different types of operational screens:

Touch theRADIO key to invoke theRadio pages screen in theGeneralWork Areawhereup to 15 Radio Base Station and/or talkgroup keys can be displayed as default.

Touch the MOBIL key to invoke the Mobile Resource screen where up to 51 mobileresourceentries canbedisplayed simultaneously (three scrollable columns of 17entriesper column).

Touch the TELE key to invoke the Active Telephone page screen in the General WorkArea.

Touch the INDIV key to invoke the Individual List screen in theGeneralWork Areawherean active point to point call can be displayed and/or a list of these calls waiting to beanswered.

Touch the BRWSR key to invoke the Browser screen in the General Work Area whereWeb--based functions can be accessed.

4.2.2 Bottom Row Function Keys

The Function Select tabs located at the bottom of the screen enable you to access specificgroups of functions. When a Functions tab is touched, the tab is highlighted and theassociated Function keys are displayed in the row below it.

The functions of the keys displayedare described in theappropriate sections of thismanual.The keys illustrated here may not all be available to some classes of user. For those userswho are excluded, the prohibited keys will either appear in muted colours or will be missingaltogether.

The ENG (Engineer Functions) tab provides access to the Radio Configuration,Enable/Disable Terminal, Enable/Disable Channel, Enable/Disable Line, RouteTone and Alert Tone keys. The use of these keys is described in theappropriate sections of this manual.

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 4 -- 7

The SUPER (Supervisor Functions) tab provides access to the Mimic,Dynamic Operator, Telephone Eavesdrop, Terminal Eavesdrop and CCI Usagekeys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of thismanual.

The RADIO (Radio Functions) tab provides access to the Subs SearchTalkgroup Setup, Radio Setup, Talkthrough, Combine Radio and Connect 2,keys. Use of these keys is described in the appropriate sections of thismanual.

The LISTS (Airwave Lists) tab provides access to the Talkgroup, Emergency,Individual Callback, Status, and Group Callback list keys. The use of thesekeys is described in Chapter 6.

The LOGS tab provides access to the Last Message, Instant Replay, IndividualHistory and Call Events keys. The use of these keys is described in theappropriate sections of this manual.

The TERM SETUP (Terminal Setup) tab provides access to the Clean Screen,Calibrate screen, Functional Area Setup, Area Revert, New Logon andAncillary Function keys. The use of these keys is described in the appropriatesections of this manual.

The AUDIO SETUP tab provides access to the Normal Alarm, Urgent Alarmand Headset Volume keys. The use of these keys is described in theappropriate sections of this manual.

VOLUME 1MAIN SCREEN



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0254 -- 8

4.3 New Logon

The New Logon facility is provided to permit a replacement user to log on at an existing userposition without the need to disrupt facilities being serviced at that position; the existing userdoes not have to log off, thus allowing the monitoring and control of radios etc. to continuewithout interruption.

Touch the NEW LOGON key to display the standard Logon screen. Log on in the normalmanner. After your User ID and Password have been validated by the system, the originaluser is automatically logged off, you are logged on, and the Main Screen is redisplayed withTAKE--OVER LOGON O.K in themessagearea. Theoriginal user’s particulars are stored in thedatabase for reinstatement when that user next logs on. You will have the facilities andfunctions that were available to the previous user. You may need to recalibrate or clean thescreen. Refer to Sections 3.3 and 3.2.

Helpful HintIf you are already logged on at another terminal, the message

LOGON INVALID

will be displayed and the original user will remain logged on.

When you have a ‘User Type’ that is not valid for theUser Type of the userrelinquishing the terminal, the message

LOGON INVALID

is displayed and the logon attempt will fail.

After three successive Takeover Logon failures, the terminal is disableduntil re-enabled (by the Supervisor or other personwith access to theE/DTERM key).

Any uncompleted Logon or Logon failure is recorded in the Fault/System/Event log.

Chapter 5

Telephone

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.0_TELEPHONE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 2

Amendment Record


A First draft incorporatingVer 9.11 functionality

SS 25.04.06

B Amendments to first draftto incorporate Ver 131functionality

SS 24.06.06


KJL 22.08.06


1A First draft to incorporateV161

TS 13.09.07


SS 01/11/07

3 Minor text changes DSW 02/09/09

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.0_TELEPHONEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 3

Contents

5.1 Telephone Page 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.1 Introduction 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.2 Active Telephone Page 5 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.3 Number of Telephone Pages Available 5 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.4 Telephone Key Types 5 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI 5 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1.6 Audible Incoming Call Indications 5 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Taking a Call 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue View 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.1 Tetra Call Summary Key 5 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Queue View 5 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2.1 Telephone Call Summary Key 5 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.3 PABX Call Capture 5 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.4 Answering a Call 5 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.5 Microphone On/Off 5 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.6 Clearing a Call 5 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.7 Holding a Line 5 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.8 Releasing a Held Line 5 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Emergency Call -- CLI (Calling Line Identity) 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1 Enhanced CLI 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1.1 Calls Received from a Fixed Location 5 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.2 Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines 5 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.3 Calls Received from a Mobile 5 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1.4 Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls 5 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.2 Last Caller Details 5 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.3 C&C Links 5 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3.1 C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface) 5 -- 225.4 Making a Call 5 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.1 Telephone Page Tabs 5 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection 5 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.2 Telephone Dial Pad 5 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.1 Telephone Dialling 5 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling 5 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2.3 Tetra ISSI Dialling 5 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling 5 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.4 Redial -- Last Numbers 5 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.5 Dial In/Out List 5 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 Telephone Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1 Web--Based Telephone Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1.1 View Directory 5 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.2 Regional Partitioning 5 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.3 Searching 5 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.4 Pre--defined Category Search 5 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.5 Favourites 5 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.6 Sensitivity Classification 5 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen 5 -- 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.0_TELEPHONE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 4

5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite 5 -- 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.9 View/Delete Referenced Favourite 5 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5.1.10 New Favourite Page 5 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6 Monitoring 5 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6.1 Normal Call Monitoring 5 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7 Transferring Calls 5 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7.1 Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL) 5 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7.2 PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX) 5 -- 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8 PABX Key 5 -- 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9 Telephone Eavesdrop 5 -- 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.9.1 How to Use Tele Eaves 5 -- 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.10.1 Introduction 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10.2 Using the ACD Key 5 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10.3 Wrap Up 5 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11 Common Call Queue 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.1 Introduction 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.2 Available Sites and Free Operators 5 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.3 Handoff Modes 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11.3.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.3.2 Parallel Mode 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.4 Incoming External Call 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.5 Incoming Handoff Call 5 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.6 Call Hand--off Mechanism 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.7 Lines and Extensions 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.8 Call Logging 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.11.8.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only) 5 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11.8.2 Parallel Mode 5 -- 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.12 Conferencing 5 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.1_TELEPHONE PAGEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 5

5.1 Telephone Page

5.1.1 Introduction

All telephone lines, both analogue and digital, connected to the DS2000 are controlled usingtelephone keys located on the operator screens.

All telephone keys are displayed for use on the Priority TelephonePages (PTPs) on themainscreen. Each telephone page can accommodate up to 25 keys.

The Active Telephone Page, when invoked, appears in the GeneralWork Area (GWA) of thescreenand can showup to ten telephone keys in two rows of five. It also displays threeboxedareas. The large box on the left displays calls in Connect Groups (conference), the large boxon the right displays calls on Hold, and the smaller central box displays an active opentelephone line.

5.1.2 Active Telephone Page

The Active Telephone Page is displayed in the General Work Area of the Main Screen. Itdisplays the user’s current call status, function keys and up to ten line keys from a specifiedTelephone Page.

a

b c

d

e

f

a) Active Telephone AreaThis area displays a telephone line key being used by you. A line displayed inthis area can be in the Dialling Out state, Monitored state or Active Call inProgress state.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.1_TELEPHONE PAGE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 6

b) In Connect AreaThis area displays the keys of telephone calls that you have put in ConnectGroup 1. A maximum of four calls can be displayed.

c) On Hold AreaThis area displays the telephone calls you have placed on Hold. Up to four callscan be shown here, with the longest Held call displayed first.

Touching a Held call removes Hold andmoves it back into the Active TelephoneArea.

d) Telephone Function Keys AreaThis area displays up to seven telephone function keys. This is a factory-setoption; typical configurations could be Hold, Tran Call, Dial Pad etc.

e) Telephone Lines AreaThis area displays a duplication of the top two rows of telephone keys from thefirst telephone page. The page which is deemed the first page, and hence thepage from which the ten keys are duplicated, is System Manager configurable.

f) Telephone PagesThe ACTIVE TELE tab invokes the Active Telephone page. Up to fourTELEPHONE PAGE tabs can also be shown and, if the MORE PAGES tab isactive, can be used to scroll through up to 12 telephone pages. The number ofpages available to you is a System Manager configurable option.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 7

5.1.3 Number of Telephone Pages Available

Although there are twelve Priority Telephone Pages available for selection using the tabs onthe Main Screen, the database has capacity for 60 pages.

The tabs above the telephone keys on each page are used for selecting other tele-phone pages (up to 12 from 60, set by the SystemManager). Each of the telephonepages can contain a maximum of 25 keys. Themiddle four tabs directly select theirindicated page. The right-handMOREPAGES tab causes the tabs for the next fourpages to be displayed. TouchingMOREPAGESagain displays the tabs for thenextfour, up to a maximum of 12 different pages. In the normal state, these tabs aretypically darker than the current page tabwhich is brightenedor adifferent colour. Allkeys and tabs are touch-sensitive.

5.1.4 Telephone Key Types

There are three types of telephone keys that can be configured on your system:

a) Line Key This type of key is used to control a specific physical telephone line orDPNSS extension. The key flashes to indicate an incoming call, andwhen the call is answered it changes colour (configurable). Touchingthe key in the Active state clears the call and returns it to the quiescentcondition. The key text usually identifies the associated line.

b) Hot Key This type of key is used to automatically dial a specific pre-programmednumber. The systemallocates the first available outgoing line (as set bySystem Manager configuration). The key cannot be used for incomingcalls. Outgoing call status is displayed on the line allocated for the HotKey call. The text of an active Hot Key call displays the attributes fromthe line key allocated for the call.

c) CombinedKey This type of key operates as a line key for incoming calls and as a Hot

key for dialling, with the exception that for dialling the system onlyattempts to use the line orDPNSS extensionassociatedwith its line keyoperation.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.1_TELEPHONE PAGE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 8

5.1.5 Telephone Keys with CLI

All key colours, attributes and identification numbers can be configured by the SystemManager.

Telephone key text.When CLI is displayed onthe key the top area isused for Tele Line text.When CLI is disabled bothareas are used with fivecharacters in each.

CLI -- This area displays the first 14 characters of the caller’s Id. The caller ID isretrieved from the EISEC service or the internal CLI facility. If this information isnot available then the text zone displays the caller’s telephone number. Whenno CLI information is available, then NO CLI is displayed.

D = Line DisabledM = Monitor state of MON/TALK functionT = Line monitored with talking enabledH = Line on Holdm = Line monitored by other operator

C1 = Line is in Conn 1C2 = Line is in Conn 2CNNN = Terminal number ofanother operator when in aconnect

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

F AUL T

C1 D

When displayed, indicatesan interface or line fault.

XXXXX

An operator position number is displayed on the key at other terminals when an operator hasselected, or is monitoring, the line.

‘FAULT’ is displayed on the top line when the system has detected an Input/Output card orline fault.

5.1.6 Audible Incoming Call Indications

Depending on the way that the system has been set up by your System Manager, anincoming telephone call will result in one of three indications:

a) Urgent Alarm

b) Normal Alarm

c) No Audible Indication

When the system has been configured to present audible indications, these can be enabledor disabled at individual terminal positions using the following keys:

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 9

Touch theNORMALARM key to disable theNormal (non--urgent) audible indicationat your position. The disabled status of the alarm is shown as a different key colour.Touch the key again to re-enable the alarm.

Touch the URGT ALARM key to disable the Urgent audible indication at your posi-tion. The disabled status of the alarm is shown as a different key colour.

Repeat the above process to re-enable the alarm.

Note: If an alarm is disabled, all alarms associated with that specified group--set are disabled.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.2_TAKING A CALL_8 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 10

5.2 Taking a Call

You are alerted to an incoming call by the flashing of the Line or Combined key. The Key iconin the appropriate call queue position also flashes. The flash rate can be configured toincrease if the call is not answered within a preset time. The system may also have beenconfigured to give an audible warning. These latter features can be changed by the SystemManager.

5.2.1 Integrated Telephone Call Queue View

The IntegratedCall Queue provides combined visibility of both the Telephoneand Tetra radiocall queues which you can switch between to take calls for either type.

When the queue(s) for incoming Telephone calls are displayed a summary of the incomingTetra calls is shown, and when the Tetra radio call queues are displayed a summary of theincoming Telephone call queue(s) is shown.

You expand the view for the required queues by touching the current summary key that isdisplayed.

When the Telephone queue is visible, incoming telephone calls are placed in the queue areaat the right hand sideof themain screen as shown below. This view shows the Telephone callqueues together with a summary of the incoming Tetra calls key where there is one incomingTelephone call and no Tetra calls.

Inc

Tetra Calls Summary Key.

Incoming TelephoneCall Queue.

One Incoming Telephonecall presented in queueposition 1

Incoming Telephone callqueue position 8

You can take the Telephone call by either touching the TAKE CALL key, the telephone key inthe call queue (at the top of the display), or that telephone key on its telephone page.

5.2.1.1 Tetra Call Summary Key

This key is displayed at the bottom of the queue and consolidates the four main incomingTetra calls: -- Emergency, Individual Callback, Group Callback and Individual Calls onto onekey and indicates the count of calls in each queue.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.2_TAKING A CALL_8E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 11

The background colour for each count in the Tetra summary key is derived from the actualTetra keys when they are displayed. These colours are configured using the Tetra Coloursdatabase file. The key is updated dynamically and the counts are incremented ordecremented as calls come in or are taken.

The following screen shows an example with counts:

If you wish to take a Tetra call while in this view, then touching the summary key will changethe view to the Tetra Call view as described in the following section.

5.2.2 Integrated Tetra Queue View

The following screen shows the Tetra call queues together with a summary of the incomingTelephone calls key.

There are eight queue positions within the Incoming Telephone Call Queues Summary keywith twounanswered incomingTelephonecalls shown in thequeues. AnEmergency call andthree Individual calls are indicated on their repective keys. As there are no calls outstandingfor Individual Callback or Group Callback those keys are not invoked.

IncIncoming Telephone CallQueues Summary

Tetra Call Keys --only appear whenthat function isgenerated andunanswered.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 12

The TAKE RADIO key will take Emergency calls, Individual Callback, Group Callback, andIndividual calls, in this order if there are outstanding calls of more than one type. Calls canbetaken out of order by selecting the specific Tetra key.

When an unacknowledged Emergency request is outstanding, touching the Emergency keyautomatically invokes the Emergency List with that Emergency acknowledged.

When an Individual Callback request is outstanding, touching the Individual Callback keyinitiates a call to the radio that requested the Individual Callback and automatically displaysthe Individual Calls page.

When a Group Callback request is outstanding, touching the Group Callback keyautomatically invokes the radio page, and the talkgroup key associated with the radio thatrequested the Group Callback is changed to ‘Selected’.

When an incoming Individual Call is awaiting an answer, touching the Individual Call keyaccepts the awaiting call and automatically displays the Individual Calls page.

5.2.2.1 Telephone Call Summary Key

This key is shown at the top of the display and is a summary of all the Telephone queuesconfigured for your User Type. It displays each queue name and the number of unansweredcalls in each of the queues. A queue entry is defined in the following fomat:

XXXXXXXXXXXX N

Where:

S XXXXXXXXXXXX is the twelve character queue name as defined by the SystemManager

S N is the count of the number of calls in the queue and can be up to the number oflines in the system. It is displayed with a background colour of the highest prioritycall in that queue.

Themaximum number of queues that can be displayed is eight. If there are fewer than eightqueues then the queues are spaced proportionally, in the available space on the key.

Two examples of a Telephone Call Summary key, one containing eight queues and onecontaining four queues is shown below.

The key is updated dynamically and the counts are incremented for a queue when a callcomes in for that queue and decremented for a queue when a call is taken from that queue.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 13

Note: The background colour for the count may change, if the new line at the head of queue is of adifferent type to the previous one.

If youwish to take a Telephone call while in this view, touching the summary key changes theview to the Telephone Call view and the TAKE RADIO key changes to become the TAKECALL key as described in the section 5.2.1. The call can now be taken as normal.

5.2.3 PABX Call Capture

Note: This facility is not available on all systems.

PABX Call Capture provides an automatic answering facility for an incoming call, prior to thecall being dealt with by an operator. The facility confirms to the caller that their call has beenreceived and is in a queue, awaiting attention. The automatic answer plays a call progresstone to the caller; this may be in the form of a Ring Tone, Hold Tone, Music on Hold etc,depending on the database.

Thepurpose of PABXCall Capture is to ensure that any incoming call is acknowledgedwithina specified time and retains its position within the take-call queue. If the facility was notincorporated in those systems having an automatic answering and queueing facility, any callnot answered before the PABX ring time-out expired would be treated as a new call andplaced at the back of the relevant incoming call queue.

Auto-Answered calls appear, in all respects, as normal ringing in calls and therefore cannotbe distinguished from them.

Note: Those lines programmed for Auto-Answer are put into appropriate groups, with thecorresponding ring time and call tone being determined in the database by the SystemManager.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 14

5.2.4 Answering a Call

To speak to the caller, either:

a) Touch the TAKE CALL key

b) Touch the appropriate key in the call queue (not configured on all systems)

c) Touch the line key itself

TheTAKECALL key is thepreferredoption as it selects thehighest-priority call that hasbeenwaiting longest. Methods b) and c) can be used to override the priority function. Somesystems generate a message saying that the system has been overridden. This message issent to designated terminals and may be entered in the system log.

When the call is accepted (or cancelled by the caller) the Key icon is removed from the callqueue area and the Line key stops flashing. If there are more calls waiting in that queue, thenext highest priority call is displayed.

The key of the answered call is displayed in the Active Telephone area of the ActiveTelephone Page.

If the call is answeredby another user, that user’s terminal position number is displayed at thebottom of the Line key.

You can also answer a call when you are already speaking on another call. In this case youwill be connected to the new caller and the first call will automatically be put on Hold.

Helpful HintIf a radio channel/talkgroup is already selected, your ability to answer atelephone call depends ona value set in thedatabase by the SystemMan-ager:

a) If Simultaneous Access is enabled, you are able toanswer the call and the radio/talkgroup remainsselected. Your microphone is connected to thetelephone line as normal; you can also speak on theradio channel by using the TX key or footswitch.

b) If Simultaneous Access is disabled, and your valuein the database is set for Radio Priority you cannotanswer a telephone call and the radio channeland/or talkgroup remains selected.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 15

5.2.5 Microphone On/Off

The initial system condition is Microphone On. When you do not want the caller tohear you, touch the MIC OFF key. The message

is displayed in the message area. Touch the key again to re-enable themicrophone.

TheMIC OFF key also prevents transmissions over the radio; it is not overriddenby the footswitch or the TX key.

MICROPHONE OFF

5.2.6 Clearing a Call

Clear the call by touching the Line key. On DPNSS extensions and on somePSTN lines, thekey will revert to the idle state automatically if the caller clears first.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 16

5.2.7 Holding a Line

Touch the HOLD key to Hold a call. The key is displayed in the On Hold area of theActive Telephone Page, and an ‘H’ will be displayed on the key.

Up to four Held calls can be displayed in the box. If there are more than four Heldcalls, when Hold is released from an earlier call, the fifth call will be displayed. Up toeight calls can be put on hold at each terminal.

The message

is displayed in themessage area and a comfort tone applied to the caller’s linewhilston Hold.

Up to two comfort tones can be programmed to be used when a telephone caller isplaced on hold. The PrimaryComfort Tone is applied until thePrimary Comfort ToneDuration has expired (system configurable), at which point the Secondary ComfortTone (if configured) is applied. If no Secondary Comfort Tone is configured, thePrimary Comfort Tone remains whilst the call is on hold.

When the line is put on Hold, the relevant Page Selection key colour and flash ratechange to indicate that thepagehas aHeld call. If the relevant PageSelection key isnot displayed, theMORE PAGES key changes to indicate that there is a hidden callon Hold.

A Held line can be released by another user (system configurable).

Lines placed on Hold by other users will display their terminal number on the key.

LINE HELD

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 17

5.2.8 Releasing a Held Line

Touchany Line keywhich showsan ‘H’ in theborder to retrieve the call on that line. It doesnotmatter whether it was originally Held by another user or yourself (system configurable). Themessage LINE UNHELD is displayed in the message area and any comfort tone removed.You are now able to talk to the caller.

Any telephone line you have open is automatically placed on Hold.

If you are in an open Connect Group, the Held line is released and placed in the ConnectGroup.

Helpful HintThe Hold facility will not be available and the message

is displayed if:

a) You have more than eight calls on Hold

b) You are in an open Connect Group.

c) Releasing the Line key shows that the line is in aConnect Group.

The Release facility will not be available if:

a) You are set to Radio Priority and have one or moreradio channel/talkgroup selected. The message

is displayed. Use the HOLD OVRD key. (SeeSection 6.6.)

b) The caller has cleared the call.The message

is displayed. A PSTN line reverts to its idle state. APABX Line key may retain its ‘H’ until you touch thekey. If the caller has cleared the call, the line will besilent.

INVALID OPERATION

INVALID OPERATION

NO LINE TO UNHOLD

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.3_CALL LINE IDENTITY E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 18

5.3 Emergency Call -- CLI (Calling Line Identity)

Note: Availability and screen position of the CLI data is dependent on your system’s specification.

Calls can be received that contain CLI information only ie. the callers telephone line number.The Emergency Call -- CLI facility on the system provides access to the BT database and theCable and Wireless (C&W) database for the retrieval and display of either the callertelephone number and the name and address of the installed location for fixed lines, or thetelephone number and the caller location for mobile calls. This function is based on facilitiesthat have been made available to Emergency Authorities (Police, Fire, Ambulance,Coastguard, Mountain Rescue and Cave Rescue) and is known as Enhanced InformationService for Emergency Calls (EISEC). This function only relates to emergency calls(999/112). The retrieval of the address details is only carried out where the system receivedthe information (CLI) in the call set--up messaging.

Note: WXYZ data is used to determine whether the emergency call is from BT or C&W

The solution provides daily logs which may be kept by the customer for a defined number ofdays for audit purposes.

It should be noted that users of the service must have:

• Registered IP addresses for connection to the BT EISEC

• Access to the Government organisation network or Criminal Justice network forconnection to the C&W ALSEC, or other network connectivity defined by C&W

5.3.1 Enhanced CLI

The procedures for taking/clearing an incoming call or using the ‘hold’ functionality does notchange with the addition of this functionality.

5.3.1.1 Calls Received from a Fixed Location

The originating telephone number is delivered, alongwith theW,X,Y,Z data, in the call set--upmessagewhen the call is presented to you. If analysis of theW andX data indicates that thisis an Emergency call from BT or C&W, the system automatically interrogates the provider’sdatabase to retrieve the caller details. You may accept a call before the caller details havebeen retrieved. The system functionality for this and other scenarios is as follows:

• Call accepted and caller details already retrieved -- the operator is presented withthe WXYZ data, name, telephone number and address details as indicated in thenext screen

• Call accepted but caller details still pending -- the operator is presented with theWXYZ data, telephone number and amessage in the ‘name’ area indicating ‘‘Callerdetails pending’’. As soon as the response is received from the provider, the callersdetails are displayed

• Call accepted but caller details not available due to a fault -- the operator ispresented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the ‘name’area indicating ‘‘Caller details unavailable -- Fault’’

• Call acceptedand caller details not available as the call was not delivered fromBT --the operator is presentedwith theWXYZdata, telephonenumber andamessage inthe ‘name’ area indicating ‘‘No caller details available’’

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.3_CALL LINE IDENTITYE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 19

5.3.1.2 Displaying Caller Details for Fixed Lines

For a call from a landline the DS2000 interrogates the provider’s database to retrieve thename and address. The display to the operators is of the following format:

Call Origin; wx OAC yz (where wx are the call origin digits and yz the OACidentifier digits)NameTelephone NumberHPPC Queue Name (only used when the DS2000 is connected to Siemens HiPath Pro Centre)Address Line 1Address Line 2Address Line 3Address Line 4Address Line 5Address Line 6 (For calls from C&W this value is always the Post Code)

5.3.1.3 Calls Received from a Mobile

As with a call from a fixed location the originating telephone number is delivered, along withthe WXYZ data, in the call set--up message when the call is presented. If mobile lookup isenabled and the W data indicates that this is an Emergency call then the systemautomatically interrogates theprovider’s database. It is expected that themobile details takelonger to retrieve than is the case with fixed lines.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 20

The accuracy of location may be improved after a period of time. This service is subject toservice providers and being enabled within factory configurable data.

• Call accepted and caller details already retrieved -- the operator is presented withtheWXYZ data, operator name, telephone number ‘‘data available’’ in the ‘retrievalstate’ area. The estimated coordinates of the caller are displayed.

• Call accepted but call details still pending and initial searching message not yetreceived -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data, telephone number and amessage in the ‘retreival state’ area indicating ‘‘Caller details pending’’. As soon asthe response is received from the provider, the caller’s details are displayed.

• Call accepted but call details still pending, initial searching message has beenreceived -- the operator is presented with the WXYZ data and telephone number.The ‘retrieval state’ field is ‘‘Searching’’.

• Call accepted, caller details not available -- the operator is presentedwith theWXYZdata, telephone number and a message in the ‘retrieval state’ area indicating ‘‘NoCaller details available’’.

• Call accepted Unsupported Mobile Licence Operator -- the operator is presentedwith the WXYZ data, telephone number and a message in the ‘retrieval state’ areaindicating ‘‘Unsupported MLO’’.

5.3.1.4 Displaying Caller Details for Mobile Calls

The format of mobile location information is presented to the operator as follows:

Call Origin; wx OAC yz (where wx are the call origin digits and yz the OACidentifier digits)Mobile Operators Name and retrieval stateNameTelephone NumberHPPC Queue Name (only used when the DS2000 is connected to Siemens HiPath Pro Centre).CoordinatesCoordinates system used and confidence levelAddress Line 1 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)Address Line 2 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)Address Line 3 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)Address Line 4 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)Address Line 5 of Pico cell antenna (if available and applicable)

Note: Some Mobile operators operate pico cells whose coverage is limited to a building. For picocells the address of the antenna is given. Address details displayed to the operator are in theformat passed by the BT EISEC service. If no address details are received this area is leftblank. For calls from Cable and Wireless these address lines are left blank.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.3_CALL LINE IDENTITYE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 21

Coordinates System

The coordinates are provided in three possible systems (OSGB36, IRG or WGS84). Thesystem used will be defined by the data received from the BT EISEC service:

• OSGB36 for mainland Britain (BT and C&W)

• IRG for Irish Grid and Northern Ireland (BT)

• WGS84 for coordinate that cannot be displayed in OSGB36 or IRG (BT)

• NI for Northern Ireland (C&W)

• ROI for Republic of Ireland (C&W)

5.3.2 Last Caller Details

After a call is cleared, a last caller function key enables you to toggle the display between thelast caller details (with the text displayed in a non active colour) and the default display.

The initial state of the last caller function key is a factory configured option and can beconfigured either to allow the details to be automatically removed when the call is cleared,leaving the default display, or left displayed in the non active colour.

The last caller details remain available until another emergency call is answered.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 22

Helpful HintThe following are indications of an external error:

Router ErrorsIndicated as a network failure

Line FailureNo indication on the system. Notification is dependent on theservice purchased from BT.

BT Database FailureNo indication on the system. Notification is dependent on theservice purchased from BT.

5.3.3 C&C Links

5.3.3.1 C&C Server Link (DS2000 Command and Control Interface)

Where aC&CServer Link is provided via aDS2000Command andControl Interface (DCCI),the Caller Details and Operator Identity can be sent to the C&C Server once all theinformation has been assimilated and the incoming call has been accepted on the ICCS. Ifthe call is accepted while the request for name and address information is still outstanding,the message is held back until the response has been received from BT and the name andaddress details havebeenadded. If theCaller Details arrive before the call is answeredand itis configured to do so, the Caller Details will be sent to the C&C Server without the OperatorIdentity then, once the call is accepted, with the Operator Identity.

For mobile calls there may be a series of details sent to the C&C via the DCCI. For example‘‘Searching” followed by ‘‘data available”.

For mobile calls, if the Caller Details arrive after the caller has hung up, the details will beforwarded to the C&C with the operator ID set to undefined.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.4_MAKING A CALLE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 23

5.4 Making a Call

5.4.1 Telephone Page Tabs

The system displays up to twelve pages of telephone tabs; how they are implemented isdetermined by the System Manager.

There are up to 25 Line keys per standard page. The middle four tabs select adjacentpages directly; touching theMORE PAGES tab displays tabs for a further group of fouradjacent pages (e.g., five to eight). Touching this tab again displays the keys for the nextfour pages. A further touch returns the display to the first four. In their idle state, the tabsare usually pale green. The tab relating to the current page is highlighted or grey.

Typically, there are five possible ways to make an outgoing telephone call:

a) Touch a Hot key or Combined key.

When a Hot key is touched, the first available line is seized and the presetnumber is dialled. The seized line is displayed in the Active state.

When a Combined key is touched, the line associated with it is seized and thepreset number associated with the key is dialled.

b) Use the Telephone Dial Pad.

c) Use the Last Number Redial facility.

d) Select an entry in the Telephone Directory.

e) When the DS2000 is being used in conjunction with a Command & Controlsystem (C&C), calls canbemade from theC&Cwhen theDS2000 is displayingapriority telephone page. You can specify the line to be used for the call, or youcan let the system seize the first available line.

Methods b), c) and d) seize the first available line in the same manner as that described forHot keys.

When an outgoing call is made by another user, the appropriate Line key displays that user’sterminal position number.

Helpful HintIf you have a radio channel selected, you may not be permitted to dialunless Simultaneous Access is enabled in the database. If it is not, themessage

is displayed. The radio channel(s)/talkgroup(s) will remain selected.INVALID OPERATION

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.4_MAKING A CALL E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 24

5.4.1.1 Outgoing Line Selection

Normally, the first available line is automatically selected.

Note: To specify a particular line to be used, its Line key should be touched before dialling.

Helpful HintWhen specifying a particular line, the selected Line keymust be in the idlestate when touched.

If, between touching a Line key and dialling (by methods b), c), d) or e)described previously above), the line is seized by another user or there isan incoming call on that line, your call will fail and the message

is displayed (When you havemade the outgoing call via the C&C system,this message is slightly different).

The line selection is cancelled by any of the following actions:

a) Dialling out on another line

b) Accepting an incoming call

c) Releasing a Held call/Monitoring a call

d) Accepting a call transfer

e) Selecting a radio channel or talkgroup

f) Accepting or initiating an intercom call

g) Opening a connect group

h) Performing ‘eavesdrop’ on another operator

i) Performing ‘mimic’ on another operator

When you select a PABX line to dial an outside line, youmust include theprefix number (usually nine). TheDS2000 system uses the prefix as con-firmation that an outside line is actually wanted, and that the call is not amisdialled PABX number.

When a PSTN line is selected no prefix number is normally required.

DIALLING FAILED -- LINE UNAVAILABLE

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 25

5.4.2 Telephone Dial Pad

The Dial Pad is used to enter either a telephone number or an Individual Short SubscriberIdentity (ISSI) in the following modes:

S Initial telephone call setup

S Use of PABX Recall facility

S Call in Progress

S Enter an address for a Short Data Message (SDM) or Predefined SDM(PDFSDM)

S Call a subscriber

Operation of the Dial Pad is the same as a normal telephone dial pad with the addition of

p(validate), CIP PAD, DIAL TEL, SDM ISSI, PREDEF SDM and DIAL ISSI keys.

Touch the DIAL PAD key to display the telephone Dial Pad screen.

Enter the telephone number to be dialled by touching the appropriate figures on thekeypad. The numbers are entered in the display area situated above the keys.

External callsmay have to be precededby anine. In situationswhen aPSTN line isseized external calls prefixed with a nine will have the nine automatically droppedby the DS2000.

Use the BACKSPACE key to delete the most recently entered digit.

Use the ERASE key to delete all the digits entered

Use the Dial Pad RECALL key to access the call routing facilities of the PABX.Please refer to your PABX instructions for use of this key. It can often be used topick up a failed (returned) PABX Transfer call.

5.4.2.1 Telephone Dialling

Touch the DIAL TEL key to dial out the numbers.

The system allocated line will be displayed in the Active Telephone area, and thedialled number is displayed in the Last Number area at the top right of the screen.

You will hear a ringing tone. At all other terminal positions which display this line,the Line key will show your terminal position number.

When the called party answers, the message area displays

However, if no line is available,

appears in the message area.

CALL ANSWERED


VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 26

5.4.2.2 Tetra SDM Dialling

You are able to initiate two types of SDM message to the subscriber:

S SDM ISSI

S PREDEF SDM

After the ISSI address has been entered, touch the SDM ISSI key to invoke theSDMscreen. The ISSI is automatically entered in the ISSI address box of theSDMscreen. Text can be entered in the message area.

After the ISSI address has been entered, touch the PREDEF SDM key to invokethe PREDEF SDM list screen. Select the appropriate predefined message fromthe list and touch the USE TEXT key. The SDM screen is invoked with the textautomatically inserted and the ISSI automatically entered in the ISSI address boxof the SDM screen.

Note: A blank SDM screen is displayed when your first log on and select the SDM Key followed byNEW SDM. or when you carry out an initial Sub Search, select a radio terminal from thesearch results, and then the NEW SDM key. Once an SDM has been sent the blank SDMscreen will not be displayed again; as the text from the previous SDM remains populatedwithin the text field.

5.4.2.3 Tetra ISSI Dialling

Touch the DIAL ISSI key to dial out using an ISSI number to initiate an individualcall.

The VALIDATE ISSI key enables you to have the ISSI that is entered in the dialpad window validated before the system uses the address.

If the subscriber address is ambiguous, the Validate Subscriber to Call searchscreen is automatically invoked with all the destination possibilities. You can theneither select anentry from the list or performasubscriber search. If no possibilitiesare found the search screen is invoked but no results are displayed. A search can

beperformedusing thewild card ( * ), or theCANCEL key used to return to theDialPad.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 27

5.4.3 Call in Progress Dialling

When calling Touch Tone services you need to dial extra digits after the call hasbeen answered.

Touch theCIP PAD key to invoke theCIP numeric key pad which has the digits 0 --9, * and # as with a standard telephone keypad. When an operator selects anumeric key a fixed duration tone is transmitted to the open phone line. The tone isalso fed back to the headset. (On some systems a ‘P’may be displayed in front ofthe new digits to inform the system that the numbers following are to be sent downthe currently open line.)

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 28

Helpful Hint

Telephone Operations

Dialling

The message

is displayed when no line can be seized for dialling.

Dependent on the user’s configuration, if a radio channel is selected andthe dial command is given, the message

is displayed. To proceed, the radio(s)/talkgroup(s) must be put into theMonitor state.

If no digits are entered and the DIAL key is touched,the message

is displayed and no dialling is attempted.

Note: Operator microphone pickup may produce an erroneous

message.Not talking into the operator microphone whilst being connected will helpprevent this.

Transferring a call

The message

is displayed if no open line is available and the RECALL key is used.

If the current line is not a PABX line and the RECALL key is used themessage

is displayed and no further action is taken.

Many PABXs have a recall timeout. In these instances, when transferringa call theRECALL key is used after keying the number to which the call isto be transferred and just before the DIAL key.

Call in Progress Dialling

The message

is displayed if a line is not currently open and the CIP key is selected.


INVALID OPERATION

INVALID REQUEST -- NO DIGITS TO DIAL

CALL ANSWERED

INVALID OPERATION

RECALL UNAVAILABLE ON THIS LINE

CIP DIAL INVALID, NO OPEN LINE

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 29

5.4.4 Redial -- Last Numbers

The last ten telephonenumbers that youhave dialled using theDial Pad, regardlessof whether they were answered or not, are displayed at the top right of the MainScreen as a dropdown list when you touch the REDIAL key.

When you want to redial a number, touch the required dropdown list entry.

The screen changes to the Dial Pad with the number from the dropdown listpopulating its display. Now touch theDIAL key. If youhave a line already open, it isput on Hold automatically.

Helpful HintIf you need to change the number slightly, see Telephone Dial Pad(Section 5.4.2) for use of the Dial Pad.

If you have a radio channel/talkgroup selected, you may not be permittedto dial unless ‘SimultaneousAccess’ is enabled in the database. If it is not,the message

is displayed. The radio channel(s)/talkgroup(s) remain selected.INVALID OPERATION

5.4.5 Dial In/Out List

Note: Availability of this functionality is dependent on your system’s specification.

Thesystemcanbe factory configured to utilise the In List function, theOut List function, both,or neither. The Out List is a dropdown menu containing up to the last ten (configurable)outgoing calls made from your terminal. The In List is a dropdownmenu containing up to thelast ten (configurable) telephone calls answered at your terminal.

The lists are typically configured to be found at the top right of the Main Screen next to theLast Number Redial area of the screen. When an entry from a list is selected the Dial Pad isautomatically displayed with the selected number populating the Dial Pad display.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.5_TELEPHONE DIRECTORIES E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 30

5.5 Telephone Directory

Note: Availability of this function is dependent on your system’s specification.

5.5.1 Web--Based Telephone Directory

The web--based telephone directory is accessed through the Browser function. Thestandard directory database, which can store up to 10,000 telephone records, is hosted onthe database server at each site.

Telephone directory format is based on the existing DS2000 internal directory with additionalfeatures.

The directory provides the following (configurable) features:

1. Favourites functionality -- allows you to add your own telephone number recordsand/or existing records to your personal favourite number list.

2. Sensitivity -- allows access to specific telephonenumber records to be restrictedto specific users.

3. Regional partitioning -- allows telephone number records to be partitioned intoregions so that records are only displayed for the current region.

Note: Thereare twoweb--baseddirectory options availablewithin theBrowser, ‘ViewDirectory’ and‘Maintain Directory’ (for editing). Within the ‘View Directory’ option there is facility to add andmaintain personal favourites as detailed in the Add New Favourites section. The secondoption is the ‘Maintain Directory’ optionwhich is aSystemManager function and is detailed inVolume Two of this manual.

5.5.1.1 View Directory

Touching the BROWSER key replaces the General Work Area with a blank browserpage displaying the keys which represent the web--based pages available on yoursystem.

Note: The keys (and therefore web access) displayed on your system are configurable by theSystem Manager. An example is displayed below.

Touch the TEL DIR key to display the web--based telephone directory.(Note: This key may be labelled differently or located elsewhere on your system.)

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.5_TELEPHONE DIRECTORIESE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 31

The initial page contains a Region List field with drop down menu, a Search input field, aNameSearch key, Number Search key, an AddNewFavourite key, and a set of pre--definedcategories keys.

Searches can be made using the following:

S Pre--defined categories

S Names

S Numbers

5.5.1.2 Regional Partitioning

This functionality is optional and the ‘Region’ label and list box are only available if thisfunction is enabled.

Regional partitioning allows regions to be added to each telephone number record. Thetelephone directory is set to a region andonly shows records that are in that regionor that arenational records (those with no region set). The telephone directory’s region is set byselecting a region from the drop down list. On startup the region defaults to the regionpreviously used on the Operator Position.

Privileged users can configure Regions by using the Add Region page or Update Regionpage available in the Maintenance view of the telephone directory.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 32

5.5.1.3 Searching

When a search string is entered in the Search input field and the NAME SEARCH button ortheNUMBERSEARCH button is touched the TelephoneNumber Results page is displayed.Searching by Name or Number returns the first 100 records that match the search criteria.

Wildcard searches can be performed using the * character.

The wildcard can be placed anywhere in the search string and used more than once.

A search string of *d*m* could result in the followingnamematches; Darren Trentham,DerekSmith, and Dan Pardom.

A search string of d*m only matches Darren Trentham and Dan Pardom. Derek Smith doesnot match as it ends in ‘‘mith” not ‘‘m”.

5.5.1.4 Pre--defined Category Search

Touching any category key invokes the Telephone Number Result page displaying all therecords for that category. For each row in the table, the TelephoneNumber, Category, Name,and Location details are displayed.

Records are displayed in order of priority. If a number of entries have the same priority thoseentries are ordered alphabetically.

The priority of a category is configured when editing or adding it.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 33

5.5.1.5 Favourites

The Favourites functionality is optional. The Add New Favourite and Favourites categorykey is only displayed if this functionality is enabled.

Favourites data is associatedwith you and the Favourites functionality allows you to create apersonal list of telephone number records. You can create new telephone number records inyour favourites list as well as adding references to existing telephone directory records.

The Add New Favourite key is used to invoke the New Favourite Page, which allows you toadd new directory records to your favourites list. Telephone number records added here areonly available to you.

The Favourites category key is used to invoke the Telephone Number Results Page whichshows all telephone numbers in your favourite list and allows records to be viewed, edited ordeleted.

The Favourites category key priority can be configured using the Add Category page orUpdate Category page available in the Maintenance view of the telephone directory.

5.5.1.6 Sensitivity Classification

The Sensitivity functionality is optional. It provides the ability to limit access to telephonenumbers in specific categories to specific users, thus preventing certain operators fromviewing sensitive numbers. Each operator is given an access number from 1 to 10. Acorresponding sensitivity number, from 1 to 10, is applied to each telephone directorycategory. Records are only shown where the operator’s access number is greater than orequal to the category’s sensitivity number, i.e., a user with access level 3 can see all recordsin categories with sensitivity classification 1, 2 and 3.

The operator’s access number is configured against their job role, and the telephonedirectory category sensitivity is configured in theAdd category andUpdate category pages inthe Maintenance view of the application.

Category keys are not shown to you if you do not have access.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 34

5.5.1.7 Telephone Number Results Screen

This page displays the results of a search or all records for a category.

Display of records resulting fromasearch is limited to the first 100 records. Display of recordsfor a category displays all records for that category.

Touching the <-- BACK key returns you to the previous screen.<-- BACK

Touching the telephone icon to the left of each result displays the Dial Pad with thetelephone number of that record populating thenumber field. Touch theDIALTELkey on the Dial Pad to call the displayed number.

This two--phase process is provided to ensure that numbers are not accidentallydialled from the browser presentation.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 35

Touching the DETAILS key displays the Telephone Number Details Page whichcontains the full details for the selected record.DETAILS

Touching the telephone icon displays the Dial Pad with the telephone numberpopulating the number field. Touch the DIAL TEL key on the Dial Pad to call thedisplayed number.

Touching the NEW SEARCH key returns you to the initial search screen.NEW SEARCH

TheADDTO FAVOURITES key is optional and is only available if this function is enabled onyour system.

Touching theADDTOFAVOURITES key adds the currently viewed record to yourlist of favourite numbers in the database.

Prior to any change to the database, you are prompted to confirm the update via aOK/Cancel message box. If CANCEL is selected the update is aborted and thefocus is returned to the existing page. IfOK is selected the change iswritten to thedatabase and the previous page is displayed.

When initiating this page from a list of favourites, the page will be displayed in thefollowing specific modes: View/Edit/Delete, New Favourite and View/DeleteReferenced Favourite.

ADD TO FAVOURITES

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 36

5.5.1.8 View/Edit/Delete New Favourite

This page is used to display and edit all stored information for a favourite telephone numberentry that has been added by you.

This page is the sameas theTelephoneNumberEditableDetails pagewith theexception thatthe category field is defaulted to Favourite and is not editable. The Region field is also notdisplayed, as regional functionality is not applicable to a user’s favourite record.

Touching theNUMBER LIST key invokes the Number List page which allows youto modify five phone numbers and their associated alias (as detailed in Vol 2Chapter 1 Section 7)

NUMBER LIST

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 37

5.5.1.9 View/Delete Referenced Favourite

This page is used to display all stored information for a referenced favourite telephonenumber entry that has been added to a user’s favourite list.

Touching the DELETE RECORD key removes the user’s reference to the recordfrom the database.

DELETE RECORD

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 38

5.5.1.10 New Favourite Page

This page is optional and is only displayed if favourites functionality is enabled on yoursystem.

The New favourite page is used to add a new personal telephone number record to thedatabase. A Personal number record can only be seen by the user that added it via theirfavourites.

The New Favourite page displays the following fields: Category, Title, Name, Phone(number), Address (three lines), Postcode and two comment fields. There are three keys,BACK, SAVE CHANGES and NUMBER LIST..

All fields on this page can be edited except the Category field which will be disabled andshows the favourite category. The Phone field is edited via the Number List key.

Touching the <-- BACK key returns you to the previous screen.<-- BACK

Touching the SAVE CHANGES key saves the change to the database.SAVE CHANGES

Touching theNUMBER LIST key invokes the Number List page which allows youtomodify five phone numbers and associated alias (as detailed in Vol 2 Chapter 1Section 7)

NUMBER LIST

Prior to any change to the database, yuo are prompted to confirm the update via anOK/Cancel message box. If Cancel is selected the update is aborted and the focus is

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 39

returned to the existing page; if OK is selected the change is written to the database and theprevious page is displayed.

Helpful HintIf the System Manager has made changes to the Telephone Directorywhile you have been viewing it, those changes are not displayed until youclose the Browser and re--open it.

Alternatively, touching the Tilda (~) key on the keyboard refreshes thedisplay while in Normal view.

If the web server is out of action when you press the TEL DIR key, thestandard browser ‘Page Cannot be displayed’ page is displayed.

The priority field and sensitivity field (if enabled) on the Add and Updatecategories page are mandatory. Attempting to save without populatingthese fields invokes a warning message in red next to the field.

When attempting to invoke the keyboard, if the external keyboardapplication is not found the message,

is displayed in the message bar.

If data cannot be displayed in the Telephone Directory applicationbecause the database is unavailable, an error message appears on thescreen.

KEYBOARD APPLICATION NOT FOUND

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.6_MONITORING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 40

5.6 Monitoring

5.6.1 Normal Call Monitoring

Somesystems inhibit themonitoring of private lines. In these instances facilities areprovidedwhich operate differently from these described below.

All users can monitor a line but your USER ID/Password characteristics will determinewhether you have the facility to monitor a telephone line open at another user’s position andto converse with the caller. However, you will be able to converse with the user ‘owning’ thecall. Open lines are identifed by thedisplay of theuser’s terminal position number in the lowerborder of the Line key.

Tomonitor the call, touch theLine key; ‘M’will appear in its lower border. Themessage

is displayed in the message area. (If your system supports the microphone on/offfunctionality, theMICOFF keywill be automatically operated. If so, touch theMICOFFkey to talk to the other operator.)

Touch theMON/TALK key to talk to the caller and the other operator. TheMON/TALKkey changes to its active state. ‘M’ is replaced on the Line key by ‘T’. The message


To leave the Monitor/Talk mode, touch the Line key again. The message


On PSTN and DPNSS lines, the Monitor/Talk modemay be cancelled automatically ifthe caller clears the line. On analogue PABX lines the Monitor/Talk mode has to becancelled manually.

TELEPHONE MONITOR CANCELLED

TELEPHONE MONITOR TALK ACTIVE

TELEPHONE MONITOR ACTIVE

If the ‘owning’ user clears from the call whilst it is being monitored, the call will be taken overby the user who has been monitoring the call the longest.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.6_MONITORINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 41

Helpful HintYou can only monitor one line at a time. If you are already monitoring aline, it will be demonitored when you monitor another line.

If you have an open telephone call, it is automatically put on Hold.

If you have a current intercom call, it will be cleared.

If local recorder replay is active, it is automatically stopped.

You will not be able to use this facility if you have selected a radio channelor talkgroup and Simultaneous Access is not enabled.

Attempting to monitor a telephone call which already has the permittedmaximum number of users monitoring a line (usually five) results in themessage

being displayed in the message area.

Attempting to monitor a telephone call whilst in an Indivdual Call is notpermitted, and the message


The System Manager may have configured the system to put you in Talkmode as soon as you touch the Line key to start monitoring. In this case,the MON/TALK key is used to toggle between modes.

INVALID OPERATION

INDIVIDUAL CALL IN PROGRESS

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.7_TRANSFERRING CALLS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 42

5.7 Transferring Calls

Important:This chapter reflects standard call transferring from one terminal to another. If your systemsupports Group Partitioning functionality, the following procedures will differ slightly and thischapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.16 and 8.17.

Calls can be transferred to other terminals by using the TRANS CALL key. PABX calls canbe tranferred to other PABX extensions by using the TRANS PABX key. Both these tranferscan be made as either supervised (under operator control) or unsupervised (automatic)transfers.

5.7.1 Transfer to Another Terminal (TRANS CALL)

Supervised Transfera) Touch the TRANS CALL key to transfer an open telephone

call (PSTNorPABX) to another terminal. The Terminal Selectscreen is displayed and the call is automatically put on Hold.

b) Touch the required Terminal key. The TRANS CALL keys onyour screen and at the selected terminal now flash, and yourscreen reverts to the previous display.

When the selected terminal user touches the TRANS CALL key, the message

is displayed in the message area of both terminals. The TRANS CALL keys con-tinue to flash and because the call is already on Hold, you can advise the other ter-minal user that there is a call waiting without the caller hearing you.

The Held call can be taken by the other user, or retrieved by you if the other user isbusy. The first one to touch the TRANS CALL key takes the call. Both TRANSCALL keys stop flashing.

SUPERVISED TRANSFER IN PROGRESS

Unsupervised Transfer

a) Touch the TRANS CALL key to transfer the call to anotherterminal user. The Terminal Select screen is displayed andthe call is put on Hold.

b) Touch one of the Terminal keys to transfer the call. TheTRANSCALL key on your screenandat the selected terminalnow flash and your screen reverts to the previous display.

c) Touch the TRANS CALL key again -- before the other useraccepts the transfer. Your key stops flashing and the call isautomatically transferred to the other user when they touchtheir own TRANS CALL key.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.7_TRANSFERRING CALLSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 43

Accepting a Call from Another Terminal

The TRANS CALL key flashes when another user transfers a call to you.

When you touch the key, you will see one of two messages in the message area,either

or

a) The first message indicates that you are connected to thetransferring operator -- your TRANS CALL key will continueto flash. After communicating with the transferring operator,if you decide to take the call, touch the TRANS CALL keyagain. It will stop flashing and you will be connected to thecaller.

b) The second message indicates that you are directlyconnected to the caller. YourTRANSCALL key stops flash-ing.

SUPERVISED TRANSFER IN PROGRESS

CALL UNHELD

Helpful HintIf, when you try to take the call, the message

is displayed, the caller has cleared downwhile onHold, or has been takenover by another operator.

If the operator you are transferring to is busy, transfer is not possible and

or


TERMINAL ACCESS NOT AVAILABLE

NO CALL TO UNHOLD

INVALID OPERATION

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.7_TRANSFERRING CALLS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 44

5.7.2 PABX Transfer (TRANS PABX)

Note: PABX Transfer is not supported by Group Partioning.

Note: The followingprocedure for aPABXTransfermay differ depending on your PABXeqiupment.

This function enables an incoming PABX call to be transferred to another PABX ex-tension. Because the transfer takes place in the PABX, and not in the DS2000, itcannot be used to transfer direct PSTN lines.

PABXTransfer is a two-stage process. Calls can be transferred using the Dial Pad,TelephoneDirectory orHot keys. It is important not to touch theDIAL key or Hot keytoo early in the sequence.

The First Stage

Using the Dial Pad:a) Touch DIAL PAD and enter the required PABX extension.

Do not touch Dial yet.

b) Touch TRANS PABX, the line will automatically be Held, and


c) Touch the DIAL key on the Dial Pad.

Using the Telephone Directory:a) Touch a Telephone Directory entry.

b) Touch TRANS PABX.

c) Touch the DIAL key on Telephone Directory page.

Using a Hot Key or Combined Key:a) Select the relevant Telephone page.

b) Touch the Hot Key.

c) Touch TRANS PABX.

The number will be dialled into the PABX and you will hear the ringing tone.

TRANSFER PABX IN PROGRESS

The Second Stage -- Supervised Transfer

When the extension is answered, you can speak to the user before transferring thecall.

Touch the LINE key to connect the incoming call to the extension and clear yourselffrom the call.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.7_TRANSFERRING CALLSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 45

The Second Stage -- Unsupervised Transfer

When you hear the ringing tone touch TRAN PABX again.The message

will be displayed in the message area and AX (Automatic Transfer) will be dis-played on the Line key. TheTRAN PABX key is now free for usewith other calls.

When the called extension answers, the systemwill reroute the call independent-ly of you and the Line key will revert to the Inactive state. For returned or failedautomatic transfers, or if there is no reply after a specified delay, XH (PABXtransfer on Hold) will be displayed on the key and the key will return to its Activestate. Touch the Line key to release Hold and return to the call to speak to thecaller.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER IN PROGRESS

Helpful HintFor Supervised Transfers, if you get a busy or Number Unobtainable (NU)tone, use the standardPABX facilities (e.g., theRECALL key followedby *1 thenDial Tel on theDial Pad) to return to the call to advise the caller, andselect another destination for the call if required.Refer to your PABX manual for details.

On some lines, an Unsupervised Transfer to an already busy line will losethe caller. Always ensure that the ringing tone is heard before touching aTransfer key the second time.

If you try to use this facility onaPSTN line, or somespecialPABX lines, themessage

is displayed. The restrictions on transferring calls are described in yourPABX manual.

With theUnsupervised Transfer methods you cannot talk to the other useror retrieve the call.

Call Transfer will be cleared if you try to monitor a line before the call hasbeen connected.

Call Transfer will be cleared if you try to make an outgoing call before thetransfer has been connected.

ManyPABX lines detect whenacall has beenansweredby recognisinganinterruption of the ringing tone. Sidetone from the user microphone canhave the same effect -- try to avoid talking whilst the call is ringing out.

RECALL UNAVAILABLE ON THIS LINE

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.8_PABX KEY E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 46

5.8 PABX Key

Note: Availability and screenposition of thePABX key is dependent on your system’s specification.

The Terminal PABX key flashes when an incoming call is received on the linenominated specifically as your terminal extension. Touching the key when it flashesaccepts the call. Incoming calls directed specifically to the terminal via this line (i.e.,appearing on this key) need not go into the telephone queue.

When an idle PABX key is touched, the General Work Area changes to display theDial Pad so that you can dial out via the PABX.

In some installations if the radio page is being displayed, the replacement displaymay be the telephone page instead of the key pad. (The telephone page providesdirect access to ‘Hot’ keys). The page displayed at your terminal may be differentfrom that at another terminal, as it is dependent on the database entries set by theSystem Manager.

Helpful HintIncoming calls directed to a terminal via anexclusive line, i.e., dedicated toonly a terminal PABXkey, donot usually go into the telephonequeue. (Thetelephone queue display is dependent on settings made in the UserConfiguration file; some users may not see the key in the queue andothers may.)

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.9_TELE EAVESDROPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 47

5.9 Telephone Eavesdrop

Note: Availability and screen position of the TELE EAVES key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

Important:This chapter reflects standard telephone eavesdrop functionality. If your system supportsGroup Partitioning functionality the following procedures will differ and this chapter should beread in conjunction with Sections 8.16 and 8.17.

During Telephone Eavesdrop you hear the other operator’s earpiece audio andmicrophoneaudio. The operator being eavesdroppedwill not normally know that you are listening unlessthey have the appropriate Terminal Select screen to view.

Note: A livemicrophone and a visible indication of monitoring (an ‘M’ on the Line key) are databaseconfigurable, but these latter features for Telephone Eavesdrop are set at the time ofinstallation to suit the system specification, and cannot be changed by the SystemManager.

5.9.1 How to Use Tele Eaves

You cannot telephone eavesdrop more than one terminal at a time.

On activation of telephone eavesdropping your microphone is automatically muted. If youwish to join the call, touching the MIC OFF key returns your microphone to the live state.

Touch theTELEEAVES key to listen to the audio of anoperator ona telephone callat another terminal.

The terminal select screen is now displayed and the message

appears in the message area. Up to 25 terminals can be displayed on a page; usethePREVPAGE or theNEXT PAGE keys to view other pages. Only terminals thathave active calls can be telephone eavesdropped.

When a terminal entry from the list is touched, the message

is displayed in the message area. The EAVES key becomes available. Touch theEAVES key to begin eavesdropping.

Whenyouactivate telephone eavesdrop, your calls in progress are put onHold andyou will hear a mix of the other operator’s headset and microphone audio.

Cancel Telephone eavesdrop by touching the CANCEL key; you will see themessage

displayed in the message area.

EAVESDROP IN PROGRESS


EAVESDROP CANCELLED

The Tele Eaves facility can also be cancelled by touching the QUIT key.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.9_TELE EAVESDROP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 48

Helpful HintEavesdrop is automatically cancelled by the system when:

a) The call is terminated by either party in the call.

b) The call is placed on Hold.

c) A telephone or individual call is taken by theeavesdropper (This is dependent on each users’default telephone or radio priority).

d) Theeavesdroppingoperator selects a radiochannelor talkgroup (This is dependent on each user’sdefault telephone or radio priority).

e) An internal intercom call is answered by theeavesdropper.

Eavesdropping on an eavesdropper is allowed by the system. Themaxi-mum number of users in one eavesdrop is typically limited to five -- refer tothe System Manager for details.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.10_AUTO CALL DISTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 49

5.10 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Note: Availability and screen position of theACD key is dependent on your system’s specification.

5.10.1 Introduction

AutomaticCall Distribution (ACD) removes theneed for continually having to touch theTAKECALL key when there is a heavy incoming call load. Calls are automatically distributedamongst the logged on terminals. ACDpresents a fresh telephone call to you as soon as thecurrent call has been cleared. However, whilst in theACDmodeof operation, if there arecallswaiting to be answered you are not able to access the internal intercom, tannoy etc., or torespond to radio (except during Wrap Up time, see below).

The ACD key is therefore provided on the Main Screen to temporarily suspend AutomaticCall Distribution, and allow access to other facilities even though calls may still be coming in.

Note: The ACD key may not be displayed to all User Types. When the key is not displayed, thefunction is not normally made active. The SystemManager’s database entries define whichUser Types are configured for ACD and which are not. Similarly the System Manager willhave specified a small delay between clearing and presentation of calls -- this is called ‘WrapUp’ time.

5.10.2 Using the ACD Key

During the interval between calls (WrapUp) you can touch theACD key to aprovidea temporary suspension of Automatic Call Distribution at your terminal.

When ACD is suspended you can respond to radio, door phones, intercom etc., oryou can take calls directly from any key in the call queue, or take a call direct from akey on the displayed telephone page. If you do need to answer a call whilst in thesuspended state and want to ensure that you take the highest priority call first, usethe TAKE CALL key.

To remind you when the suspension time has exceeded that allowed, the message

is displayed. A message is also displayed on the supervisor’s screen if the ACDsuspension time becomes excessive, i.e., exceeds a second time period set in thedatabase.

AUTO MODE CURRENTLY SUSPENDED

Touch the ACD key again to return to the Automatic Call Distribution method ofworking.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.10_AUTO CALL DIST E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 50

5.10.3 Wrap Up

This term is used to define the interval allowed for completing a current action prior toaccepting the next call, or touching theACD key in order to carry out a non-telephonefunction. The period of time allowed for Wrap Up is defined in the database by theSystem Manager.

Whenyouhavebeenout of theACDmode andwish to return to it before theWrapUpperiod has timed out, touch the ACD key twice.

If you are busy when the Wrap Up period times out, ACD is put into Suspendedmode.

To remind you when the (preset) suspension time has been exceeded, themessage

is displayed. Amessage is also displayed on the supervisor’s screen if the ACDsus-pension becomes excessive, i.e., it exceeds the second period set in the database.

AUTO MODE CURRENTLY SUSPENDED

Helpful HintYou cannot change the ACD state to its alternative mode when you:

a) Have any radio channel/talkgroup selected.

b) Have an open Connect Group.

c) Have an active tannoy, internal intercom or doortelephone etc.

d) Are accessing the Instant Playback recorder.

Calls that are on Hold are not considered as ‘Active’ calls and so suspen-sion of ACD is permitted (this option is configurable) if you have calls onHold and no new calls to answer.

Callers making incoming calls hear a ringing tone. This is to inform themthat the call is progressing and that they are about to be connected.

The tone you hear before a call is presented to you is provided to let youknow that a call has been received by the system and that presentation isimminent.

The message

indicates that the caller rang off as you were connected.

INCOMING CALL UNAVAILABLE

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.11_COMMON CALL Q_INTERSITEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 51

5.11 Common Call Queue

Note: Availability of Common Call Queue is dependent on your system’s specification.

5.11.1 Introduction

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) presents a fresh telephone call to terminals as soon as thecurrent call has been cleared. However, whilst in theACDmodeof operation, if there arecallswaiting to be answered and there are no further operators available due to a heavy call loadthe calls can be automatically passed on from a local site to remote site.

The Common Call Queue (Inter--Site Automatic Call Distribution) function is available onDPNSS connected DS2000 systems and operates in conjunction with the Automatic CallDistribution (ACD) and Automatic Call Forwarding functions. It allows linked sites which arealready using ACD to hand--off incoming calls on specified telephone groups, which wouldotherwisebeplacedonaqueue, to another sitewhichhas operators available to take the call.

This functionality may be configured to handoff calls under the following conditions:

S When no local operators are available -- Call Forcing Mode.

S Calls rings both locally and on the remote site -- Parallel Mode

In addition, to give a chance for calls to be handled by a local operator regardless of thehandoffmodeemployedat the systemhanding calls off, it will be possible to configure adelaybefore any incoming handoff calls arriving at a remote site are presented to its localoperators.

The incoming call is handed--off over a fixed link from the local site to a remote site andplacedon the appropriate priority queue. ACD and Automatic Call Forwarding at the remote siteensures that the call may be immediately presented to a free operator.

If no remote site has operators available or all the inter--site lines are in use, the call is placedon the appropriate queue at the local site.

5.11.2 Available Sites and Free Operators

ICCSsiteswhichare participating in theCommonCallQueue function notify all sites towhichthey are linked, of their availability for accepting calls handed--off from other sites.

At each site the System Manager can configure in the System Defaults file the minimumnumber of operators that must be ‘free’ before the site is available to accept handed--off calls.(A value of zero indicates that the site is not available to accept handed--off calls at any time.)

The System Manager at each site can also determine which remote sites the local site willaccept calls from.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


_5.11_COMMON CALL Q_INTERSITE ACD E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 52

5.11.3 Handoff Modes

The System Manager can configure the handoff mode and related settings for eachtelephone group as follows.

5.11.3.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only)

In this mode, the systemwill only attempt to handoff calls to a remote site if there are no localoperators available to take the call. If no remote sites are available, the call will be queuedlocally. If the handoff fails it is never retried.

5.11.3.2 Parallel Mode

In this mode, calls are queued locally and handed off to the remote ICCS site. When a call isanswered locally, the handoff call is cancelled. When a call is answered remotely, the call isremoved from local operator screens and all local call timeouts etc are also cancelled. In thismode, the inter--site handoff call can optionally be delayed if local operators are available, togive the call a chance of being answered locally. This delay is definable for each telephonegroup and can be configured for no delay ie set to zero.

If an inter--site handoff call attempt fails, because the remote ICCS site has no operatorsavailable or the remote site is not available, the handoff can be configured to retry. This isdefined by setting a handoff retry delay timeout, defined for each telephone group and isconfigured in the database to a non zero value.

5.11.4 Incoming External Call

When a call comes into an ICCS site, the handoff group andmode for the line group to whichthe incoming line belongs is examined. Should the line group be a defined handoff group thecall is immediately queued to local operators. In addition, if there are no local operatorsavailable that could take the call, a handoff attempt is made immediately. If there are localoperators available that could take the call, the handoff attempt is delayed by the number ofseconds (which may be zero) defined for the telephone group to which the incoming linebelongs. If the handoff attempt fails, a timer is started and the handoff is attempted again onexpiry of this timer, provided the call has not been answered by a local operator in themeantime. This retry can be disabled (by setting the handoff retry delay to zero).

When a call is answered locally, any inter--site handoff call is cleared. If the call is answeredby an operator connected to the remote ICCS site, the call is removed from local operatorqueues and all local call timeouts etc. are cancelled.

5.11.5 Incoming Handoff Call

Whenacall comes into a systemona line dedicated to handoff calls, the configured IncomingHandoff Delay setting is examined. If this delay is non zero, the call will not be presented tooperators until a timeequal to the configureddelay has elapsed. If this value is zero, the call ispresented to operators immediately.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 53

5.11.6 Call Hand--off Mechanism

A call is handed--off from a local ICCS site to a remote ICCS site, by making an inter--site callto an extension number at the remote site appropriate to the priority group. The originatingline number of the incoming call (OLI) is also passed to the remote ICCS site, thus enablingEISEC look--up to be performed if appropriate.

If there are no longer sufficient ‘free’ operators available connected to the remote ICCS sitethe call may be rejected, otherwise the handed--off call is presented to an ACD operator.

When the call is answered at the remote ICCS site, the original incoming call (which is stillringing in) is automatically connected through from the local ICCS site to the remote ICCSsite and is answered via ACD.

If there are no lines available to the remote ICCSsite or the call is rejected, the incoming call ishandled at the local ICCS site. If the handoff call timer is set to non--zero the handoff will beattempted again after the set time. If the handoff retry delay is set to zero no retry attempt willbe made.

5.11.7 Lines and Extensions

At each site, the SystemManager can determine for the inter--site link, the minimum numberof lines allocated to each priority group for handing--off calls.

If the total number of lines allocated to all groups on the inter--site link is less than themaximum number of lines available on the link, the remaining lines are treated as a poolwhich is available to all priority groups.

One extension for each priority group at a remote ICCS site is used as the seed for all otherextensions within that group. This seed extension is used by the local ICCS site as the targetextension at the remote site to hand--off the call to.

If seed extensions are not defined for a specific priority group, the call shall target the sameextension at the remote ICCS site as the original call targeted. This allows both sites toconfigure symmetrical data for these extensions allocating the same group and subgroupand hence making these calls available to the same user roles.

5.11.8 Call Logging

5.11.8.1 Call Forcing Mode (No Local Operators Only)

Whenacall is answered locally then the call loggingat the local end remains unchanged fromthat of any other call answered by local operators:

S Incoming Call

S Call Answered

S Call Cleared or Op Call Cleared

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 54

If a call has beenhandedoff then therewill be nocall logevents generatedat the local endandthe following events will be generated at the remote end:

S Incoming Call

S Call Answered


5.11.8.2 Parallel Mode

If, aswell as beingpresentedat the local end the call has been the subject of ahandoff and thecall has started ringing at the remote end, then call log events will be generated as indicatedfor the following scenarios:

Senario 1 -- Call answered by an operator at the local end:

Local End

S Incoming Call

S Call Answered


Remote End

S Incoming Call

S Call Withdrawn

Senario 2 -- Call answered by an operator at the remote end:

Local End

S Incoming Call

S Call Handed Off

Remote End

S Incoming Call

S Call Answered


Senario 3 -- Caller hangs up before call is answered at either end:

Local End

S Incoming Call

S Call Cleared

Remote End

S Incoming Call

S Call Withdrawn

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 55

Helpful HintIf a call is handed--off to a ICCS remote site tagged as available but onarrival there are no ‘free’ operators, the call is rejected back to the localsite.

If the inter--site link fails after a call as been handed--off to a remote site,the call is cleared at both sites and that fault may be reported to theSystem Managers and may be logged in the site fault log.

If the inter--site link fails before hand--off has been completed, the callreverts to the local site as if it had been rejected.

If the call is cleared before hand--off is complete, the inter--site call isterminated and the line released for further use.

Should an incoming call be cleared before being answered in the ‘ParallelMode’, the system will clear both the local and inter--site handoff calls.

If a ‘Parallel Mode’ handoff call is answered simultaneously by both a localand remote operator, only one operator will have the call routed to them,the other receiving a

message.CALL NOT AVAILABLE

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 56


VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.12_CONFERENCINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 5 -- 57

5.12 Conferencing

Refer to Chapter 7 for information on setting up Telephone (or Radio/Telephone)Conferencecalls.

VOLUME 1TELEPHONE


Amb_5.12_CONFERENCING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0255 -- 58


Chapter 6

Radio

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.0_RADIO E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 2

Amendment Record


A First draft incorporating Ver9.11 functionality

SS 25.04.06

B Amendments to first draftto incorporate Ver 131functionality

SS 24.06.06


KJL 22.08.06


1A First draft to incorporateV161

TS 13.09.07


SS 01/11/07

2a Draft to IncorporateChanges to reflect V171

KJL 06/11/07

2b Second Draft to IncorporateChanges Post Review

KJL 07/12/07

3 Third Issue to IncorporateChanges to Reflect V171

KJL 20/12/07

4 Minor changes to text DSW 02/09/09

5 Changes to Ambient Listenfunctionality (Subs Prof)

SS 02/06/10

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.0_RADIOE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 3

Contents6.1 Airwave Functions 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1.1 Talkgroup Keys 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1.2 Talkgroup Key Description 6 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1.3 Caller Identity 6 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1.3.1 Caller Identity Area 6 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2 Talkgroup Setup and Key States 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.1 Talkgroup Setup Key 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.2 Preselecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.3 Un-preselecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.4 Rearranging Talkgroup Keys 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.5 Talkgroup Base State 6 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection 6 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.7 Talkgroup Un-Preselection 6 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.8 Talkgroup Event Monitor 6 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.9 Monitoring a Talkgroup 6 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect) 6 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.11 Selecting a Talkgroup 6 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.12 Transmit 6 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.13 Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor) 6 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States 6 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2.15 Talkgroup Show Subs 6 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Unmonitored Talkgroups 6 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.1 Talkgroup not Monitored 6 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Talkgroup Selections 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.1 Talkgroup List 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Last Dispatcher Warnings 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.1 Introduction 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.2 Last Audio Monitored 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.2.1 Last Audio Monitored Warning 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.3 Last Audio Monitored Confirmation 6 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.4 Last Event Monitored 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.4.1 Last Event Monitored Warning 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.5 Last Event Monitored Confirmation 6 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.6 Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen 6 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6 Talkgroup History 6 -- 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6.1 Talkgroup History List 6 -- 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.1.1 List Entry Time-Stamps 6 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 Subscriber Profile 6 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.1 Subscriber Profile 6 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.2 Radio Status Description 6 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.3 Main Tab Operations 6 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.4 Alias Update 6 -- 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.5 DGNA -- Dynamic Group Number Assignment 6 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . .6.7.6 DGNA -- Add Talkgroup 6 -- 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 4

6.7.7 DGNA Remove Group 6 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio 6 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.9 Stunning a Radio 6 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.10 Enabling a Radio 6 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.11 Radio Check 6 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.7.12 Ambient Listen 6 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7.12.1 Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen 6 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8 Subscriber Search 5--45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.8.1 Searching for a Subscriber 5--45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.2 Using the Search Results 5--47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.9 Subcriber Selection List 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.1 Subs List Function Key 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.2 Subscriber List 6 -- 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.3 Associated Functions 6 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.4 Refresh 6 -- 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10 Radio User Identity (RUI) 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.1 RUI Introduction 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.2 RUI Profile Screen 6 -- 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.3 Main -- Sub Menu 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10.3.1 Subscriber Profile Key 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.3.2 Rui Query Key 6 -- 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10.4 Book -- Sub Menu 6 -- 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.5 New Pin -- Sub Menu 6 -- 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11 Call Events 6 -- 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.11.1 Call Event History Log 6 -- 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11.1.1 Associated Functions 6 -- 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12 Individual Calls 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.1 Single Point to Point Call 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.1 Individual Call via a List 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.2 Individual Selection by ISSI 6 -- 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.3 Mobile Resource Screen 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.1.4 Resource Group Screen 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.2 Interupt Priority Individual Call 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.3 Multi Point Call 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.4 Individual Call in Progress 6 -- 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12.5 Radio Group Key 6 -- 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13 Inbound Individual Calls 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.1 CCI Port Assignments 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.2 Individual Call Key 6 -- 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.3 Individual Tetra Calls List 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13.3.1 Active Calls 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13.3.2 List Entries 6 -- 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.14 In-progress Individual Calls 6 -- 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15 Individual Call Hold 6 -- 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.15.1 Placing a Call On Hold 6 -- 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold 6 -- 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 5

6.16 Individual Call History 6 -- 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16.1 Individual Call History List 6 -- 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.17 Individual Callback Operation 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.1 Queuing Callback Requests 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.2 Individual Callback Requests Key 6 -- 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.3 Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback 6 -- 72. . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.4 Individual Callback List 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.5 Clearing a Callback Request 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance 6 -- 73. . . . . . . . . . . . .6.17.8 Callback Alarm 6 -- 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.18 Group Callback Operation 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.1 Queuing Callback Requests 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.2 Group Callback Requests Key 6 -- 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.3 Restrictions Accepting Group Callback 6 -- 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.4 Group Callback List 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.5 Clearing a Callback Request 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback 6 -- 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance 6 -- 78. . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18.8 Callback Alarm 6 -- 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.19 Emergency Calls 6 -- 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.1 Emergency Alarms 6 -- 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.2 Emergency Key 6 -- 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.3 Emergency Calls List 6 -- 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.4 Clearing Emergency Calls 6 -- 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.5 External Acknowledgement 6 -- 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing 6 -- 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.7 Emergency Alarm Timeout 6 -- 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement 6 -- 86. . . . . . . . . . .

6.20 Short Data Message Functions 6 -- 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.1 Accessing SDM Functions 6 -- 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.2 Sending a Short Message 6 -- 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.3 Sent Message List 6 -- 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.4 Sent Message Details 6 -- 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.5 Received Message List 6 -- 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.6 Received Message Details 6 -- 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.7 SDM History List 6 -- 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.20.8 History Message Details 6 -- 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21.1 Accessing the Predefined SDM Function 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21.2 PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area 6 -- 100. . . . . . . . . . .6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys 6 -- 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.22 Mute All 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.1 Introduction 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.2 Muting of Audio 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22.3 De--Muting 6 -- 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 6

6.23 Alert Tone 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23.1 Introduction 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23.2 Sending An Alert Tone 6 -- 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.24 Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage 6 -- 108. . . . . . . . .6.24.1 CCI Summary Display 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24.2 CCI Port Calculation 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24.3 Threshold Exceeded Warning 6 -- 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.25 CCI Port Summary 6 -- 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.1 CCI Port Details 6 -- 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.2 Icon ‘A’ 6 -- 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.3 Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.4 Reserved for Individual Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 112. . . . . . . .6.25.5 Reserved for Group Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’ 6 -- 113. . . . . . . . . . .6.25.6 Summary Area 6 -- 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.25.7 Help Area 6 -- 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.26 Status Code List 6 -- 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.1 Status Code List 6 -- 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.2 Associated Functions 6 -- 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.26.3 Refresh List 6 -- 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27 Mobile Resource 6 -- 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.1 List Entries 6 -- 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.2 Display Types 6 -- 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27.2.1 Multi Column List 6 -- 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.2.2 Single Column List 6 -- 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27.3 Dropdown Menus 6 -- 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.1 Functional Area Dropdown Menu 6 -- 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.2 List Ordering Dropdown Menu 6 -- 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.3 Resource Key 6 -- 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.27.3.4 List Updates 6 -- 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28 Radio Resource Group 6 -- 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.1 Introduction 6 -- 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.2 Resource Group Edit 6 -- 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.2.1 Primary Area 6 -- 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.2.2 Secondary Area 6 -- 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.3 Secondary Area -- Function Keys 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.1 Keyboard 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.2 Search 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.3 Add 6 -- 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.4 Remove 6 -- 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.5 Auto Alias 6 -- 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.3.6 Subs Prof 6 -- 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.28.4 Resource Group Functions 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.1 OK 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.2 Updating and Alias Validation 6 -- 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators 6 -- 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.4 Delete 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.5 Multicall 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.28.4.6 Dflt Alias 6 -- 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 7

6.28.4.7 Cancel 6 -- 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29 Group Repeat 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.29.1 Introduction 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.2 Group Repeat Key 6 -- 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State 6 -- 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29.4 External Group Repeat State Change 6 -- 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.30 Radio Revert 6 -- 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.30.1 Radio Revert Key 6 -- 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.31 Analogue Radio Introduction 6 -- 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31.1 Radio Channel Keys 6 -- 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31.2 Radio Key Description 6 -- 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.32 Radio Setup 6 -- 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.1 Radio Setup Table 6 -- 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels 6 -- 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.3 Removing Radio Channels 6 -- 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions 6 -- 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.33 Use of Radio Keys 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.1 Introduction 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.2 Radio Key Access 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.33.3 Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute) 6 -- 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.34 Talkthrough 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.34.1 Introduction 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.34.2 Setting up Talkthrough (T/T) 6 -- 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.35 Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.1 Radio Monitor 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.2 Radio Select 6 -- 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.3 Transmit 6 -- 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect 6 -- 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36 Combining Channels 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.1 Combine 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.2 Uncombine 6 -- 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.3 Radio Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36.3.1 Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.3.2 Uncombine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.36.4 Talkgroup Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.4.1 Combine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.36.4.2 Uncombine 6 -- 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.37 Remote Radio 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.1 Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.2 Using the Remote Radio 6 -- 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.37.3 Leaving (Un--preselecting) the Remote Radio 6 -- 157. . . . . . . . . . .

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 8


VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.1_Airwave FunctionsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 9

6.1 Airwave Functions

6.1.1 Talkgroup Keys

This chapter describes the operation of Airwave and Talkgroup keys.

A single talkgroup is defined as a single talkgroup audio source, mapped to a Talkgroup keyon the user’s screen. During this chapter the term ‘talkgroup’ refers to a single talkgroupaudio source and its associated ‘key’.

USER OP PC

SWITCH

1 3

2

1 2 3

Talkgroup Keys

User Audio

Talkgroup Audio Source

Talkgroup Overview

6.1.2 Talkgroup Key Description

Key colours, attributes and identification numbers are set by the System Manager.

The Talkgroup key is made up of a face (border) area and a textface area. The face areacontains the terminal number, talkgroup channel and other functional information. Thetextface area contains the subscriber ID of the calling terminal.

TX is displayed on the top line of the key when the talkgroup is Selected and you transmitusing either the PTT key or foot--switch, and the PTT request is sucessfully processed.BUSY is displayed when the Radio System is still processing the PTT request.

The colour of the border indicates the state of emergency alarms.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.1_Airwave Functions E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 10

TalkgroupIdentity2 x 9 characters

FLT

Talkgroup state is:p = Preselected for this usere = Event monitored for this userm = Monitored for this users = Selected for this user

MUTE Talkgroup audio is muted

TxFace Area(Border) Tg n

NorthernXRAY 03Calling

Subscriber Id

Talkgroup Status:Cn = Talkgroup is in a Connect Group at this terminal,

where n is the number of the Connect Group.Cxx = Talkgroup is in a Connect Group at another terminal

where xx is the terminal number.If the talkgroup is part of a Remote users Connect Groupxx indicates the site ID instead of the terminal number.

The following security indications can be disabled by the System Manager:xsecCn = Talkgroup is part of an unsecure Connect Group at this

terminal where n is the number of the Connect Group of whichthe talkgroup is a member.

xsecCxx = Talkgroup is part of an unsecure Connect Group at anotherterminal where xx is the terminal number at which thetalkgroup is part of a Connect Group.

Note Unsecure Connect Groups are those containing a telephoneor legacy radio

S = Talkgroup is selected at this terminal or at another terminal(if the talkgroup is enabled for multi--user select).

Snnn = Talkgroup is selected at another terminal where nnn is theterminal number of the other user selecting the talkgroup andthat selection restricts access to the talkgroup, i.e., thetalkgroup nnn is not enabled for muti--user selection and theuser is not enabled to select an already selected talkgroup.

Txnnn = Talkgroup is keyed by another user, where nnn is the terminalnumber of the user keying the talkgroup.

xsecCxx

Disabled/Busy/TX

p

Comb

Comb = Combined

3 CharacterTalkgroup Id(Optional) xxx

FLT = I/O card or Radio System Fault IndicationMG FLT = CCI port for this Migration Group has failedMG ERR = Migration Group Error (see note below)

Key Face

RD = Group Repeat

Note: MG ERR -- Any users who are accessing the talkgroup on an alternative CCI port arepresented with this legend on the key indicating that they should re-monitor the migrationgroup on the recovered CCI port and demonitor all associated radio channels.

Note: Group Repeat State -- This legend indicates the current state and is displayed if the statediffers from the talkgroup’s configured base--state and provided the operator has thetalkgroup audio monitored or selected.RD -- Indicates that Group Repeat is currently disabled on the Talkgroup.RE -- Indicates that Group Repeat is currently enabled on the Talkgroup.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.1_Airwave FunctionsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 11

6.1.3 Caller Identity

The radio caller identity areacanaccommodate12characters and is used to identify the radioalias of the last caller to transmit on that talkgroup. If the alias of the caller is not known to thesystem the alias is defined as one of the following:

1. If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Aliasfunctionality the alias will be ‘UNK aaaaaaaa’, where ‘aaaaaaaa’ is up to eightalphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the SubscriberISSI belongs.

2. Otherwise thealias is ‘UNKxxxxxxxxx’,where ‘xxxxxxxxx’ is the last ninedigits of theSubscriber’s ISSI.

6.1.3.1 Caller Identity Area

The text and background colour of the calling subscriber identity area of the key areconfigureable by theSystemManager. When the calling subscriber identity area of the key isused to indicate the talkgroup status, the display attributes options are defined below:

Key Status Attributes

Normal talkgroup call Status line -- normal mode

Unacknowledged emergency talkgroup call Status line -- emergency mode

Acknowledged emergency talkgroup call Status line -- acknowledged emergency alarm

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.2_TG_Setup_and _Use_of_Keys E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 12

6.2 Talkgroup Setup and Key States

The Talkgroup Page Setup screen is used to preselect Talkgroup keys and reconfigure thelayout of Talkgroup keys within the talkgroup area page(s).

6.2.1 Talkgroup Setup Key

Touch the idle TGRP SETUP key to set it to the Active state. The message

is displayed.CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL

The General Work Area changes to the Talkgroup Setup screen, with the first page of theavailable Talkgroups list being displayed. The Talkgroup page area is changed to show theoutlines of any blank (i.e., currently unused) talkgroup keys.

Talkgroups preselected at the operator position are already allocated to keys in theRadio/Talkgrouppagearea. Youcanpreselect asmanyadditional talkgroupsas required, upto the maximum configured by SunGard Vivista (typically 40).

A talkgroup must be preselected (i.e., have a key displayed on one of the Radio/Talkgrouppages) before it can be used (e.g., Monitored or Selected). On Preselection, talkgroupsdefault to their base state which can be configured to be either idle or Event Monitor.

During talkgroup setup the background colour of the Radio Page is changed to indicate thatthe setup screen is active and blank radio keys may be available to be populated.

6.2.2 Preselecting a Talkgroup

Talkgroups are preselected by the following sequence of actions:

a) Touch the talkgroup entry in the Talkgroup Selection list. The messageCHOOSE A BLANK PRESELECTION KEY is displayed.

b) Touch a blank, i.e., unused Talkgroup key space. The MORE RADIO key can beused to access talkgroup/radio pages not currently displayed before selecting ablank key. If an already allocated Talkgroup key is touched, the messageINVALID KEY; RESELECT CHANNEL is displayed and the function cancelled.

Talkgroupswhicharenot available for preselectionarenot touch sensitive, andhencecannotbe preselected.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.2_TG_Setup_and _Use_of_KeysE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 13

6.2.3 Un-preselecting a Talkgroup

Talkgroups are un-preselected (i.e., removed from the Radio Page) by touching theappropriate list entry in the Talkgroup Setup area of the screen. Talkgroups for whichun-preselection has been disabled are not touch sensitive, and cannot be un-preselected.

Note: Other ways of un--preselecting are by logging off, changing to another Functional Area or byusing theAREAREVERT key. Eachof thesemethods return you to the default state after therespective action.

6.2.4 Rearranging Talkgroup Keys

Talkgroup keys can be swapped from their current positions to any other position on anypage. Keys are swapped by first touching a Talkgroup key position. The messageCHOOSE A PRESELECTION KEY is displayed in the message area.

If the same Talkgroup key or the TGRPSETUP key is touched next, the swapping function iscancelled but the Talkgroup Setup mode is still active.The message CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is redisplayed.

If a different Talkgroup key position is touched, the position of the two keys is swappedand the message CHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUP OR PRESEL is redisplayed.

During the process of choosing a second Talkgroup key, theMORERADIO key can be usedto change pages as required.

6.2.5 Talkgroup Base State

ATalkgroup key canbeconfigured to bepresented toanoperator at logonorwhilst accessingthe TGRP SETUP pages in either of the following base states:

S Preselected

S Event Monitored

This base state option is System Manager configurable per talkgroup.

A talkgroupwhose ‘BaseState’ option is set toEventMonitored cannot beevent demonitored(Preselected).

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 14

6.2.6 Talkgroup Preselection

Preselecting a talkgroup makes the Talkgroup key available for use, by displaying it withinone of the pages in the user’s radio area.

Talkgroupsare set tobepreselectedwhen thebasestate is configured tobepreselected (see6.2.6).

Note: A talkgroup cannot be preselected if the base state for that talkgroup is set to the eventmonitored state (see 6.2.6).

Talkgroups can be preselected, either automatically as part of the user logon process, ormanually by useof theTGRPSETUP functionality. The talkgroup key is thenpresented in thepreselected state.

Preselected talkgroups are in the idle state, i.e., they are not Monitored or Selected, and noaudio from the talkgroup is routed to you.

6.2.7 Talkgroup Un-Preselection

A talkgroup can be un-preselected by either logging off the user position, changing functionalareas, using the TGRP SETUP key, or using the AREA REVERT key. Un-preselecting atalkgroup removes the Talkgroup key from your radio area.

A talkgroup can be configured to disable Un-preselection.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 15

6.2.8 Talkgroup Event Monitor

When the base state is configured to be event monitored, the talkgroup key is presentedeither automatically as part of the user logon process, or when manually put on a radio pagevia use of the TGRP SETUP key, in the event monitored state.

You can Event Monitor any talkgroup that you have Preselected by touching the EVENTMON key followed by the appropriate Talkgroup key. Talkgroup keys on radio pages thatare not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key.

When a talkgroup is event monitored the following actions occur:

S The Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that the talkgroup isevent monitored.

S A TALKGROUP EVENT MONITORED message is displayed in the operator’s messagearea.

S Events occurring on this talkgroup are displayed in the call events list.

Whena talkgrouphaseventmonitor removed, i.e., touching theEVENTMONkey followedbythe appropriate Talkgroup key, the following actions occur:

S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that thetalkgroup is no longer event monitored.

S A TALKGROUP EVENT DEMONITORED message is displayed in the operator’smessage area.

S A check is performed by the system to determine whether a Last DispatcherWarning should be raised.

A talkgroup cannot be event demonitored (Preselected) if the base state for that talkgroup isconfigured to the event monitor state (see 6.2.6).

6.2.9 Monitoring a Talkgroup

You can monitor any talkgroup that you have Preselected, Event Monitored, or Selected, bytouching the appropriate Talkgroup key in the radio area. Talkgroup keys on radio pages thatare not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORE RADIO key.

When a talkgroup is Monitored the following actions occur:

S The received and transmitted audio from the talkgroup audio source is routed toyour headset/loudspeaker and events occurring on this talkgroup are displayed inthe Call Events list.

S The incoming audio level is set according to theAudio Levels presentation function.

S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that thetalkgroup is monitored.

S A TALKGROUP MONITORED message is displayed in your message area.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 16

6.2.10 Demonitoring a Talkgroup (Preselect)

Youcande-monitor any talkgroup that youhavemonitoredbyusing theDEMON/DESEL key.When a talkgroup is demonitored it returns either to the Preselected state or the EventMonitored state depending on the base state setting in the database (see 6.2.6).

When a talkgroup is demonitored the following actions occur:

S The corresponding Talkgroup key attributes and legend change to indicate that thetalkgroup is now preselected or event monitored.

S Received and transmitted audio from the talkgroup audio source is disconnectedfrom your headset/loudspeaker.

S A TALKGROUP DEMONITORED message is displayed in your message area.

S A check is performed by the system to determine whether a Last DispatcherWarning should be raised.

When a talkgroup is demonitored, a check is performed by the systemof the number of userswith the talkgroup Monitored or Selected. If no users have the talkgroup Monitored, and thetalkgroup is configured to generate a not--monitored alarm, a talkgroup not--monitored alarmevent is triggered. EachUser Type can be configured to be either included or excluded in thetalkgroup not--monitored check, i.e., supervisor types are normally excluded, and operatorsare normally included in the talkgroup not--monitored check.

All Selected talkgroups can be Deselected by touching the DESEL ALL key twice orindividually by touching the Selected talkgroup.

All Monitored talkgroups can be Demonitored by touching the DEMON key twice orindividually by touching the Monitored talkgroup.

Notes: For a full description of the Demon Desel function refer to Chapter 6.35.4.

Organisations that have Last Dispatcher Warning functionality should refer to Chapter 6.5.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 17

6.2.11 Selecting a Talkgroup

You can select a talkgroup by touching the appropriate Monitored Talkgroup key. Talkgroupkeys on radio pages that are not currently displayed can be accessed via theMORERADIOkey.

You are barred from Selecting a talkgroup if any of the following conditions exist:

S The talkgroup is part of another user’s Connect Group and either the system is notconfigured to select talkgroups in other user connect groups or you are notprivileged to select a talkgroup already selected by another user.An OPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY message is displayed in your messagearea.

S You already have the maximum allowed number of talkgroups and/or radiochannels selected.The message OPERATION DENIED -- SELECT LIMIT is displayed in your messagearea.

S You have an individual call in progress.The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed in your message area.

When a talkgroup is Selected the following actions occur:

S ThecorrespondingTalkgroupkeyattributesand legendare changed to indicate thatthe talkgroup is selected.

S TheTalkgroup key attributes and legend for any other users that have theTalkgroupkey displayed are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is selected. The terminalnumber of the selecting user is only displayed to other users, if the selecting user isnot enabled to select talkgroups already selected by other users, and the talkgroupis not enabled for multiple user selection.


S The message TALKGROUP SELECTED is displayed in your message area.

If you have Push-To-Talk (PTT) active (via the foot--switch) while a talkgroup is selected, thetalkgroup is immediately placed into the Transmit state (see 6.2.14).

Note: The maximum number of talkgroups/radio channels a user can simultaneously haveselected/monitored is factory configurable and is typically set to 10.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 18

6.2.12 Transmit

You can transmit on the talkgroups you have selected either by touching the TX key or bypressing the foot-switch (the PTT switch).

When you activate PTT the following actions occur:

S The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that PTT is active.

S The Talkgroup key legend and attributes, for all other users with the Talkgroup keydisplayed, are changed to indicate the terminal position of the user ‘keying’ thetalkgroup.

S When PTT is applied on a talkgroup, initially the legend ‘Busy’ is displayed on theTalkgroup key.

S When PTT is granted on a talkgroup by the radio system, the legend ‘Busy’ isreplaced by ‘Tx’.

S Your microphone is routed to each Selected talkgroup’s audio source.

When you deactivate PTT (neither the TX key or the foot-switch are pressed) the followingactions occur:

S Your microphone is de-routed from the selected talkgroup audio source(s).

S The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that PTT is inactive.

S The Talkgroup key legend and attributes, for all other users with the Talkgroup keydisplayed, are changed back to theSelected state, indicating that you have stoppedkeying the talkgroup.

When a talkgroup is simultaneously selected bymore than one user, contention between theusers is resolved by PTT, i.e., the first user to activate PTT is routed to, and transmits on, thetalkgroup. While the user routed to the talkgroup holds PTT active, all other users aredisabled from transmitting on the talkgroup, i.e., they are locked out until PTT is released.This feature is dependent on the radio systemallowing operators to have priority over normalusers. If another user has the talkgroup selected and PTT active when PTT is released, theywill not be routed to or transmit on the talkgroup. If the second user is to successfully transmiton the talkgroup, they have to release and reapply PTT once the first user has released PTT.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 19

6.2.13 Deselect Talkgroup (Monitor)

You deselect an individual talkgroup by touching the appropriate Selected Talkgroup key. Allselected talkgroups can be simultaneously deselected by use of the DESEL ALL functionkey.

When a talkgroup is deselected the following actions occur:

S If PTT (Tx) is active, the talkgroup audio source is un--keyed.

S If PTT (footswitch) is active, attempting to deselect displays the messageINVALID OPERATION .

S Your microphone is disconnected from the talkgroup audio source.

S The Talkgroup key attributes and legend are changed to indicate that the talkgroupis Monitored.

S If the talkgroup is not selected by any other user, the Talkgroup key attributes andlegend for all users are changed to indicate that the talkgroup is not selected by anyother user.


S The message TALKGROUP DESELECTED is displayed in your message area.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 20

6.2.14 Talkgroup Key States

The following table is a brief overview of the states that a Talkgroup key can be in, whatactions can be performed in that state, and the key’s possible next state.

‘Entries in Event List’ refers to relevant entries being displayed in the operator’s Event listarea.

Current State Entriesin List

Key Displays Audio Next State

Un--preselected No N/A No Preselected

Preselected No Preselected No Un--preselect,

Event Monitor,

Monitor

Event Monitored Yes * EventMonitored withIncoming audioindicated *

No Event Mon Cancel

Un--preselected,

Monitor

Monitored Yes * Monitored withIncoming audioindicated *

Incoming audiorouted intosecondaryaudio feed

Preselected,

Event Monitor,

Selected

Selected ** Yes Selected As Monitoredbut in primaryaudio feed

Monitored,

PTT’ing

PTT’ing Yes PTT colour As Selectedplus OP’s microuted out totalkgroup

Selected

* Audio Indication may not be shown and the Group call is not entered into the Eventlist if the Inhibit Call Indication option is Enabled and the talkgroup is selected byanother Operator. The monitored Talkgroup key still retains the ‘last subscriberalias’ when a call is received even though it is not showing ‘incoming audio’indication.

** When a talkgroup is selected by more than one operator then no incoming audioindication is displayed on the Talkgroup key, but an entry is put into the event list.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 21

Helpful HintIf the TETRA radio system (or connection to it), is unavailable it may bedue to one of the following reasons:

a) A TRIC (Trunked Radio Interace Card) supportsaudio for two CCI ports. If a TRIC fails FLT willappear on the talkgroup key. Note: Audio is lost, notcontrol.To resume, demonitor then return to the Monitoredstate.

b) If a CCI port fails all relevant Talkgroup keysautomatically default to their Preselected state.

c) If the data link fails all relevant Talkgroup keys willautomatically default to their base state and themessageCCI xx @ yyyyyyyy FAILED

is displayed in themessage area,where yyyyyyyy isthe Tetra Gateway name.

d) If you attempt to monitor talkgroups and there is noCCI Ports available to you the messageTG MON FAIL -- CAPACITY REACHED


e) If you attempt to monitor too many talkgroups themessageTOO MANY CHANS . MONITORED/SELECTED


f) If an attempt is made to monitor a specific talkgroupon a CCI port but it is not supported on that port, themessageMONITOR FAIL -- TALKGROUP xxx PORT yyy

is displayed in the operator’s message area.

6.2.15 Talkgroup Show Subs

You can display a list of subscribers currently affiliated to a specific talkgroup by touching theLISTS tab followedby theTGRPkey, choosing from the list theentry forwhich youwish to seethe subscribers, then touching the SUBS LIST key.

Note: This is just one of the ways that you can find a subscriber.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.3_Unmonitored T’group E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 22

6.3 Unmonitored Talkgroups

When the number of operators monitoring a talkgroup drops to zero (i.e., when the lastoperator monitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), a warningmessage to indicate the eventis presented to the responsible supervisor.

Note: Also see Last Dispatcher Warning function.

6.3.1 Talkgroup not Monitored

This function enables the supervisor to know when the number of operators covering atalkgroup drops to zero, so that adequate cover of the talkgroup can be maintained. Thefunction only applies to talkgroups with the relevant database flag set. The message

WARNING: TGROUP YYY NOT MONITORED

is displayed on the responsible supervisor’s screen when the last operator monitoringtalkgroup ‘YYY’ has ceased to do so.

This alarm is only raised on the transition from one to zero operators audio monitoring thegroup (this includes those with the talkgroup selected).

When a supervisor logs on, if there are talkgroupswith no operators covering them, no alarmis generated for those talkgroups, as the alarms are only raised on the downward transitions.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.4_T’group SelectionE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 23

6.4 Talkgroup Selections

The Talkgroup list displays the talkgroups and Migration Groups, both those being availablefor preselection, and those already preselected by this operator.

When the term ‘talkgroup(s)’ is usedwithin this section it will includeMigrationGroup(s). Forfurther information about Migration Groups, see ‘Migration Groups’.

6.4.1 Talkgroup List

Touching theTGRP key displays a list of the talkgroups to the operator. This is a scrollablelist with the title:TALKGROUP LIST

Each entry in the list has the form:

TTT DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Where:

S TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurabletalkgroup database (maximum three characters)

S DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD is the description of the talkgroup (maximum 15characters)

The colour of the list entry distinguishes talkgroups that have Emergency Alarms andwhether the alarms are acknowleged or unacknowleged.

6.4.2 Associated Functions

List entries are selectable by touching them. Once an entry is selected, the operator canmake use of the following keys:

S SUBS LIST displays the Subscriber Selection list for the corresponding talkgroup.The Subscriber Selection list displays a list of all subscribers currently affiliated to aspecified talkgroup or migration group; this includes radio subscribers andoperators at the local site who have registered to the talkgroup (or membertalkgroups of a migration group).

S TGRP HIST displays the Talkgroup History list for the selected talkgroup.

S NEW SDM displays the ‘Short Data Message’ screen, initialised with the selectedtalkgroup as the addressee.

S PREDEF SDM displays the ‘Predefined Short Data Message’ functionality,initialised with the selected talkgroup as the addressee.

Helpful HintTouchingoneof theSUBSLIST,TGRPHISTNEWSDMorPREDEFSDMkeys without first selecting an entry in the talkgroup selection list displaysERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED in the error message box at the top of the screen.

The message NOTAVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM is generated when anattempt ismade to sendaPre--definedor anSDMmessage to aTalkgroupwhose Radio System does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.5_Last Dispatcher Warning E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 24

6.5 Last Dispatcher Warnings


6.5.1 Introduction

Last Dispatcher warning consists of two warnings; Last Audio Monitored and Last EventMonitored. Any talkgroup can be configured to generate either, both or no warnings.

Last Dispatcher warning operates in two modes. One mode is advisory and results in awarning message being logged. The second mode requires positive action by thedemonitoring operator. These two modes are mutually exclusive.

6.5.2 Last Audio Monitored

6.5.2.1 Last Audio Monitored Warning

This warning is only raised when the number of operators audio monitoring the group (thisincludes those with the talkgroup Selected) changes from one to zero.

When thenumber of operators that are audiomonitoringa talkgroupdrops to zero, (i.e.,whenthe last operator audio monitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), a warning message toindicate this is presented to the responsible supervisor andmay be added to the system faultlog.

6.5.3 Last Audio Monitored Confirmation

When you are audio monitoring a talkgroup and you attempt to demonitor the talkgroup, thesystem checks to see if you are the only operator audiomonitoring the talkgroup. If this is thecase then a dialog box is displayed on your screen. The dialog box informs you that you arethe last audio monitoring operator and prompts you to either ‘Cancel’ or ‘Confirm’ thewarning.

Touching the CANCEL key aborts the Demonitor command and no faultmessage is raised.CANCEL

Touching theCONFIRM key continues theDemonitor commandand theDS2000system will check again to see if this was the last operator. If no other operatorhas taken over audio monitoring the talkgroup a Last Dispatcher warningmessage may be raised and thus the Supervisor made aware.

CONFIRM

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.5_Last Dispatcher WarningE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 25

Note: The rest of your operator’s screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box isdisplayed. However you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons inthe dialog box.

The following system faultmessage is associatedwith the LastDispatcherWarningFunctionand may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen:

WARNING: TG YYY NOT MONITORED

Where:

• YYY is either the talkgroup mnemonic or identifier as configured (maximum threecharacters).

6.5.4 Last Event Monitored

6.5.4.1 Last Event Monitored Warning

Thiswarning is only raisedwhen the number of operators eventmonitoring the groupwith themain screen displayed (operators with the talkgroup selected or audio monitored count asEvent Monitored for the purpose of this check) changes from one to zero.

When thenumber of operators that are eventmonitoringa talkgroupdrops to zero, (i.e.,whenthe last operator to be eventmonitoring the talkgroup ceases to do so), awarningmessage toindicate this is presented to the responsible supervisor andmay be added to the system faultlog.

An operator is considered to be event monitoring when audio monitoring, therefore, a LastEvent Monitored warning is not raised when the last operator that is effectively eventmonitoring, demonitors a talkgroup whilst another operator still has that talkgroup audiomonitored.

You are deemed to have ceased event monitoring when you the main screen or eventdemonitor the talkgroup.

6.5.5 Last Event Monitored Confirmation

Whenyouare eventmonitoring a talkgroupandattempt to event demonitor the talkgroup, thesystem checks to see if you are the only operator eventmonitoring the talkgroup. If this is thecase and there are no audio monitoring operators, then a dialog box is displayed on yourscreen. The dialog box informs you that you are the last event monitoring operator andprompts you to either ’Cancel’ or ’Confirm’ the warning.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.5_Last Dispatcher Warning E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 26

Touching the CANCEL key aborts the Event Demonitor command and no faultmessage is raised.CANCEL

Touching the CONFIRM key continues the Event Demonitor command and theDS2000 system checks again to see if this was the last operator. If no otheroperator has taken over event/audio monitoring the talkgroup a Last Dispatcherwarning message may be raised.

CONFIRM

Note: The rest of your operator’s screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box isdisplayed. However, you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons inthe dialog box.

The following system faultmessage is associatedwith the LastDispatcherWarningFunctionand may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen:

WARNING: TG YYY NOT EVENT MONITORED

Where:

S YYY is either the talkgroup mnemonic or identifier as configured (maximum threecharacter).

6.5.6 Last Event Monitored On Exit Main Screen

When you attempt to leave themain screen to go to the PreselectionMenu screen, a systemcheck is made as to whether there are any event monitored talkgroups for which you are thelast eventmonitoring operator. If this is the case, and thereare noaudioMonitoringoperatorsfor this talkgroup, then this dialog box informs you that you are the last event monitoringoperator on one or more talkgroups and prompts you to either ’Cancel’ or ’Confirm’.Cancelling aborts the command whilst Confirm completes the command.

If the command is confirmed, a check is made as you leaves the main screen of eachtalkgroup that is event monitored by you. If this check indicates that there are now nooperators either eventmonitoringor audiomonitoring that talkgroup, awarning to indicate theevent is presented to the responsible supervisor and added to the system fault log.

Note: The rest of your operator’s screen continues to update with events whilst the dialog box isdisplayed. However, you are not able to access any other areas except the above buttons inthe dialog box.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.5_Last Dispatcher WarningE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 27

Helpful HintWhen a supervisor logs on, if there are talkgroups with no operatorscovering the group, no warning is generated for those talkgroups, as thewarnings were raised when the actual demonitor takes place.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.6_T_group_History E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 28

6.6 Talkgroup History

The call, status code and status event history relevant to a specific talkgroup are displayed inthe Talkgroup History list. Emergency alarms received for the specified talkgroup are alsoindicated.

6.6.1 Talkgroup History List

With an entry selected in the Talkgroup list, or whilst the Subscriber list for a particulartalkgroup is displayed, touching the TGRPHIST key displays the TalkgroupHistory list forthe selected talkgroup. Thenumber of entries in the list is restricted to amaximumof 1000.

This is a scrollable list with the title:

Call History DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Where:

S The 15 letter field, DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD, is the talkgroup description, eg‘Talkgroup 1’.

The scrollable list displays a history of all calls and logged status codes in this talkgroup sinceyou logged on.

Note: The list doesnot include callsmadebyoperators on the talkgroup, unless theoperators areatother sites (and are not accessing the radio system via this site’s Remote Accessfunctionality).

Talkgroup call histories are retained from all local sessions when you log on remotely. Anyactivities performed whilst you are in a remote session are appended to existing logs.Histories are retained when the remote session is terminated. Hence you retain informationabout any group calls made whilst remote.

Histories are cleared when you log off from the operator terminal. Histories are retainedduring takeover logon.

The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. Each entry in the list has theform:

TTT AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Where:


S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character alias of the radio subscriber or remoteoperator.

S HH:MM is the time--stamp of the event.

S SSSSSSSSSSS is the caller’s current status which is derived from their currentAvailability status code or the status event description. For an operator, the field isfilled with ‘.’s.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.6_T_group_HistoryE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 29

The Availability status codes and status events are mapped to text messages according to aSystem Manager configurable database. List entries are displayed in system configurablecolours according to the corresponding status code. However, calls or status codes (but notstatus events) occurring whilst the radio is in emergency mode are displayed with thestandard emergency attributes.

In addition, a system configurable option controls which types of status codes and statusevents are displayed.

Note: Entries representing calls are drawn in the system configurable colour for PTT events.

6.6.1.1 List Entry Time-Stamps

If the list entry refers to a group call event, the time-stamp will be the time-stamp of thepreceding status code notification of which the system has stored information. If no statuscode is logged for this radio, the field will be filled with ‘.’s.

If the list entry refers to a status code or status event, the displayed time is the time-stamp ofthat status code or event.


List entries are selectable. Once an entry is selected, the operator can make use of thefollowing keys:

S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscribercorresponding to the list entry.

S Touching the SUBS PROFILE key displays the Subscriber Profile screen for theradio subscriber corresponding to the list entry.

S Touching theNEWSDM key initiates the short data text entry screen. The screen isinitialised with the selected radio subscriber ID, or if no radio subscriber wasselected, the specified talkgroup ID as the addressee.

S Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality with theselected subscriber ID as the addressee.

S Touching theLIST INCDNT key initiates the sending ot a List Incidents command tothe Command and Control System server.

Helpful HintAt system start up, i.e., when the link to the radio system is firstestablished, the status code of a radio may not be known. In this case thestatus field will be filled with ‘.’s.

Touching the MAKE CALL, SUBS PROF, NEW SDM, PREDEF SDM orLIST INCDNT keys without first selecting an entry in the talkgroupselection list displays ERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED in the error message box atthe top of the screen.

The message NOTAVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM is generated when anattempt is made to send a pre--defined or an SDMmessage to a talkgroupwhose radio system does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.7_Subs_Profile E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 30

6.7 Subscriber Profile

The Subscriber Profile screen illustrated overleaf displays the details of a previouslyidentified radio subscriber. These details are:

S Subscriber’s alias

S Current status code and time received

S Most recent group and individual calls

S Current or most recent emergency alarm

S Talkgroup affiliation

S Subscriber’s ISSI

S Associated RUI (if applicable)

S Radio’s telephone number

In addition, the screen provides access to a set of specific subscriber operations. Theseoperations are:

S To make an Individual Call or Short Data Message

S Subscriber Alias Update

S Radio check

S Radio Stun (Disable) and De-Stun (Enable)

S Radio DGNA (Add and Remove talkgroups)

S Ambient Listen(Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen or Motorola Smartzone Remote Monitor)

S Perform a Terminal Query(To ascertain from the Airwave system whether an associaton exists between thishandset and a Radio User)

S Display associated Radio User Profile details (if applicable)

S Request a Short Data Message History

S Radio Resource Groups

Note: Where AAAAAAAAAAAA is stated in this section, subsitute the radio’s alias.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.7_Subs_ProfileE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 31

6.7.1 Subscriber Profile

Illustrated below is the information displayed on touching the SUBS PROF key, after firstspecifying a radio subscriber, e.g., by selecting an entry in a list containing radio subscribers,or after using the Subscriber Search screen (see Chapter 6.8).

Note: This illustration is to be used as a guide only and may not represent the screen’s finalappearance. The information displayed is described below:

S 0201 -- Radio subscriber’s alias

S Checking -- Is the prioritised radio status description

S On Duty -- Subscriber’s current status code and time the call was received

S Chippenham TG2 -- Subscriber’s most recent talkgroup voice call and time the callstarted

S Operator -- Alias of the (CCI port which the) last individual caller to dial thissubscriber and the time the call started

S Emergency -- Subscriber’s current or most recent emergency alarm status, time oflast emergency alarm, time of last acknowledgement, time of last emergency clear

S Details -- Subscriber’s current talkgroup affiliation, subscriber’s ISSI, RUI ( if loggedon, just dashes if no one is logged on) and telephone number

S Details -- Subscriber’s current talkgroup affiliation, subscriber’s ISSI, RUI (if loggedon -- just dashes if no one is logged on) and telephone number.

Note: Calls and status codes are shown only if they occurredwithin the previous twelve hours. If nocall or appropriate status code event has occurred in the last twelve hours the appropriatefield or fields is filled with ‘.’s.

The last emergency alarm is always shown, together with the date and time the alarm wasreceived, and the times of when it was acknowledged and cleared. If the alarm has not beenacknowledged or cleared the field will be blank. If no emergency alarm has been receivedfrom this radio user, the appropriate fields are filled with ‘.’s.

Note: Notification of the events caused by these and other functionsmay be filtered to be displayedon TETRASupervisors positions only. This permission is given by the SystemManager andis set in the User Types database file.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 32

6.7.2 Radio Status Description

Aprioritised radio status description is displayed at the top right hand side of the Profile area.

The following descriptions of the radio’s current status will be colour coded in a systemconfigurable colour:

Status Event Priority Description

Radio de--affiliated from talkgroup(may indicate radio power down,depending on the radio systeminfrastructure)

High No Talkgroup

Radio check in progress Med Checking

Radio disabled/stunned Med Disabled

Ambient listen Med Amb. Listen

DGNA Applied to radio Med Regrouped

<none> Low <blank>

Note: Medium priority items are prioritised in time order, the most recent being the one displayed.

Note: ‘Checking’ is a transient state,which is only shownwhilst the correspondingoperator initiatedcommand is in progress.

The following sections describe the status events listed in the table above. A non--prioritisedradio status description is displayed when actioning the functionality for each status event.Menu tabs give access to the functionality. These functions are dependent on thesubscriber’s host radio system.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 33

6.7.3 Main Tab Operations

Touching the MAIN tab invokes the subscriber operations sub--menu screen.

Touch the SUBS QUERY key to perform a Terminal Query to ascertain from the AirwaveSystem whether an association exists between this handset and a Radio User.

Touching the RUI PROF key displays the associated RUI Profile for the associated RadioUser. If no radio user is associated, this key will be disabled (as in the above example).

Touching the MAKE CALL key attempts an individual call to the indicated subscriber.

Touch the RADIO GROUP key to invoke the Radio Group Resource screen. If the selectedsubscriber belongs to a Resource Group, then that group’s details are displayed and thescreen is anUpdate screen. If the selectedSubscriber does not belong to aResourceGroupthen the Resource Group screen is displayed as a Create Group screen with the selectedsubscriber as the default for the Primary group member.

Touch the NEW SDM key to invoke the new SDM screen with the address filled out with theindicated subscriber details.

Touch theSDMHIST key to invoke the SDMHistory list which can display (SystemManagerconfigurable) up to the last 50 messages received from the selected subscriber.

A non--prioritised radio status description may be displayed when this menu tab is selected.Thiswill displayDe--affiliation status if the radio has beende--affiliated. If the radio is affiliatedthen no status will appear.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 34

6.7.4 Alias Update

Touching the ALIAS tab invokes the Alias Update sub--menu screen.

This displays the 12--character alias for the subscriber.

To enter a new alias, touch the ALIAS tab containing the keyboard icon to invoke theAlphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry.

Entering a new alias and touching the UPDATE ALIAS key (or pressing the ENTER key onthe keyboard) sends an update alias message to the radio system for the indicatedsubscriber.

If the update alias message is unsuccessful, the messageALIAS UPDATE FAILED

is displayed in themessage box at the top of the screen and the alias is restored to its originalvalue.

The systemmaybe configured to prevent a subscriber fromhaving the samealias asanothersubscriber. This is achieved by resetting the alias for the duplicate subscriber to its defaultalias. For the purpose of the duplicate check comparison, case is sensitive, i.e., fred, FREDand Fred are not treated as duplicates.

Limitations:

S When an alias update is attempted and it would become the same as the defaultalias of another subscriber, the update fails and the messageALIAS UPDATE REJECTED

is displayed. SystemManagers can use the DatabaseManagement Application toidentify the subscriber with this default alias and update if necessary.

S On touching the ALIAS UPDATE key the alias text is validated. An alias of‘DUPLICATE’ or any alias where the first three characters are ‘UKN’ or ‘Def’ (or anycase variation of these) are not permitted and the messageINVALID ALIAS

is displayed in themessageboxat the topof the screenand thealias is restored to itsoriginal value.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 35

6.7.5 DGNA -- Dynamic Group Number Assignment

This function is used to add or remove a talkgroup from the radio’s DGNA list. Radios arepreconfigured with talkgroups in which the radio user is allowed to talk. In situations where aradio user needs to talk to another agency talkgroup, the radio can be reprogrammed‘on-the-fly’ using this command. Upon receiving an ‘Add’ command, the radio automaticallyupdates to include thespecified talkgroupand thusallows the radio user to communicatewiththe added talkgroup’s members.

Note: The ability for theDS2000 to control theDGNA functionality will be dependent on the securitygroup and primary group configuration of the radio subscriber to which the DGNA is to beapplied. This configuration ensures that operators with the appropriate privilege to use theDGNA command are only able to update those subscribers with appropriate configurationsettings within the service infrastructure.

Touching the DGNA tab invokes the DGNA sub menu screen.

The displayed talkgroup is set to the last talkgroup which was added to this subscriber’sDGNA list. If no talkgroups have been added then a string of dots is displayed. A counter forthe number of talkgroups that have been added for this subscriber is also displayed.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 36

6.7.6 DGNA -- Add Talkgroup

Touching the ADD TALKGRP key invokes the Talkgroup Selection screen. From thisscreena talkgroupcanbeselected. Only talkgroups that havenot alreadybeenaddedwillbe available. Existing DGNA members are unselectable.

Toproceedwith theDGNAAddoperation select thedesired talkgroup from the list, then touchtheADDTALKGRP key. Theprocedure canbe cancelled at any timeprior to this by touchingthe CANCEL key which returns you to the Subscriber Profile screen.

When the ADD TALKGRP key is activated the operator position sends a radio DGNA addmessage to the radio system for the indicated subscriber.

Note: The initial response to this message simply records the fact that the radio system hasacknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed.

If the radio regroup message is rejected by the radio system, the error messageDGNA ADD REJECTED

is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

If the radio regroup message is unsuccessful, the messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- DGNA ADD FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias) isdisplayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

If the radio regroup message is successful, the messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- DGNA ADD OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias)is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 37

6.7.7 DGNA Remove Group

Touching the REM TALKGRP key invokes the Talkgroup Selection screen. From thisscreen a talkgroup can be selected. Only talkgroups which are already in the radio’sDGNA list will be made available. DGNA members which this operator does not haveaccess to, are unselectable.

To proceed with the DGNARemove operation select the desired talkgroup from the list, thentouch the REM TALKGRP key. The procedure can be cancelled at any time prior to this bytouching the CANCEL key. This returns you to the Subscriber Profile screen.

When theREMTALKGRPkey is activated theoperator position sendsa radioDGNAremovemessage to the radio system for the indicated subscriber.

Upon receiving this command the radiowill attempt to remove the specified talkgroup from itsinternal talkgroup list.

Note: The functionality of this command is dependent on the radio system infrastructure.

Note: The initial response to this message simply records the fact that the radio system hasacknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed.

If the cancel regroup message is rejected by the radio system, the error messageDGNA REMOVE REJECTED


On notification from the radio system that the cancel regroup message has suceeded themessageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- DGNA REMOVE OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias)is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

On notification from the radio system that the cancel regroup message has failed, themessageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- DGNA REMOVE FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias)is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 38

6.7.8 Stun/Enable Radio

Touching the STUN tab invokes the radio stun/enable sub--menu.

A non prioritised radio status description is displayed in this menu area, this will only displayStun status.

6.7.9 Stunning a Radio

Touching the STUN RADIO key sends a stun radio message to the radio system for theindicated subscriber.

Note: The initial response to this message only records the fact that the radio system hasacknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed.

If the stun radio request canot be made because the radio system is unavailable or does notsupport this feature, the error messageSTUN REJECTED


In addition, a ‘Stunned’ status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queue area ofoperators affiliated with that radio’s talkgroup. The Radio Status Description field is set to‘Disabled’.

If the stun radio request times out, the error messageSTUN FAIL -- STILL PENDING

is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen. The ‘Pending Stun’ state remainseven though the initial request has failed and will remain at pending until an affiliationmessage is received from the radio, which will result in the stun being retried.

Note: If an enable command is issued during the pending stun state, then the stun request will becancelled and the subsequent behaviour will be as described in the next section.

Onnotification from the radio system that the stun radiomessage has succeeded, an entry islogged to the fault log which, if configured, will be displayed in the message box at the top ofthe screen. In addition, a ‘‘Stunned” status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queueareaof operators affiliatedwith the radio’s talkgroup, and theRadioStatusDescription field isset to ‘‘Disabled”.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 39

6.7.10 Enabling a Radio

Touching the ENABLE RADIO key sends an enable radio message to the radio systemfor the indicated subscriber.

Note: The initial response to this message only records the fact that the radio system hasacknowledged receipt of the command. It does not imply that the command will succeed.

If the enable radio request cannot be made because the radio system is unavailable or doesnot support this feature, the error messageENABLED REJECTED


During the enabling phase the status description will be displayed as ‘‘Enabling’’.

If the enable radio request times out, the error messageENABLE FAIL -- STILL PENDING

is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen (the ‘Pending Enable’ state remainseven though the initial request has failed and will remain at pending until an affiliationmessage is received from the radio, which will result in the enable being retried).

On notification from the radio system that the enable radio message has suceeded, an entryis logged to the fault logwhich, if configured,will be displayed in themessagebox at the top ofthe screen. In addition, an ‘‘Enable” status event is displayed in the talkgroup Events Queuearea of operators affiliatedwith the radios talkgroup, and theRadio StatusDescription field isreset.

6.7.11 Radio Check

Touching the CHECK tab invokes the radio check sub--menu screen.

Touching the BEGIN CHECK key sends a radio check message to the radiosystem for the indicated subscriber.

The Radio status description field is updated to ‘Checking’.

When, or if, the radio responds, the text messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- RADIO CHECK OK (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias)is displayed in themessageboxat the topof the screenand theRadioStatusDescription fieldis reset to its current status.In addition, a ‘Check OK’ status event is displayed in the Talkgroup Events Queue area of alloperators affiliated to that radio,s talkgroup.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 40

If the radio check message is rejected by the radio system, the error messageRADIO CHECK REJECTED

is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen, and the Radio Status Descriptionfield is reset to its current status.

If the check operation times out, the messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- RADIO CHECK FAILED (whereAAAAAAAAAAAA is the radiouser’s alias) isdisplayed in the message box at the top of the screen. The Radio Status Description field isreset to its current status.In addition, a ‘Check Fail’ status event is displayed in the TalkgroupEventsQueue area of theoperators affiliated with that radio,s talkgroup.

Anon--prioritised radio status description is displayed in thismenuarea. Thiswill only displayRadio Check status.

Note: Each commandwill time--out if no response is received from the radio systemwithin a factoryconfigured time limit.

6.7.12 Ambient Listen

The Ambient Listen function may be configured to allow instant access to start the feature orto require authorisation for use. Authorisation may be required for certain User Types if anauthorisation code has been defined for the site. Check with your System Manager.

If an authorisation code is not required, or an ambient listen is already in progress, thentouching the AMB LSTN tab invokes the following Ambient Listen sub--menu screen.

When the operational need arises and/or authorisation is given to listen in to a subscriber,touching theLISTEN key starts ambient listening. TheCANCEL key is used to abort a Listenrequests which has not yet commenced.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 41

If your system database is configured with an Authorisation Code string and your User Typerequires the use of the code, touching the AMB LSTN tab will display an edit box and anumeric keypad as shown below:

On entering the Authorisation Code the edit box will echo asterisks (*) for each digit entered.You can use either the keyboard ENTER key or the LISTEN key to start the Ambient Listenfunction.

The system validates the entered code against the code stored within the DS2000 databaseconfiguration file and if valid, the Ambient Listen request will be issued.

If you enter an invalid code then the messageINVALID AUTHORISATION CODE is displayed in the message area and the edit box clearedready for a subsequent attempt.

If the code is valid but the Ambient Listen request is unsuccessful, the edit box is not cleared,and the request may be repeated simply by touching the LISTEN key

There are two types of Ambient Listen, each of which is tied to a particular type of radiosystem; ‘Motorola Smartzone’ Ambient Listen and ‘Motorola Dimetra’ Ambient Listen. Only‘Motorola Dimetra’ Ambient Listen is mentioned in this manual.

6.7.12.1 Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen

Motorola Dimetra version of Ambient Listen is based upon an Individual Call and obeysindividual call rules, so can only be heard by the operator initiating Ambient Listen.

An Ambient Listen request will pre--empt any existing normal priority individual call that theradio is in.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 42

An Ambient Listen call may not be placed in a connect group as this would prevent allmembers of the connect group from transmitting.

If an operator attempts an Ambient Listen to a radio for which an outstanding individualcallback status exists, the DS2000 does not consider the Ambient Listen request to be acallback. The Ambient Listen proceeds regardless and the callback request remainsoutstanding.

Thesystemprevents anoperator from transmittingwhilst anAmbient Listencall is active (andnot on hold) at that position.

Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen can be in one of four states: Idle, Pending, Ringing orListening.

Idle State

In this state, the LISTEN key is enabled and the CANCEL key is disabled.If theLISTEN key is pressed a Listen request is issued over the network for this subscriber. Ifthis is successful the state will be changed to Pending otherwise it remains in the Idle state.

If the Ambient Listen request is rejected by the radio system, the error messageAMBIENT LISTEN REJECTED


Pending State

The Pending state is where an Ambient Listen request has been issued but the radio has notyet started to transmit and the ringing indication has not been received by the operator.

This state is enteredwhen the LISTEN keyhasbeenpressedand theAmbient Listen requesthas been successful.

In this state, the LISTEN key is enabled and theCANCEL key is disabled. This is to preventboth keys from being disabled should the message indicating that the radio has stoppedtransmitting not being received. In addition, the CALLS key indicates that a call is pending.

If the LISTEN key or theCALLS key is pressed whilst in the Pending state, the action will failand the system remains in the Pending state. If the radio has reverted back to its Idle state,the LISTEN key and the CALLS key operate in the normal way.

If the radio system is unable to allocate a resource for the call or is unable to locate radio, theerror messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- AMBIENT LISTEN FAILED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’salias) is displayed in themessage box at the top of the screen and the systemgoes to the idlestate.

If the radio indicated in the request is unknown to the radio system, the error messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- AMBIENT LISTEN REJECTED (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radiouser’s alias) is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen and the system goes tothe idle state.

When a statusmessage is received indicating that the radio is ringing the state is changed toRinging.

Note: A Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen can only be cancelled once the radio unit is ringing orduring the call, i.e., in states Ringing or Listening.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 43

Ringing State

In the Ringing state a Listen request has been accepted and the radio has signalled that it is‘ringing’ (even though no actual ringing is taking place and the radio auto--answers).

In this state the LISTEN key is disabled, the CANCEL key is enabled. Also the CALLS keyindicates the ringing state. When a status message is received indicating that the AmbientListen has started, the state will change to Listening. If this indication is not received within apreconfigured amount of time, the system reverts to the Idle state.

In this state, if you press the CANCEL key, the system will go to the Idle state.

It is possible for this state to be skipped entirely and the Ambient Listen call go straight fromthe Pending State to the Listening state.

Listening State

This is the period during which the radio is transmitting. This state is entered when a statusmessage that the radio has begun to transmit is received.

The messageAAAAAAAAAAAA -- AMBIENT LISTENING (where AAAAAAAAAAAA is the radio user’s alias)is displayed in the message box at the top of the screen.

The Radio Status Description field is set to ‘Amb Listen’.

In this state theLISTEN key is disabled, theCANCEL key is enabled and theCALLS key andCurrent Call field of the Current Calls Area assume the Ambient Listen colour.

Note: On some systems a factory configurable message may be displayed in the area above theLISTEN and CANCEL keys to give the operator standard information about Ambient Listencalls.

If a status message is received indicating that the radio has stopped transmitting the statereverts back to Idle.

Unlike the Motorola Smartzone functionality, Motorola Dimetra Ambient Listen does nottime--out; generally the operator has to cancel the function using one of the methodsdescribed.

A non prioritised radio status description is displayed in this menu area; this only displaysAmbient Listen status.

Ambient Listen can also be cancelled by any of the methods by which an normal individualcall can be cleared.

The following error conditions can occur:

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 44

Message Comment

Helpful Hint Alias Update Failed Unable to execute; command times

out.

Invalid Alias If an alias updated is attempted to

‘DUPLICATE’ or where the first three

characters are ‘UNK’ or ‘Def’.

Alias Update Rejected If an alias is updated and it is the

same as the default alias of another

subscriber.

Invalid Character If an alias is updated with a ‘*’ in it.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Radio Check Failed

Unable to locate radio; command

times out.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Radio Check Rejected

Unknown radio.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

DGNA Add Failed

Unable to add a talkgroup; command

times out.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

DGNA Add Rejected

Unknown radio/talkgroup, or too many

have been added.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

DGNA Remove Failed

Unable to remove a talkgroup;

command times out.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

DGNA Remove Rejected

Unknown radio/talkgroup.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Stun Failed

Unable to stun radio; command times

out.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Stun RejectedUnknown radio/talkgroup.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Enable Failed

Unable to enable radio; command times

out.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Enable Rejected


AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Ambient Listen Failed

System unable to allocate resources for

audiomonitoring, unable to locate radio.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Ambient Listen Rejected


Ambient Listen Rejected Ambient listen command is rejected by

the radio system.

Invalid Authoristaion Code Ambient Listen Authoristaion Code is

invalid.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

Subscriber Query Failed

Airwave system is unavailable for

queries.

AAAAAAAAAAAA --

SDM History Display Failed

Unable to retrieve the SDM History or

the command times out.

Operation Failed Voice database not available.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.8_Subs SearchE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6--45

6.8 Subscriber Search


6.8.1 Searching for a Subscriber

The Subscriber Search screen can be invoked by touching the SUBS SEARCH key.

The Subscriber Search screen allows you to search for a radio subscriber or a radio user.

S Radio subscribers can be searched for, based on Alias or ISSI

S Radio users can be searched for, based on RUI or ASSI

The Subscriber Search screen can also be used to enter a subscriber address directly, ifknown, to be used by a referring screen.

Descriptive text header

Subscriber Search option tabs

Enter search string

Search function key

Function keys vary as they aredependent on where the screenhas been invoked from

A search screen can be invoked in one of two ways:

S Subscriber Search -- When requesting a subscriber search; you may searchby Alias, ISSI, RUI and ASSI.

S ValidationSearch -- Whenvalidating an ISSI numberwhich is not correct, e.g.,via the Dial Pad or SDM function; you may search by either Alias or ISSI.

Note: The function keys and search option tabs that are presented are dependant on whichsearch screen was invoked.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6--46

To carry out a search, touch the tab (Alias, ISSI, RUI or ASSI) that corresponds to theaddress type you wish to search for.

Address text can be entered either from a keyboard or by invoking the on--screenkeyboard, displayed when touching the text field. The SEARCH key becomes availableonce text is entered in the address window.

To find an alias using the on--screen keyboard, touch the ALIAS tab then touch the textfield. This invokes the alphanumeric keyboard screen. To find an alias starting with theletter A, for example, enter A* in the text window. Now touch the ALIAS SEARCH key.The Subs Search screen is invoked with the address in the edit box, e.g., A*, and thepreviously disabled SEARCH key is active.

Note: Thewildcard ‘*’ is supported, but only at the end of the string, e.g., A*, and characters arenot case sensitive.

Touching theSEARCH key initiates a search, and returns all the results that fit thesearch criteria. They are presented as a scrollable list with a maximum of eightresults per page as shown in the following screen.

Note: A search result is in alphanumerical order and limited to a maximum of the first 100nearest matches per search.

If no results were found, the messageNO RESULTS FOUND

is displayed in the message bar.

Descriptive header text

Validation search, ISSI andAlias only

Search string *

Scrollable list of results

Icon depicting binding

Function key enabled as listentry Alias00016 is selected

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6--47

The results are split in to four columns:

S The first column shows the matches to the search string that was entered.

S The second column displays the following icon to indicate when there is abinding (association) between the Radio and a User.

S The third columnshows either theUser, or theRadio that is bound. If there is nobinding then this column will display ‘----’ to indicate that there is no associatedRadio/User.

S The fourth column shows an icon to indicate whether the Radio is a primarymember of a Resource Group

a secondary member of a Resource Group

or an independant

6.8.2 Using the Search Results

Selecting the required entry from the scrollable search result list enables those menukeys available for that type of entry, e.g., if the search is by user and the selected RUI orASSI has no bound subscriber the RUI PROF key is enabled and the SUBS PROF,MAKE CALL and NEW SDM keys are disabled. However if the selected itemdemonstrates binding, all four keys are enabled.

The possible menu keys available are:

S The SUBS PROF key to display the Subscriber Profile screen.

S The RUI PROF key to display the associated RUI Profile screen.

S The MAKE CALL key to instigate an individual call, displaying the IndividualCall screen.

S TheNEWSDM key to invoke theSDMscreenwith theaddress filledout with theindicated subscriber details.

S The USE RESULT key to transfer the search result back to the screen fromwhich the ‘‘Subscriber Search” screen was invoked.

S The CANCEL key to return you to the screen from which the ‘‘SubscriberSearch” screen was invoked.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6--48

Helpful HintMaximum results per search is limited to the first 100 matches.

If the wildcard ( * ) is entered anywhere except at the end of a textstring, the message

is displayed.INVALID CHARACTER

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.9_Subs List SelectionE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 49

6.9 Subcriber Selection List

TheSubscriber Selection list displays a list of all subscribers currently affiliated to a specifiedtalkgroup or Migration Group; this includes radio subscribers and operators at the local sitewho have registered to the talkgroup (or member talkgroups of a Migration Group).

When the term ‘talkgroup(s)’ is referred to within this section it includes ‘Migration Group(s)’.

6.9.1 Subs List Function Key

The SUBS LIST key is found by accessing the Talkgroup List.

To view a list of all the subscribers that are currently affiliated to a particular talkgroup,touch an entry in the Talkgroup List. With that entry now primed, touch the SUBS LISTkey. A list of subscribers for that talkgroup is displayed.

6.9.2 Subscriber List

TheSubscriber list for a selected talkgroup is a scrollable alphabetically ordered list. The titleof the list is displayed in the following format:

Subscriber List DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD (TTT)

where:

S DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD is the description of the talkgroup, e.g., ‘Talkgroup 1’(maximum 15 characters).

S TTT is the talkgroup identifier.

Each entry in the list has the format

AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

where:

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber, or of any operator who iscurrently affiliated to the talkgroup.

S HH:MM is the time-stamp of the last status code logged for the radio subscriber, orfor an operator it is the time-stamp of the operator registration event.

S SSSSSSSSSSS is thecaller’s current status, derived from their current statuscode.

Note: If no status code is logged for a radio, the time-stamp and status fields will be filled with ‘...’.

When you are displaying a subscriber list and an incoming group call event is received fromasubscriber in that list, .that subscriber entry in the list changes colour (to theSystemManagerdefined colour). The indication is displayed for the duration of the call if the subscriber’stalkgroup is selected or audiomonitored. If the subscriber’s talkgroup is eventmonitored thesubscriber’s entry indicates the incoming call for a system predefined time. The talkgroupmust be either event monitored, audio monitored or selected in order for incoming callindications to be displayed on the subscriber list.

Note: This functionality is a factory configurable option.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.9_Subs List Selection E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 50


Touching the MORE key displays a further selection of function keys within the screen.

Touching the TGRP HIST key displays the Talkgroup History screen for the specifiedtalkgroup. This operation is always valid.

Touching the NEWSDM key initiates the short data text entry screen with the selected radiosubscriber as the addressee, or if no selection, with the specified talkgroup.

Once an entry corresponding to a radio user is selected, you can make use of the followingfunction keys:

S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio user.

S Touching the SUBS PROFILE key invokes the Subscriber Profile screen with thedetails of the selected radio subscriber displayed.

S Touching the NEW SDM key invokes the short data text entry screen with theselected radio subscriber as the addressee,

S Touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incident command tothe Command and Control server,

S Touching the SDM HIST key invokes the SDM History list screen containing up tothe last 50 SDMs received from the selected subscriber,

6.9.4 Refresh

TheSubscriber list is a snapshot of users affiliated to the talkgroup at the time the list was firstdisplayed. If notification of a subscriber leaving the talkgroup occurs whilst this list isdisplayed, the corresponding entry for that subscriber in the list is displayed in a highlightedstyle. TheStatus field is also changed to the corresponding status event description for radiochange talkgroup affiliation or de-affiliation as appropriate. For example, when a subscribermoves to a new talkgroup, a ‘Reaffil TTT’ status is displayed (where TTT is the identifier of thenew talkgroup). The REFRESH key flashes to indicate an update.

If a new subscriber or operator joins the talkgroup whilst the list is displayed, the REFRESHkey changes state/flashes. Touching the REFRESH key updates the list with any newaffiliated subscribers and removes any subscriberswho have de-affiliated from the talkgroupsince it was last displayed. Any current selected entries are deselected and the list is scrolledto the first page.

On notification of a status code from the radio, the corresponding list entry updatesautomatically.

Helpful HintAt systemstartup, i.e.,when the link to the radio system is first established,the status code of a radiomay not be known; in this case the status field isfilled with ‘...’s.

In the event of a CADI failure the incoming group call event will only beshown for those talkgroups audio monitored by at least one operator.

Touching the SUBS PROFILE or the MAKE CALL key without firstselecting an entry in the list displays INVALID OPERATION in the errormessage box at the top of the screen.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.10_RUI ProfileE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 51

6.10 Radio User Identity (RUI)

Note: Availability of this functionality is dependent on the connecting radio system. If it is notsupported the relevant keys or menu tabs will be greyed out.

The RUI Profile screen can be accessed from the Subscriber Profile screen (see Chapter6.7) or after accessing the Subs Search screen and using the RUI tab for the search.

6.10.1 RUI Introduction

The RUI Profile screen displays details relating to a previously identified radio user. Thesedetails are:

S Radio Users Identity (RUI) -- The RUI is used to identify a Radio User (individual orfunction). The RUI may be a numeric or alphanumeric user ID.

S ASSI -- This is a special form of radio user ID that fits into the TETRA SSI addressspace. A particular user may have an RUI or an ASSI, or both.

S Alphatag.

S The current binding state of the radio.

In addition, the screen provides access to a set of specific radio user operations. Theseoperations are:

S Display associated Subscriber Profile details (if applicable).

S Setup an association between a Radio User and a handset.

S PerformaRadioUserQuery toascertain from theAirwave infrastructurewhetheranassociation exists between this Radio User and a handset.

6.10.2 RUI Profile Screen

After specifying a radio user, e.g., from the Subcriber Profile list, touching theRUI PROFkey invokes the RUI Profile screen as shown below.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.10_RUI Profile E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 52

The screen displays the following information:

S RUI0001 -- Radio User’s Identity.

Details

S 20001 -- Is the ASSI.

S Radio User 0001 -- Radio user’s alphatag.

Association

S ‘‘UNKNOWN’’ -- The user’s current association state with a radio. The followingtable shows the different association states.

S Time -- This is the date and time of the association update.

State Text Description of State

Booked On User has been booked on by an operator.

Logged On User has logged on to Airwave.

Bound by the System User has been implicitly bound by the system.

Booked Off User has been logged off by an operator.

Logged Off User has logged off Airwave.

Unbound by System User unbound by the Airwave system.

Timed Out Airwave system unbound the user due to log/book ontimeout.

Implicit Association DS2000 system association due to database update.

Implicit Disassociation DS2000 systemhas unbound user due to database update.

Unknown Unknown to the system.

6.10.3 Main -- Sub Menu

The MAIN tab is automatically selected when the RUI Subs screen is invoked.

6.10.3.1 Subscriber Profile Key

Touching the SUBS PROF key invokes the Subscriber Profile screen for the associatedhandset. If the radio user is not currently associated with a handset this key is greyed out.

6.10.3.2 Rui Query Key

Touching the RUI QUERY key issues a request to the Airwave system to confirm whetherthis user is currently associated with a handset.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.10_RUI ProfileE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 53

6.10.4 Book -- Sub Menu

Touching theBOOK tab invokes theBookRadio submenu screenas shown in the followingillustration.

Initially the ISSI edit box is blank and either:

Touching the SEARCH key invokes the Subscriber Search screen so that a Radio addresscan be found. When an address is found the RUI profile display is presented to you, with thedesired address entered into the ISSI edit box,

or

Touching the ISSI keypad key invokes the Numeric keypad display for touch screen numericentry.

The ISSI, SEARCH and BOOK ON keys will be greyed out if there is a binding between theUser and a Radio, as show above.

When there is an ISSI address in the edit box, after touching the BOOK ON key, a book onmessage is sent to that radio address. If the ISSI address is unknown to the system, thesubscriber search screen is presented to you, displaying a list of nearest matches to the ISSIentered. You may now:

S Choose one of these matches as the radio.

S Initiate a new search for a radio.

S Cancel the Book On request.

The BOOK OFF key is greyed out if there is no binding between the user and a radio.

Touching theBOOKOFF key sends a book off message to the radio system for the indicatedradio user and their associated ISSI.

If the command is successful then the messageRADIO USER BOOKED ON or RADIO USER BOOKED OFF


If the command is unsuccessful then the messageRADIO USER BOOKING FAILED


VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.10_RUI Profile E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 54

6.10.5 New Pin -- Sub Menu

Touching theNEWPIN tab invokes theChangeRadioPINsubmenuscreenasshown in thefollowing illustration.

This display contains a text box which is initially blank.

Touching the CHANGE PIN key sends a change radio user pin message to the AirwaveSystem for the indicated radio user.

If the command is successful then the radio users newPIN is displayed in thePINbox and themessageRADIO USER PIN CHANGED OK


If the command is unsuccessful then the message

RADIO USER PIN CHANGED FAILED


Helpful HintThe Radio User Query command will be rejected with a failure message ifno viable connection to the Airwave Aliasing sub--system exists.

TheBookOn/Off command is still available even if no viable connection tothe Airwave Aliasing sub--system exists as it will update the data held onthe Tetra Gateway’s Alias database.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.11_Call EventsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 55

6.11 Call Events

The Call Events log displays a history of calls (both group and individual) and status codesand events, as well as emergency alarms and callback requests.

Status code updates are deemed as standard (National) codes and Trust defined codes.These status codes are sent by radio users and are displayed as system configurable textmessages. Status events are generated by the radio system as a confirmation (orside-effect) of an action initiated by either the radio user or by an operator; these are alsodisplayed as system configurable text messages.

Note: A history of calls etc., relating to a specified talkgroup are displayed in the Talkgroup History.

6.11.1 Call Event History Log

Touching the CALL EVENTS key invokes the call events history list. This is a scrollable,selectable list entitled ‘Call Events List’. It displays a history of calls and status informationreceived by you since logon to a maximum of 1000 entries.

The list displays:

S Incoming individual calls

S Talkgroup calls, i.e., PTTs by radio subscribers and operator calls originating fromremote sites

S Individual callback requests

S Emergency alarms

S Status codes and events

The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. This list therefore provides anear complete history of the most recent activity, as seen by you.

Note: Events may be selectively filtered for addition to this list based on Event and whether theoperator is a Tetra supervisor.

The default format for an entry in the queue is either:


S TTT is the talkgroup identifier specified in the System Manager configurabletalkgroup database (maximum three characters).

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber (maximum 12 characters)If the alias is longer than 12 characters, then the last 12 characters are displayed,preceded by ‘..’.

S HH:MM is the start time of the incoming call or event notification.

S SSSSSSSSSSS is either the caller’s current status, derived from their currentstatus code, or the status event description (as specified in the System Managerconfigurable options below). For calls originating fromoperators at remote sites thisfield is filled with ‘...’s.

or

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.11_Call Events E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 56

That of an Individual Call queue list entry:

… AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

HH:MM indicates the start time of the call.

Additional entries displayed as specified below:

S Emergency alarms are displayed in the same colours as those used by theEmergency Display list.

S Callback requests are displayed in the same colours as those used by the CallbackDisplay list.

S Incoming individual calls are displayed in the same colours as those used by theIndividual Call Queue list.

6.11.1.1 Associated Functions

The call events history list is up to date when it is first displayed. Any subsequent events arenot displayed in the list until the screen is exited and re-entered.

List entries are selectable. A list entry is selected by touching it. Onceanentry correspondingto a radio user is selected, the operator can make use of the following keys:

S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates a call to the radio subscriber.

S Touching theNEWSDM key initiates the short data text entry screenwith the detailsof the selected radio subscriber displayed.

S Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality screenwith the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed.

S Touching the SUBS PROF key initiates the Subscriber Profile screen with thedetails of the selected radio subscriber displayed.

S If available, touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incidentscommand to the Command and Control server.

Helpful HintAt systemstartup, i.e.,when the link to the radio system is first established,the status code of a radio making a group call may not be known. If this isthe case the status field is filled with ‘...’s.

The following system error report message may be displayed in themessage area at the top of the screen:

The messageNOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS SUBSCRIBER

is displayed when an attempt is made to send apredefined SDM or an SDMmessage to a subscriberwhose Radio System does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.12_Individual CallsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 57

6.12 Individual Calls

6.12.1 Single Point to Point Call

To make an individual call, you can select a subscriber using one of the following methods:

6.12.1.1 Individual Call via a List

You can scroll through the chosen list to find the desired radio user.Individual calls from anoperator position to a radio subscriber can be made from one of a number of lists or in somecases, via the Dial Pad.

To make an individual call, you can select a subscriber from one of the following:

S Talkgroup Events list

S Subscriber Selection list

S Individual Call History list

S Emergency Display list (depending on radio terminal configuration)

S Callback list

S Individual Subscriber Search screen

S Call Event list

S SDM Received Message list

S SDM Sent Message list

S SDM History list

S Mobile Resource List

To make a call, you highlight the desired radio user’s list entry by touching it, then touch theMAKECALL key. When answered, the call is automatically placed in the Active Call area ofthe list.

6.12.1.2 Individual Selection by ISSI

Operation of the Dial Pad is as a normal telephone dial pad with the addition of DIAL TEL,SDM ISSI and DIAL ISSI keys.

When an ISSI for a subscriber is known, touch theDIALPAD key or theDIALPADentry in thePopUpMenu associatedwith theTELEPHONE key to display theDialPad screen.

Touch the DIAL ISSI key.

When a connection is established touch and hold the TX key when talking to thesubscriber.

Enter the ISSI of the subscriber to be called by touching the appropriate figures onthe keypad. The dialled figures are displayed in the 20--character field situatedabove the keys.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.12_Individual Calls E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 58

6.12.1.3 Mobile Resource Screen

The Mobile Resource screen can be used to initiate simultaneous point--to--point calls to allmembers of a Resource Group with the individual call being established with the firstsubscriber to answer. Alternatively, a single point--to--point call can be initiated directly to therequired subscriber using the Resource Entry Menu. Once this call has been initiated theIndividual Tetra Calls page is automatically displayed.

6.12.1.4 Resource Group Screen

The Resource Group configuration screen can be used to initiate simultaneouspoint--to--point calls to all members of a Resource Group with the individual call beingestablishedwith the first subscriber to answer. Oncean individual call has been initiated fromthis screen, the Individual Tetra Call page is automatically displayed, and any unsavedchanges made on the Resource Group screen are discarded.

6.12.2 Interupt Priority Individual Call

An individual call to a radio subscriber may be made as a high priority (or “Interrupt Priority”)call by priming theMAKEURGNTkeyprior to placing thecall. Making suchacallwill eject theradio subscriber from any active normal priority individual call and force it into the new call.Interrupt priority calls may be identified on the individual calls list or subscriber list (or INDIVCALLS key, if enabled through a configurable option), by the interrupt priority call colour.

6.12.3 Multi Point Call

A Multi Point call initiates individual calls to all members of a Resource Group who arecurrently not busy. The Individual Tetra Call page is automatically displayed showing that acall has been made to the Resource Group.

Once one of the members answers the call, the other call attempts are cancelled and theanswering call is fully connected.

The Individual calls are first made to the Primary of the Resource group followed by theSecondary members.

6.12.4 Individual Call in Progress

Once the radio user answers thecall, youare connected to themasan individual (half duplex)call. You can then use PTT to transmit to the radio as normal.

Note: The INDIV CALLS key, if enabled through a factory configurable option, indicates that theoutgoing call is connected and displays the radio user’s alias.

The call details are also displayed in the Active Call field of the Individual Tetra Call List(accessed by touching the INDIVIDUAL CALLS entry in the Pop Up Menu associated withthe LISTS key ) in the following format:

WWW AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Where:

S WWW is the three character field representing emergency or normal priority call

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.12_Individual CallsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 59

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias

S HH:MM is the time the call was initiated

S SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic

Types of Individual Calls list entries are as follows:

Normal Calls... AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Emergency CallsEMG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Interrupt Priority CallsURG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Ambient Listen CallAMB AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

It is alsopossible througha factory configurableoption to clear thecurrent call byun--touchingthe “Active Call” entry.

If the radio user is also in the Incoming Call queue, the call entry is taken as an incoming callrather than an outgoing call.

If the radio user is in the Callback Requests queue, the queue entry is removed once theindividual call is initiated.

You can clear the call before the radio user answers, or whilst the call is in progress, bytouching the Active Call entry in the Individual Calls screen.

6.12.5 Radio Group Key

Whilst an Individual Call is in progress the RADIO GROUP key may be used tonavigate to the Resource Group Configuration screen displaying the ResourceGroup details for the ‘in progress’ call. The primary purpose of this feature is toenable easy navigation for rapid Alias update.

Helpful Hint

The following error reports are associated with the Make Individual Callfunctionandmaybedisplayed in themessageareaat the topof the screenwhen an attempt is made to make a single individual call:

a) The messageINVALID OPERATION

is displayed in themessage areawhen an attempt ismade to make an individual call if you already havean open connect group, an individual call inprogress and ‘auto hold’ is disabled or a selectedTalkgroup or radio and you are a ‘radio type’.

b) The messageINDIVIDUAL CAPACITY REACHED

is displayed in the message area if the radiosubsystem is unable to allocate the relevantresource.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.12_Individual Calls E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 60

The following messages are reported for error conditions that are detected by the TetraSystem and sent back to the DS2000:

Priority Op Console Message Description

1 Call Failed -- Radio InGroup Call

The radio is already engaged in agroup call (see note 1 below).

2 Call Not Answered -- MayBe In Group Call

The radio user does not answer thecall or the radio is already engaged ina group call (see note 2 below).

3 Call Failed -- RadioEngaged

The radio is already engaged in aprivate individual call.

4 Call Failed The Tetra System encountered aninternal error and was unable to placethe call (channel failed ...etc -- seenote 3 below) or failed to respond tothe ”Begin Call” request.

5 Call Failed -- Out OfCoverage

The radio is out of coverage.

6 Call Failed -- RadioTurned Off

The radio is turned off or not affiliated

7 Call Failed -- RadioStunned

The radio has been disabled(stunned).

8 Call Terminated The radio user terminated the callwithout answering it.

1: If supported by the Tetra System, this message is generated if the radio user is alreadyinvolved in a group call.

2: This message is generated if the radio user does not answer the call within a (TetraSystem configured) preset period of time after the radio starts ringing. Note that if the radio isin agroup call then itmaynot actually ringbut the callwill still proceeduntil timedout by the thesystem.

3: If the Tetra System reports any error conditions other than those shown above then theDS2000 will map these onto the ”Call Failed” (Tetra System internal error) condition. Inaddition thismessage is generated if theDS2000 fails to receive any response from theTetraSystem before an internal (configurable) timeout period has elapsed.

Reporting of these error conditions is subject to the ability of the specific Tetra System todetect them and report them back to the DS2000.

In aMulti--Point call it is possible for each call to fail for a different reason, but only one failuremessage will be displayed on the OP Console.

Note: The error condition priority shown in the table above is used to determine which message isdisplayed, with 1 being the highest priority and 8 the lowest.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.13_Inbound Ind CallE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 61

6.13 Inbound Individual Calls

Incoming individual calls from radio subscribers to a specific operator ITSI are held in theIndividual Call queue of that operator, (below any calls on Hold). Incoming calls in the queuecan be answered in order via the INDIV CALLS key or in any order from the Individual Callslist.

Emergency calls are placed in the Individual Call queue ahead of non-emergency calls.Non-emergency calls are then held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first).

Note: All references to emergency individual calls are conditional on the radio systembeing able tosupport this functionality.

6.13.1 CCI Port Assignments

Note: CCI ports are the interface point for third party systems, i.e., the DS2000 to the AirwaveService.

Incoming individual calls arriving at aCCI port are presented to a single operator or to a groupof operators as configured by the SystemManager. The call can then be answered by use ofthe INDIVCALLS keyor via the IndividualCalls list. Once the call has beenanswered the callindication is removed from all other operator screens that received that call.

6.13.2 Individual Call Key

The INDIV CALLS key is used to show and answer the head of the IndividualCall queue. This is similar to answering a telephone call and connects you to thecalling party on a point to point basis. You can then use PTT to transmit to thatradio subscriber as normal.

On use of this key, the call at the head of the queue is answered, the key changes to displayeither the details of the next call that is waiting to be answered, as well as a count of thenumber of queued calls (not including the call in progress), or, if no calls are awaiting, theaddress window is blank. Additionally, the active call is displayed in the Individual List.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.13_Inbound Ind Call E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 62

The presentation format of inbound INDIV CALLS is shown below.

No Individual Calls (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

Five Individual Calls (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

The INDIV CALLS key below shows that the subscriber with the alias of ‘Df10004’ is at thehead of the Individual Calls queue with a total of five calls waiting to be answered.

If further incoming calls arrive or are pending once a call has been answered, the keyindicates that further calls are pending by a change of display attributes, along with anindication of the number of queued calls.

An audible alarm is generated when there are unanswered calls in the queue. The audiblealarms can be configured by the systemmanager to be enabled or disabled for each specificUser Type.

If the connected individual call is terminated by either party and there are no further callsqueued, the INDIV CALLS key reverts to its normal state with no alias displayed.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 63

6.13.3 Individual Tetra Calls List

Touch this key to display the Individual Calls list. Accessing this list allows unansweredincoming calls to be answered out of order.

6.13.3.1 Active Calls

The Active Call details field format is:


Where:

• WWW is the three character field representing the type of call (as listed below)

• AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character subscriber alias

• HH:MM is the time the call was initiated

• SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character call status mnemonic

Types of Active Call entries are listed below:


Emergency Calls (these entries are not available on all systems)EMG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Interrupt Priority Calls (these entries are not available on all systems)URG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Ambient Listen CallAMB AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

6.13.3.2 List Entries

The Individual Calls List area consists of the Active Call area and the Individual Calls listwhich can contain up to five entry types (each with different colour attributes) in the followingorder:

• Calls-Hold (three types: Normal, Interrupt Priority and Dimetra Ambient Listen)

• Emergency incoming calls

• Normal incoming calls

On--Hold Calls (All types)HLD AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Emergency CallsEMG AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS


VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.13_Inbound Ind Call E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 64

The emergency calls are queued in order of arrival, as are those of normal priority.

If there are a large number of calls in the queue the scroll bar can be used. The maximumIncoming Calls queue size is 100 per operator.

To take an incoming queued call out of order, touch the list entry which highlights the relevantcall, then touch the TAKE CALL key.

When a call is connected, the caller details are removed from the key’s display and the tally isdecremented by one. The call is automatically put in the Active Call area of the IndividualCalls List. You can then use PTT to transmit to the radio subscriber as normal.

You are not able to accept a new incoming call, initiate a new outgoing call, or make a groupcall whilst a previous individual call is in progress. Youmust clear the current individual call orplace it on Hold before making or taking a new call.

If you attempt to accept an incoming call whilst having:

• An individual call in progress, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically places the individual call on hold provided ‘auto hold’ feature isenabled, otherwise the attempt is rejected.

• A radio or talkgroup selected, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically deselects the talkgroupor radio provided theoperator profile is not setfor ‘Radio Priority’, otherwise the attempt is rejected.

• A telephone call is in progress, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically places the telephone call on hold.

• An intercom call is in progress, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically cancels the operator from the intercom call.

• An open Connect Group the attempt is rejected.

If a radio user in the Incoming Call queue terminates the call before you are able to answer it,the queue entry is removed from the list.

In addition to queued incoming individual calls, the IndividualCalls List alsodisplays calls thatare on hold. Individual calls that are on hold show at the head of the list. These have adifferent format and are displayed in the ‘‘On Hold” colour of the type of call being held.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 65

PROBLEM?

The following system fault message is associated with theIndividual Call function and may be displayed in the messagearea at the top of the screen:

• The message ANSD OUT OF SEQ OP XXX

USER YYYYYYYYY is displayed when the callaccepted is not at the head of a call queue.where XXX is the operator ID andYYYYYYYYY is theabbreviatedaliasof theradio user.

The following error report messages are associated with theIndividual Call function and may be displayed in the messagearea at the top of the screen:

• The message INVALID OPERATION is dis-played when an attempt is made to answeran incoming individual call if you alreadyhave one of the following in progress: anopen connect group, an individual call (andAuto Hold is disabled), or a talkgroup orradio selected and your User Profile isconfigured as having ‘Radio Priority’.

• The system fault report INVALID INDIVIDUAL

ON PORT XX is displayed if an indivdual callis received on a CCI port mode notconfiguerd to receive individual calls, i.e.,3,7 & 8, where XX is the CCI port number.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.14_Clearing Ind Call E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 66

6.14 In-progress Individual Calls

CCI ports are the interface point for third party systems, e.g., the DS2000 to the AirwaveService.

Note: Incoming individual calls arriving at aCCI port are presented to a single operator or to a groupof operators as configured by the System Manager in the database.

In-progress individual calls can be cleared either by the radio user or by the operator.

To clear an in-progress individual call, or to abort an outgoing call request prior to connection,touch the Individual Call List entry in the Active Call area.

You are not able to accept a new incoming call, initiate a new outgoing call, or make a groupcall whilst an individual call is in progress. You must clear (or place on Hold) the currentindividual call before making or taking a new call.

When either the radio subscriber or yourself clears the individual call, the Active Call detailsfield in the Individual Calls list is cleared.

If the radio interface fails during the call, the call is cleared down and the operator notified.

Helpful HintThe following systemerror reportmessages are associatedwith theClearIndividual Call function and may be displayed in the message area at thetop of the screen:

The messageCCI XX @ YYYYYYYYY FAILED is displayed if the radiointerface (CCI Port) fails whilst an individual call is inprogress. Where XX is the port number andYYYYYYYYY is the name of the Tetra Gateway theport was being accessed by.

The messageCALLCLEARFAIL is displayedwhenanattempt ismadeby you to clear the individual call whilst the radio istransmitting.

During a Call In Progress, if there is a TRIC (TrunkedRadio Interface Card) failure, a FAULT condition maybe indicated on the key as illustrated below:

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.15_Ind Call HldE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 67

6.15 Individual Call Hold

Note: The Airwave network does not support this functionality. Calls placed on hold (for Airwaveusers) will drop out after approximately 4.5 seconds.

There are three types of individual calls: normal priority, interrupt priority and MotorolaDimetra Ambient Listen.

Whilst an individual call is in progress, it is possible to put it on Hold in order to answer/makeother calls or tobroadcast on talkgroups. Up to five calls canbekept onHold byanoperator atany one time, although this may be further limited by configuration settings.

On Hold calls can be resumed by taking each call off Hold in any order.

6.15.1 Placing a Call On Hold

When an individual call is in progress, (normal priority, interrupt priority or Ambient Listen)you can place the call on Hold by touching the HOLD CALL key.

When a call is placed on Hold, the in-progress call becomes suspended and the entry in theActiveCall details field is removed. Anentry for the call is then placed in the Individual Call listin the ‘On Hold’ colour and format. Each type of individual call (normal priority, interruptpriority or Ambient Listen) has its own on Hold colour. On Hold call entries in the IndividualCall List are placed in the order of initial reception, above any unanswered calls. (This is sothat if calls are placed on and off Hold more than once, they do not become ‘shuffled’.)References to these entries in the Individual Call list are referred to as the ‘On Hold list’.On Hold entries have the following format:

HLD AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Where:

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character radio alias



The INDIV CALLS key is updated with any new calls.

Once themaximumnumber of onHold calls for an operator is reached, any further attempt bythat operator to place calls on Hold is barred until the number of On Hold calls is reduced.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.15_Ind Call Hld E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 68

6.15.2 Taking a Call Off Hold

To take a call off hold, select the required held entry in the individual calls list, then touch theTAKE CALL key.

Whenacall is takenoffHold, theentry in the IndividualCalls list is removedandappears in theActive Call details field in the format illustrated below:


Where:

S WWW is the three character field representing emergency or normal priority call

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the twelve character subscriber alias



Acallmayonly be takenoffHoldwhen thereareno individual calls in progress. If sucha call isin progress, it must be either terminated or put on Hold before taking a previous call off Hold.

If an on Hold call is terminated by the radio user, the call is deleted from the on Hold list.

Helpful HintThe following error messages are associated with the On Hold/Off Holdfunction and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• The message OPERATION DENIED -- HOLD LIMIT is dis-played when an attempt is made to place a call onHold when the number of OnHold calls is already atthe maximum permissible.

• The message INDIVIDUAL CALLS ON HOLD is gener-ated when an attempt is made to take a call off Holdwhen the operator has already an individual call, atelephone call or intercom call in progress.

• Themessage INVAILDOPERATION is generated whenan attempt ismade to place a call onHold if the facil-ity is disabled in the User Profile database file.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.16_Ind_Call_HistE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 69

6.16 Individual Call History

The history of an operator’s individual calls is displayed but does not include individual callscurrently in progress. This list is a history of individual calls taken and made by you.

6.16.1 Individual Call History List

Pressing the INDIV HIST key displays the Individual Call History list; this is a scrollablelist. The title text displayed at the top of the list is the ‘Individual Call History’ and containsa history of all the completed individual calls made by and taken by you since logon, up toa maximum of 1000 entries. If a call is completed whilst this list is displayed, e.g., if theradio subscriber hangs up the call, the list is not updated automatically. However, the listupdates to include this entry when it is next displayed.

Individual call histories are retained from local sessions when you log on remotely. Anyactivities performed whilst you are in a remote session are appended to existing histories.Histories are retained when you log off from a remote site.

Histories are cleared when you log off from the operator terminal. However, histories areretained during takeover logon.

The list is time ordered, with the most recent entry at the top. Each entry in the list has theformat:

AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Where:

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character alias of the other party (radio subscriber orremote operator) involved in the call.

S HH:MM (first occurrence reading left to right) is the start time of the call.

S HH:MM (second occurrence reading left to right) is the end time of the call.

S SSSSSSSSSSS is the other party’s status at the start of the call, derived from theircurrent ‘Availability’ status code. For a call originating from a remotely locatedoperator, or if the current ‘Availability’ status code is unknown, this field is filled with‘.’s.

The ‘Availability’ status codes and status events aremapped to textmessages according to aSystem Manager configurable database.

Incoming calls to you can be distinguished from outgoing calls by a system configurablecolour scheme.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.16_Ind_Call_Hist E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 70


List entries are selectable. A list entry is selected by touching it. Once an entry is selected,you can make use of the following keys:

S The MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio subscribercorresponding to the list entry.

S TheSUBSPROFkeydisplays theSubscriberProfile screen for the radiosubscribercorresponding to the list entry.

S The SDM key initiates the short data text entry screen initialised with the selectedradio as the addressee.

S The PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined short data message functionalityscreen. When a predefined message is selected the SDM screen is invoked withthe selected radio as the addressee and the selected predefined messagepopulating the text field.

S If available, touching the LIST INCDNT key initiates the sending of a List Incidentscommand to the Command and Control server.

Helpful HintAt system startup, i.e., when the link to the radio system is firstestablished, the status code of a radio may not be known. If this is thecase individual callsmade before a status code is establishedwill be filledwith ‘.’s.

Touching the SUBS PROFILE, MAKE CALL, NEW SDM or PREDEFSDM keys without first selecting an entry in the list displays ERROR -- NO

ITEM PRIMED in the error message box at the top of the screen.

The message NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS SUBSCRIBER is generated when anattempt is made to send a predefined SDM or an SDM message to aSubscriber whose Radio System does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.17_Indiv C’back OperationE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 71

6.17 Individual Callback Operation

Radio subscribers requesting an operator to call them back can issue a Callback Requeststatus message. These requests are held in a prioritised Callback Requests queue. Thequeue is prioritised in the followingway: urgent requests areplaced to the front of thequeue inorder of reception, followed by normal requests, also in order of reception. Each priority typehas different colour attributes. Individual callback requests in the queue can be answered inorder via the INDIVCALLBACK key, or in anyorder from thedisplayedCallbackRequest list.

An individual callback request from a radio subscriber is presented to all operators that areaffiliated to that talkgroup, i.e., have that talkgroupSelected,MonitoredorEventMonitored. Ifthe ‘Notify all callbacks’ flag is set to enabled in the User Types database file, then allindividual callback requests are presented to operators logged on as that User Typeregardless of affiliation.

6.17.1 Queuing Callback Requests

Entries in theCallbackRequests queueare held in descending order of priority, with requestsof the same priority held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first). ThemaximumCallbackRequestqueue size is 500 entries (per operator).

Requests that already exist in the queuewill have their priority upgraded or downgradedwiththe previous entry being removed from the list. If a duplicate request is received, i.e., thesame priority level, then it will be ignored and the original request is maintained in its positionin the queue.

6.17.2 Individual Callback Requests Key

The INDIV CALLBACK key is used to show and answer the head of the Callback Requestsqueue. On touching this key, you make an individual call to the requesting party and therequesting subscriber’s alias is no longer displayed in the text window of the INDIVCALLBACK key. Once the requesting radio subscriber has answered the call, you can usePTT to transmit to them as a normal individual call.

Once an individual callback has been initiated by any operator and the call has beenanswered by the requesting subscriber, the following can be observed at all operatorpositions:

S The request is removed from the IndividualCallbackRequests queueandhence theIndividual Callback Requests list

S The INDIVCALLBACK key shows the alias of the new queue head, or reverts to itsbase state if there are no further requests pending for the operator

S The INDIV CALLBACK key will show the decremented count of the number ofqueued requests, or the count is removed if thereareno further requests pending forthe operator

If the individual call fails to be established, the subscriber is busy or the subscriber does notanswer the call, the Callback Request will remain in the Callback Requests Queue and theIndividual Callback Requests List.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.17_Indiv C’back Operation E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 72

No Individual Callbacks (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

Three Individual Callbacks (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

The INDIV CALLBACK request key below shows that the subscriber with the alias of‘Df10008’ is at theheadof theCallbackRequests queuewitha total of three requestsqueued.

If further requests arrive, the key indicates this by a changeof thenumber of queued calls. If arequest of higher priority than the head of the queue is received, the new queue head isindicated on the key.

6.17.3 Restrictions Accepting an Individual Callback

If you attempt to respond to a callback request whist having:

S An open Connect Group, the attempt is rejected.

S A radio or talkgroup selected, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically deselects the talkgroupor radio provided theoperator profile is not setfor ‘Radio Priority’, otherwise the attempt is rejected.

S An telephone call in progress, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically places the telephone call on hold.

S An individual call in progress, the attempt is successful after the systemautomatically places the individual call on hold provided ‘auto hold’ is enabled,otherwise the attempt is rejected.

S An Intercom call, the attempt is successful after the system automatically cancelsyou from the intercom call.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.17_Indiv C’back OperationE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 73

6.17.4 Individual Callback List

To allow callbacks to be serviced out of order, it is possible to display the list of unservicedcallbacks in the GWA (General Work Area) of the screen by use of the CALL BACK key.

The Tetra Callback list shows the order in which the callback requests are queued, with eachline representing a single request and the colour indicating its priority. (The priority of acallback request is encoded in the callback status code).

Each line has the following format:


Where:

S TTT is the three character talkgroup identifier

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 letter subscriber alias



If numerous requests are present in a queue, the scroll bar can be used to scroll through thelist.

To takea callback request out of order, the required request canbeansweredby selecting therelevant list entry, then touching the RETURN CALL key.

When the return call is initiated the INDIVCALLS key indicates the fact (including displayingthe alias) and the request is removed from the displayed list.

6.17.5 Clearing a Callback Request

To remove a callback request from the queuewithout answering it, select the desired entry inthe Tetra Callback list, then touch the CLEAR CALLBK key. The request is removed at alloperator positions.

6.17.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback

Once added to the queue, callback requests remain in the queue until they are manuallycleared without replying, until a successful call has been established to the requestingsubscriber or theyare ‘agedout’ (if configured) by the system, i.e.,where the callback requestis automatically cleared from the queue after a time preconfigured by the System Manager.

6.17.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance

Since callback requests are non--directed events from the Tetra radio system they may bereceived at more than one site for multi--site systems. In order to ensure that the callbackrequest is only responded to once, a callback acceptance at one site can be notified to allother connected remote access sites (resulting in the callback request being automaticallycleared from the queues at those other sites). This is typically a Sungard Engineer (SystemManager configurable on some systems) configurable option and is dependent on thesystems being configured to have ‘Messaging Sessions’ established between them.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.17_Indiv C’back Operation E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 74

Note: The notification to all other connected remote access sites will only occur after a successfulcall has been established to the subscriber or when the callback request has been clearedusing the CLEAR CALLBK key from the Individual Callback Requests List.

6.17.8 Callback Alarm

An audible alarm is generated when a callback enters the callback queue. Different alarmtones can be defined to differentiate between Urgent and Normal callback requests. Bothalarms can be configured by the SystemManager to be enabled or disabled for each specificUser Type.

Helpful Hint

The following error reports are associated with the Callback Requestfunction and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• The message INVALID OPERATION isdisplayed after an attempt is made to return a call-back request if you already have an open connectgroup, an individual call in progress and Auto Hold’is disabled or has a selected talkgroup or radio andthe User’s Profile is set for ‘Radio Priority’.

• Themessage INDIVIDUAL CALL CAPACITY REACHED isdisplayed when an attempt is made to return a call-back request if there arenoavailableCCIports. Thecallback request remains in the queue.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.18_Grp C’back OperationE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 75

6.18 Group Callback Operation

Radio subscribers requesting an operator to join their talkgroup can issue a Group Callbackrequest status message. These requests are held in a prioritised Group Callback requestsqueue. Thequeue is prioritised in the followingway: urgent requests are placed to the front ofthe queue in order of reception, followed by normal requests, also in order of reception. Eachpriority type has different colour attributes. Group Callback requests in the queue can beanswered in order via theGROUPCALLBACK key, or in any order from the GroupCallbacklist when displayed.

Group Callback requests are presented to all operators that are affiliated to the requestingsubscribers talkgroup ie have that talkgroup Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored. If the‘Notify of all callbacks’ flag is set to enabled in the User Types database file, then all groupcallback requests are presented to operators logged on as that User Type regardless ofaffiliation.

6.18.1 Queuing Callback Requests

Entries in theGroup Callback queue are held in descending order of priority, with requests ofthe same priority held in order of arrival (i.e., oldest first). The maximum Group Callbackqueue size is 500 entries (per operator).

Requests that already exist in the queuewill have their priority upgraded or downgradedwiththe previous entry being removed from the list. If a duplicate request is received i.e., of thesame priority level, then it is ignored and the original request is maintained as is its position inthe queue.

6.18.2 Group Callback Requests Key

TheGROUP CALLBACK key is used to show, and answer the head of the Group Callbackqueue. On touching this key, the affiliated subscriber’s talkgroup becomes automaticallySelected and the page that the talkgroup is on is automatically displayed. The group callbackrequest entry is then removed from the queue.

Any talkgroups that were previously Selected or Monitored automatically change to eithertheir Event Monitored or Monitored state, depending on how the ‘TGRP Base State’ factoryconfigurable option is set.

Any Selected radios automatically revert to the Monitored state.

Once an operator has initiated a group callback reply, the following can be observed at alloperator positions:

S The request is removed from the Group Callback queue and hence the GroupCallback list.

S TheGROUPCALLBACK key shows the alias of the new queue head, or reverts toits base state if there are no further requests pending for the operator.

S The GROUP CALLBACK key shows the decremented count of the number ofqueued requests, or the count is removed if thereareno further requests pending forthe operator.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.18_Grp C’back Operation E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 76

No Group Callback (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

One Group Callback (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

TheGROUPCALLBACK key below shows the three character mnemonic talkgroup alias --‘003’, which the requesting subscriber is affiliated to, and the alias of the subscriber --‘Df10009’. This request is at the head of the Group Callback Requests queue with a total ofone request queued.

If further requests arrive, the key indicates this by a changeof thenumber of queued calls. If arequest of higher priority than the head of the queue is received, the subscriber details of thenew queue head is displayed in the window of the key.

On successfully accepting aGroupCallback request the radio page containing the talkgroupis automatically displayed with the talkgroup automatically set to Selected. Any talkgroupsthatwerepreviouslySelectedorMonitored return toeitherEvent--Monitoredor theMonitoredstate depending on how the ‘TGRP Base State’ factory configurable option is set. Anypreviously Selected radios are returned to the Monitored state.

6.18.3 Restrictions Accepting Group Callback

Anattempt to respond to aGroup callback request is rejected if you have any of the following:

S An individual call in progress

S A telephone call in progress

S An intercom call in progress

The following are restricted if the subscriber’s affiliated talkgroup is in any of the following:

S A closed Connect Group

S An open Connect Group

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.18_Grp C’back OperationE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 77

6.18.4 Group Callback List

To allow group callbacks to be taken out of order, it is possible to display the list of unservicedgroup callback requests in theGWA(GeneralWorkArea) byuseof theGRPCALLBK list keytypically found via the LISTS tab.

TheGroupCallbackRequests list shows theorder inwhich thecallback requestsarequeued,with each line representing a single request and the colour indicating its priority (the priority ofa callback request is encoded in the callback status code). Each entry line has the followingformat:


Where:


S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 letter subscriber alias



If numerous requests are present in a queue, the scroll bar can be used to scroll through thelist.

To take a callback request out of order, the desired request can be answered by selecting therelevant list entry, then touching the CALL TALKGR key.

Whena response to thegroupcallback request is initiatedby you, the requestingsubscriber’saffiliated TALKGROUP key automatically becomes Selected displaying the requestingsubscriber’s alias. The request is automatically cleared from thedisplayed list at all positions.

6.18.5 Clearing a Callback Request

To remove a callback request from the queue without answering it, select the entry in theGroup Callback list, then touch the CLEAR CALLBK key. The request is removed at alloperator positions.

6.18.6 Automatic Clearing of Callback

Once added to the queue, callback requests either remain in the queue until they aremanually accepted or cleared, or they may be ‘aged out’ (if configured) by the system, i.e.,where thecallback request is automatically cleared from thequeueafter a timepreconfiguredby the System Manager.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.18_Grp C’back Operation E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 78

6.18.7 Intersite Notification of Callback Acceptance

Since callback requests are non--directed events from the Tetra radio system they may bereceived at more than one site for multi--site systems. In order to ensure that the callbackrequest is only responded to once, a callback acceptance at one site can be notified to allother connected remote access sites (resulting in the callback being automatically clearedfrom the queues at those other sites). This is a Sungard Engineer configurable option and isdependent on the systems being configured to have ‘Messaging Sessions’ establishedbetween them.

6.18.8 Callback Alarm

An audible alarm is generated when a callback enters the Group callback queue. Differentalarm tones can be defined to differentiate between Urgent and Normal Group callbackrequests. Both alarms can be configured by the SystemManager to be enabled or disabledfor each specific user type.

Helpful HintThe following error reports are associated with the Group Callbackrequest function and may be displayed in the message area at the top ofthe screen:

• The message INVALID OPERATION isdisplayed after an attempt is made to return agroup callback request and you already have anindividual call, a telephone call or an intercomcall in progress.

• Themessage TGMONFAIL -- CAPACITYREACHED isdisplayed after an attempt is made to return agroup callback request when the system isunable toallocateaCCIport. Thegroupcallbackrequest remains in the queue.

• The message TALKGROUP IN CONNECT GROUP isdisplayed when an attempt is made to return agroup callback requestwhen the talkgroup is in aconnect group.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.19_Emerg CallsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 79

6.19 Emergency Calls

Before a radio user can make an emergency call, the radio must first issue an emergencystatus report. Emergency status reports are initiated by the radio user putting the radio intoemergency mode.

Emergency status reports from radio subscribers on a particular talkgroup are presented toall operators that have the ‘Notify of all emergencies’ flag set in the User Types database.They are also presented to operators that do not have the flag set, but are affiliated to thattalkgroup (i.e., have that talkgroup selected, monitored or event monitored). However,operators that are not affiliated to the talkgroup can neither acknowledge nor clear theemergency alarm until they monitor or select the talkgroup.

Emergency status reports can be presented to operators even if the subscriber is unknown(not currently in the TETRA Gateway subscriber database). In this case the emergencyalarm is acknowledged and cleared by any operator who has the talkgroup monitored orselected as normal.

Emergency status reports are presented to operators that have the ”Notify of allemergencies” flag set in the User Types database even if the talkgroup to which thesubscriber is currently affiliated is unknown (not defined in the Tetra Gateway database). Inthis case it is possible for operators who have the ‘Access unknown emergencies’ flag set intheUserTypesdatabase to acknowledgeandclear theemergencyalarm internallywithin theDS2000 system without being affiliated to the talkgroup.

6.19.1 Emergency Alarms

Emergency status reports (emergency alarms) from radio subscribers are held in a queue inorder of arrival. Status reports in the queue can be acknowledged in either of two ways: inorder of arrival by touching the EMERGENCY key, or in any order from the Tetra EmergencyCalls list.

All outstanding emergency alarms in the system, whether they be acknowledged orunacknowledged, are held centrally within the system such that as you perform a logon ortake--over logon, the list of outstanding alarms relevant to you may be retrieved.

Whenyouhave receivednotificationof anemergency status report, theborder of the relevantTALKGROUP key takes on the unacknowledged emergency report colour as illustratedbelow. The Emergency Alarm tones will sound until you or another operator acknowledgesthe alarm. If the Talkgroup key is hidden on another page and is in the Monitored state, theMORE RADIO key changes colour state and flashes (System Manager configurable).

No Emergency (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

Two Emergencies (displayed in minimised Radio queue)

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.19_Emerg Calls E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 80

Two Emergencies (displayed on Emergency key)

If the Mobile Resource Screen is being displayed, the emergency will be indicated on theappropriate Mobile List entry by an ”EMG” legend. If the emergency has been raised by aResource Group member then the ‘‘EMG” legend will be shown on the Mobile List entry forthe Resource Group.

Whenever you receive notification of an emergency status report, the message area at thetop of the screen indicates the following message:

Emergency from AAAAAAAAAAAA Tg TTT

Where


S TTT is the talkgroup identifier of the subscriber

This emergency status report can be inhibited on a system wide basis by the SystemManager if required.

If the system receives an emergency status report from a subscriber who does not currentlyexist in the subscriber database, but who is affiliated to a known talkgroup, then the alias willbe defined as one of the following:

1) If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Aliasfunctionality the alias will be ‘UNK aaaaaaaa’, where ‘aaaaaaaa’ is up to eightalphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the SubscriberISSI belongs.

2) Otherwise the alias will be as ‘UNKxxxxxxxxx’, where ‘xxxxxxxxx’ is the last ninedigits of the Subscriber’s ISSI.

The subscriber is automatically added to thedatabaseand the alias canbeupdated using theAlias Update facility.

If the system receives an emergency status report from a subscriber who does exist in thesubscriber databasebutwho is affiliated to an ‘unknown’ talkgroup, the alias displayedwill bethat defined in the subscriber database but the talkgroup identifier will be set to ‘***’. Such anemergency status report is only displayed to certain users (System Managers configurableoption), and it is possible for certain users to acknowledge and clear the emergency withouthaving the associated talkgroup Monitored.

If the system receives an emergency status report fromasubscriberwhodoes not exist in thesubscriber database and who is affiliated to an ‘unknown’ talkgroup, the alias will be definedas one of the following:

1) If the organisation has elected to use the Force Identifier in Unknown Aliasfunctionality the alias will be ‘UNK aaaaaaaa’, where ‘aaaaaaaa’ is up to eightalphanumeric characters representing the organisation to which the SubscriberISSI belongs.

2) Otherwise the alias will be ‘UNKxxxxxxxxx’, where ‘xxxxxxxxx’ is the last nine digitsof the Subscriber’s ISSI.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 81

The Talkgroup identifier will be set to ‘***”. Such an emergency status report is displayed tocertain users (System Managers configurable option), and it is possible for certain users toAcknowledge and Clear the emergency without having the associated talkgroup Monitored.

6.19.2 Emergency Key

The EMERGENCY key is only displayed in the Integrated Call Queue area whilst there areunacknowledged emergency status reports pending. The key displays the alias of the oldestunacknowledged emergency status report as well as the count of unacknowledgedemergency status reports.

Note: WhenanEmergency is acknowledged, the screenaction following is dependent on howyoursystem has been configured. This can be as follows or as described in Section 6.19.8.

When the EMERGENCY key is touched, it does not answer a call, but it acknowledges thealarm to the radio system and removes the alarm from the queue. If you are not affiliated tothe talkgroup but have received the alarm indication, when theEMERGENCY key is touchedyou are informed that the operation was rejected. If however you have Emergency AlarmFlushing privileges the rejection may be overriden (see Section 6.19.6). The TetraEmergency Calls list is automatically displayed to you as you are the acknowledgingoperator. The radio system indicates to all operators aware of the emergency that you haverecognised the status report and have acknowledged the event.

If there are further outstanding emergency alarms, theEMERGENCY key is updatedwith thealias of the oldest unacknowledged status report and the count on the key is decremented.

If there are no further outstanding emergency statuses on that talkgroup, the TALKGROUPkey border (or the MORE RADIO key if the talkgroup is hidden) assumes the colour of the‘Acknowledged’ emergency status until the emergency is cleared.

If there are no further outstanding emergency statuses on any affiliated talkgroup, theEMERGENCY key is removed.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 82

6.19.3 Emergency Calls List

The EMERG key is used to display the list of all active emergency status reports in thesystem. The list allows emergency status reports to be acknowledged out of order,individual calls to be made, predefined SDMs to be sent and emergency status reports tobe cleared.

The list is ordered to show emergency status reports in the following order:

1) Acknowledged at this operator position

2) Unacknowledged

3) Acknowledged by another operator position

4) Acknowledged externally

Note: The order of 1 and 2 can be altered by System Manager configuration.

Each line represents a single report and is colour coded to indicatewhich category it falls into.Each category is displayed in time order, with the oldest entry first. The format of a list entry isshown below:

OPITTT AAAAAAAAAAAA HH:MM SSSSSSSSSSS

Where



S HH:MM is the time the status report was initiated

S SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character report status mnemonic

S OPI is the three character Op ID of the operator who acknowledged the emergency

If there is a large number of status reports in the queue youmay need to scroll through the list.The maximum number of entries in the Emergency Calls list is 500.

To acknowledge a status report out of order, the required status report should be selected bytouch, and then the ACK EMERG key should be touched. The status report is thenacknowledged and the list entry moves from the ‘Unacknowledged’ category to‘Acknowledged at this operator position’. The count on the EMERGENCY key isdecremented and its displayed alias updated (if the head of the queue was chosen).

When a status report is acknowledged, the list entry for the report moves from the‘Unacknowledged’ category to ‘Acknowledged at another operator position’ category at allother operator positions displaying that emergency. The count and alias on theEMERGENCY key is updated for all. The Op ID of the operator who acknowledged theemergency is displayed to other operators to inform themwhich operator acknowledged theemergency.

If a radio user initiatesanemergency status report onmore thanone talkgroup, each instanceof the alarm must be acknowledged and cleared independently.

Touching the PREDEF SDM key with an emergency primed invokes the predefined shortdata message functionality. The emergency does not need to have been acknowledged touse this function.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 83

6.19.4 Clearing Emergency Calls

All transmissions from a radio that is in Emergency mode are considered part of anemergency call.

The emergency call can be terminated by either of the following:

S The radio user taking the call out of Emergency mode

S Anoperator clearing the emergency by use of theCLREMERG key -- dependent onthe Terminal Radio that is in use (i.e., does it support this functionality)

An emergency call can only be cleared after it has been acknowledged. To clear a call,prime the entry in the list to be cleared by touching it, then touch the CLR EMERG key.

If an emergency call has been cleared by the radio user (by clearing the Emergency mode)without the initial emergency status report having been acknowledged by an operator, thestatus report is still queued and displayed, and requires operator acknowledgement.

When an emergency has been acknowledged and cleared, the emergency indicationdisappears from the Emergency Calls list on all operators’ screens.

If an emergency alarm has been acknowledged and cleared, but the radio user has notcleared the emergency, a fresh emergency alarm is generated if a new call is received fromthat radio.

If you acknowledge an emergency call and log off with the emergency call still active, the callis only reassigned to an operator logging on to the same workstation. However, any otheroperator affiliated to the Talkgroup would still be able to accept the emergency call.

Note: Once an operator acknowledges an emergency, then only they are able to clear theemergency, unless the ‘clear any emergency’ privilege has been granted in the User Typedatabase. In this case, any operator with this privilege is able to clear another operator’sacknowledged emergency.

6.19.5 External Acknowledgement

An emergency can be acknowledged by an external source, e.g., an operator in anothercontrol room. If the emergency is acknowleged externally the three character Op ID displays‘EXT’ on the correponding entry in the list at all DS2000 operator positions.

If anemergency is clearedexternally, theemergency is not clearedon the list. It is possible forany DS2000 operator to clear such an acknowledged emergency.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 84

6.19.6 Emergency Alarm Flushing

If you do not have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and you attempt toacknowledge an emergency alarm or clear an acknowledged emergency alarm, the actionfails andamessage is displayedalerting you that theactionwasunsuccessful. It is effectivelywarning you that the talkgroup should be Monitored or Selected for this operation.

If you have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and attempt to acknowledge anemergency alarm, an AcknowledgedEmergency Alarm dialogue box is displayed promptingyou to confirm or cancel the action.

Touching the CONFIRM key acknowledges the emergency alarm. It is the responsibility oftheuser toensure that flushing thealarm in thismanner is thecorrectmethod to beemployed.This operation is logged and a system fault message is generated indicating that theAcknowledge operation has been performed.

ALARM FLUSH ACK TG YYY BY OP ZZZ

Where:

S YYY is the three character talkgroup ID or designated mnemonic

S ZZZ is the three character operator number

Touching the CANCEL key aborts the operation.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 85

If you have the privilege to force emergency alarm clearance and attempt to clear anemergency alarm, aClear EmergencyAlarm dialogue box is displayed asking you to confirmor cancel the action.

Touching theCONFIRM key clears the emergency alarm. It is the responsibility of the user toensure that flushing the alarm in this manner is the correct method to be employed. Thisoperation is logged and a system fault message is generated indicating that the Clearoperation has been performed.

ALARM FLUSH CLR TG YYY BY OP ZZZ

Where:

S YYY is the three character talkgroup ID or designated mnemonic

S ZZZ is the three character operator number

Touch the CANCEL key to abort the operation.

6.19.7 Emergency Alarm Timeout

Once added to the queue, emergency alarms either remain on the queue until they aremanually acknowledged and cleared, or theymay be ‘aged out‘ (if configured) by the system,i.e., where the emergency alarm is automatically acknowledged and cleared from the queueafter a set time, preconfigured by the System Manager.

Note: Only unacknowledged emergencies and emergencies acknowledged externally are ‘‘agedout”.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 86

6.19.8 Auto Select on Emergency Acknowledgement

If the system is configured to ‘Auto Select on Emergency Ack’ when you acknowledge anemergency alarm, in accordance with the standard audio priority rules the followingsequence of events happens automatically at the operator position:

S The talkgroup with the alarm is Selected

S The emergency is acknowledged

S The radio page containing theSelected talkgroupwith the alarm, is displayed to you

The table below describes what happens to all the remaining Monitored or Selected radiosand talkgroups once the above sequence has been successful, depending onwhat the ‘AutoSelect on Emergency Ack’ database value is configured to:

Database Value MonitoredTalkgroup

SelectedTalkgroup

MonitoredRadio

SelectedRadio

D Functionality Disabled

E EventMonitored

EventMonitored

Pre--selected Pre--selected

M RemainMonitored

Monitored RemainMonitored

Monitored

If a talkgroup cannot be Selected, but can be Monitored, then the emergency is stillacknowledged and the radio page containing the monitored talkgroup with the alarm isdisplayed to you.

If the talkgroup cannot be Monitored by you, e.g., due to a lack of CCI ports, then thefunctionality described in the Section Emergency Alarm Flushing applies.

Note: The system operation corresponds to the relevant table entries above. The Factory Defaultconfigures the system to operate in either the E or M database value setting.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 87

Helpful HintThe following error report messages are associated with the Emergencyfunction and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• The messageCALL NOT CLEARED -- UNACKED EMERGENCY

is displayed when an attempt is made to clear anemergency call that has not been acknowledged.

• The messageMONITOR TALKGROUP BEFORE ACK OR CLR

is displayed when an attempt is made toacknowledge or clear an emergency call withouthaving the associated talkgroup monitored orselected.

• The messageNOT ACKED BY THIS OP

is displayed when an attempt is made to clear anemergency that has beenacknowledgedbyanotheroperator, if the operator does not have the ‘clear anyemergency’ privilege granted.

• The messageERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED

is displayed when an attempt is made to initiate thePredefined SDM functionality with no entry primed.

• The messageNOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS SUBSCRIBER

is displayed when an attempt is made to send aPredefined SDM or SDM message to a subscriberwhose radio does not support SDM functionality.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.20_Short_Data_Functs E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 88

6.20 Short Data Message Functions

You canmake use of the Status and Short Data services offered by Airwave and perform thefollowing functions:

Outbound Data Messages

• Select the destination of the message to be sent

• Enter text to be contained within the message

• Define options for message acknowledgements

• Send the current message

• Select a previously sent short data message from a list

• Display the delivery status of previously transmitted messages

Inbound Data Messages

• View a received message

• Delete a received message when it has been read

• Display a list of received messages

• View historical messages

All messages are currently sent as SDS Type 4 short text messages.

You cannot leave the Main screen if you have any unread messages in the Received Listunless you have the privilege to do so. If an attempt is made to leave the Main screen whenthere are unread messages the following screen is invoked:

If you have the privilege rights to leave the Main screen the following screen is invoked:

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.20_Short_Data_FunctsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 89

6.20.1 Accessing SDM Functions

Note: A blank SDM screen is displayed, either when you first log on and select the SDM Keyfollowed by NEW SDM or when you carry out an initial Sub Search, select a radio terminalfrom the search results, and then select theNEWSDM key. Once anSDMhas been sent theblank SDM screen will not be displayed again; as the text from the previous SDM remainspopulated within the text field.

There are three keys that can be used to enter the SDM functions.

SDM Key

Touch the SDM key when it is in its normal state, and the Received Message list isinvoked.The illustrationbelowshows the twostates theSDM key canbe in. Anenvelope iconis displayed on the key to indicate that a new message has been received. The icon isremoved when all unread messages have been read.

NEW SDM Key

The NEW SDM key can typically be found by invoking other screens, e.g.,Talkgroup List, Subscriber Profile screen (some systems have this keypermanently displayed).

Touching the NEW SDM key invokes the New SDM Message screen.

SDM HIST Key

The SDM HIST key can be accessed from the Talkgroup Subscriber List orthe Subscriber Profile screen. Touch this key to invoke the SDM Historyscreen.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 90

6.20.2 Sending a Short Message

Note: When viewing theSDMscreen, touching a keywith a keyboard on it invokes either a numericor alphanumeric keyboard.

Selecting a Destination from a List

A short data message can be directed to an individual radio subscriber or a Talkgroup.

The destination address of a short message can be selected from a list, e.g., the TalkgroupSubscriber List. The subscriber is selected by touching the relevant entry in the list. TheNEWSDM key associated with the list is then touched to take the operator to the Short DataMessage screen. The destination address is already completed in this screen. The addresstype is automatically selected using this method.

Thescreen illustratedbelow is displayed if theNEWSDMkey is touched froma list containingindividual radio users, e.g., the Talkgroup Subscriber List. The ALIAS tab will be active andthe alias destination address is completed in the ‘Alias’ field.

The screen illustrated below is displayed when the NEW SDM key is touched from a listcontaining talkgroups, e.g., the Talkgroup list. The TGRP tab is active and the talkgroupdestination address is completed in the Talkgroup field.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 91

Note: Message delivery acknowledgements are not allowed for text messages addressed totalkgroups (see Message Acknowledgements).

Lists that have a NEW SDM key option are: Talkgroup List, Subscriber list, Call Events list,Status Codes list and Individual Call History list.

Selecting a Destination by Other Methods

An alternative method of selecting a destination is to open the Short Data Message screendirectly, by pressing the general NEW SDM key on the lower row of function keys (notavailable on all systems).

This takes the user to theShortDataMessage screenwith theALIAS tab active and theAliasdestination field empty.

You can choose to enter the alias manually or browse from a list of alias addresses bytouching the BROWSE key. Alternatively, you can select any of the ISSI or TGRP tabs toenter an alternative type of destination address.

Entering an Address Manually

If you type an address directly without using the BROWSE key, the address you enter isautomatically checked for validity when you attempt to send themessage. If the check fails,the message INVALID SDM ADDRESS is displayed in the message bar and the SubscriberSearch screen is automatically invoked. If the address is in any way ambiguous, theSubscriber Search screen is automatically invoked listing possible destination addresses.

Browsing for an Address

If you touch theBROWSE key, a newscreen is displayed. This allowsyou tobrowse forAlias,ISSI or Talkgroup. On exiting the Subscriber Search screen or Talkgroup Selection screen,the destination address field on the Short Data Message screen is automatically completed.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 92

Entering Message Text

Themessage to be sent is typed into the Message Text field. The message has amaximumlength, so as you type in text, a count of remaining characters is shown in the CharactersRemaining field.

Themessage text canbedeletedby touching theCLEAR key. Whenanewoperator logs on,the text is cleared.

Message Acknowledgements

It is possible to request confirmation of themessage being delivered to the radio terminal. Bytouching theMESSAGEACK key, theMessage Ack state can be toggled either ‘on’ or ‘off’,with a tick (on) or cross (off) icon indicating its current state.

The default state can be set in the database by the SystemManager to be ‘On’ or ‘Off’ whenoperators log on.

Message acknowledgements cannot be requested when sending a SDM to a talkgroup.

Note: Message acknowledgements are subject to the capabilities of the radio infrastructure.

Sending the Message

The message can be sent by touching the SEND key.

Note: If the address is invalid the sendoperation is deniedwith anerrormessagedisplayed, and thesearch screen is activated for you to search for the address. If the address is ambiguous,then the Subscriber Search screen is automatically invoked listing possible destinationaddresses (see Entering an Address Manually).

To abort sending a message, you can touch the main screen QUIT key.

Helpful HintMessage -- Sending ErrorsMessage sending can fail for a number of reasons. These are as follows:• Destination not reachable -- The radio may be out of coverage,switched off, or the message queue in the radio may be full.The message

is displayed in the message area and the message marked as ‘Failed’ inthe Sent message list.

• Message sending failure -- The message could not be sent due to anetwork related fault or the system has timed-out waiting for a response.The message

is displayed in the message area and the screen remains as the SDMs.

MESSAGE NOT SENT THIS TIME

MESSAGE SENDING FAILED

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 93

6.20.3 Sent Message List

The Sent Message list can be invoked by touching the SENT MSGS key. A list is displayedthat can show up to the previous 20 sent messages from this operator position. This list iscleared at log on.

Each entry in the list contains the Talkgroup, Alias or ISSI to which the message was sent. Ifthe message was addressed to a Talkgroup, then only the Talkgroup is shown.

The delivery status of the message is indicated as shown below:

If a message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with themessage field cleared, and the address of the primedmessage populating the address field.

If no message has been primed, touching the NEWSDM activates the SDM screen with themessage and address fields cleared.

The Received Message List can be viewed by touching the RECVD MSGS key.

If amessagehasbeenprimed, touching theMAKECALL key initiates an individual call to theradio subscriber whom the message was sent.

The message can be seen in further detail by priming the entry in the list, then touching theREAD SDM key. The Sent Short Data Messages screen is displayed, as shown in thefollowing illustration (Sent Message Details).

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 94

6.20.4 Sent Message Details

The screen shows the address to which the message was sent, the SDMmessage, and thedate and time the message was sent.

The delivery status of the message will be shown as one of the following:

NO STATUS: When no acknowledgement was requested

PENDING: The message is currently being sent to the address but has notyet reached its destination

DELIVERED: The message has been successfully delivered

FAILED: The message delivery has failed

The status time is the time when the delivery status was last updated.

Touch the UP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and touch theDOWN arrow to retrieve the previous message.

Touch the SEND ANTHER key to invoke the SDM page which has the address of thismessage populating the address field and the message field will be clear.

Touch the SENT MSGS or the RECVD MSGS keys to invoke their respective screens.

Touch theFRWARD key to invoke theSDMscreenwith themessage that youwant to forwarddisplayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending if required.

Touch the SENDAGAIN key to invoke the SDM edit screen. The message and the addresscan be edited before sending.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 95

6.20.5 Received Message List

The Received Message List can be selected by touching the RECVD MSGS key.

A list of Short DataMessages received from subscribers currently affiliated to talkgroups thatyou have Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored is displayed.

Note: Depending on the configuration set by the System Manager, all received messages can bedisplayed regardless of talkgroup affiliation.

This list will be empty at logon.

Youwill beprevented from loggingoff if thereareunreadmessagespresent in the list. Youwillbe presented with a dialog box asking if you wish to see the Short Data Received MessageList.

You are notified that there are waiting Short Data Messages by the state of the SDM key. Ifmessages are waiting, the key displays an Envelope icon.

Entries in the list are held in order of time received. The latestmessage is placed at the top ofthe list, and the oldest at the bottom.

If a message has been primed, touching the NEW SDM activates the SDM screen with themessage field cleared, and the address of the primedmessage populating the address field.

If no message has been primed, touching the NEWSDM activates the SDM screen with themessage and address fields cleared.

The Sent Message List can be viewed by touching the SENT MSGS key.

If amessagehasbeenprimed, touching theMAKECALL key initiates an individual call to theradio subscriber to whom the message was sent.

Messages that have been read are distinguished from those that have not been read by theircolour.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 96

The message can be read by priming the entry in the list and touching the READ SDM key.This displays the Received Message details screen.

6.20.6 Received Message Details

This screen shows the sender’s address, the time the message was received, and themessage text.

Touch theUP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and theDOWNarrow to retrieve the previous message.

Touch theREPLY key to invoke the SDM page, with the address of this message populatingthe address field; the message field will be clear.


Touch theFRWARD key to invoke theSDMscreenwith themessage that the operator wantsto forward displayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending ifrequired.

Touch the DELETE key to delete the message.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 97

6.20.7 SDM History List

The SDM History List can be selected by touching the SDM HIST key accessed from theTalkgroup Subscriber List or the Subscriber Profile screen.

A list is displayed which contains up to the last 50 Short Data Messages received from theselected subscriber. The number of SDMs returned is a system configurable option. The listcontains SDMs that have been deleted from the received SDM list as well as current SDMs.Entries in the SDM History list are displayed in time order, with the latest message receiveddisplayed at the top of the list, and the oldest message displayed at the bottom.

Touching theNEWSDM key with a message primed invokes the SDM input screen, with themessage box clear, and the address of the primed message in the address box.

Touching the NEW SDM key without a message primed invokes the SDM screen with themessage box and the address box clear.

The Sent Message List can be viewed by touching the SENT MSGS key.

The Received Message List can be viewed by touching the RECVD MSGS key.

If amessagehasbeenprimed, touching theMAKECALL key initiates an individual call to theradio subscriber from whom the message was received.

If a new SDM is received from the subscriber while the SDM History screen is displayed themessage is not added to the list.

A SDM history message can be read by priming an entry in the list and touching the READSDM key. This displays the SDM History Message details screen.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 98

Helpful HintThe following error report messages are associated with the SDMHistoryfunction and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• If the selected subscriber has no SDMs, the mess-ageNO HISTORY FOR SUBSCRIBER

is generated and an empty history list is displayed.

• If the selected subscriber is not found, themessageXXXXXX -- SUBSCRIBER NOT FOUND

is generated, where XXXXXX is the ISSI.

• If any database error is encountered, the messageSDM HISTORY DATABASE ERROR

is generated.

• If there is an error that does not fall into the abovecategories, the messageSDM HISTORY FAIL

is generated.

6.20.8 History Message Details

This screen shows the sender’s address, the time the message was received, and themessage text.

Touch the UP arrow to display the next message in the list (latest message), and touch theDOWN arrow to retrieve the previous message.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 99

Touch the REPLY key to invoke the SDM page with the address of this message populatingthe address field; the message field will be clear.


Touch theFRWARD key to invoke theSDMscreenwith themessage that youwant to forwarddisplayed in the message field. The message can be edited before sending if required.

Helpful HintWhen sending amessage, the radiomay be out of coverage, switched off,or the message queue in the radio may be full.MESSAGE NOT SENT THIS TIME is displayed in the message area and themessage in the ‘‘Sent message” list is marked as ‘‘Failed”.

A message may not be sent successfully due to a network--related fault.MESSAGE SENDING FAILED is displayed in the message area and the SDMscreen contains the data that was to be sent.

The followingerror reportmessagesareassociatedwith theSDM functionand may be displayed in the message area at the top of the screen:

• The messageNOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM

is displayed when an attempt is made to send ashort data message to a talkgroup whose radiosystem does not support SDM.


is displayed when an attempt is made to send ashort data message to a subscriber whose radiosystem does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.21_Predef SDM E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 100

6.21 Predefined Short Data Messages

The predefined SDM functionality provides the means for a user to send a short datamessage (SDM) by choosing from a predefined list of messages.

The list of predefined messages is a System Manager configurable option.

6.21.1 Accessing the Predefined SDM Function

This feature may be accessed in two ways:

S A PREDEF SDM key in the general work area (GWA) which when untouchedimmediately sends a predefined message to a previously primed subscriber ortalkgroup,

or alternatively

presents a scrollable list of predefinedmessages, fromwhich to choose amessageto send to the previously primed subscriber or talkgroup immediately.

S A PREDEF SDM key outside of the general work area which when untouchedpresents a scrollable list of predefined messages for selection. After a message ischosen you are transferred to the standard SDM composition screen.

6.21.2 PREDEF SDM key in the General Work Area

The PREDEF SDM key is available in the function key area of the following GWA screens:

• Talkgroup list

• Emergency list

• Individual History list

• Call Event list

• Talkgroup History list

• ISSI Dial Pad

Before use you are required to prime a subscriber or talkgroup as a target for the SDMmessage, using the selection method appropriate for the screen displayed in the GWA.

ThePREDEFSDM key when untouchedwill either immediately send a predefinedmessagefrom the database of predefined messages to the target (as configured in the Database), orpresent the scrollable list of predefined messages.

Each line of the list contains a short description of each message. The full text is revealedwhen the entry is used and displayed in the SDM screen. The following illustration showsinformation of the previously primed addressee displayed at the top of the list.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.21_Predef SDME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 101

If necessary scroll through the list using the scrollbar to find the requiredmessage. Touch therequired message in the list to prime it, then touch the USE TEXT key to invoke the SDMcompose screen. The SDM text box will be populated with the required message text in full.

Touch the CANCEL key to return to the previous screen.

Note: The ‘type’ field, as configured in the Predefined SDM database file for the specific key on thespecific GWA, determineswhether a specific predefinedmessage is sent immediately, or if alist is presented.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.21_Predef SDM E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 102

6.21.3 PREDEF SDM key in Main Screen Keys

If the PREDEF SDM key is available outside of the GWA it has the following behaviour.

This key invokes the scrollable list of predefined messages in the GWA. Information aboutthe previously primed target subscriber ( ISSI 10005) is displayed at the top of the GWA asshown in the following illustration.

If necessary scroll through the list using the scrollbar to find the requiredmessage. Touch therequired message in the list to prime it then, touch theUSE TEXT key to invoke the standardSDMcompose screen. TheSDM text boxwill be populatedwith the requiredmessage text infull. The operation is then the same as when using the SDM functionality.

Touch the CANCEL key to return to the previous screen.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.21_Predef SDME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 103

Helpful HintThe following error report messages are associated with the PREDEFSDM function and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• The messageERROR ON ITEM PRIMED

is displayed when an attempt is made to send ashort data message using the GWA PREDEF SDMkey, when no target has been primed.


is displayed when an attempt is made to send apredefined message to a subscriber whose radiosystem does not support SDM.

• The messageNOT AVAILABLE ON THIS RADIO SYSTEM

is displayed when an attempt is made to send apredefined message to a talkgroup whose radiosystem does not support SDM.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.22_All Mute E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 104

6.22 Mute All

Note: Availability and screen position of the MUTE ALL key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

6.22.1 Introduction

This function allows you to quickly mute all audio except that from any currently selectedresources. The system can be configured to do this either for a predetermined time or untilmanually de--muted.

6.22.2 Muting of Audio

Touching the MUTE ALL key puts all Monitored talkgroups and/or radios into themute condition. They remain in this condition for either a system defined time or (ifthe defined time is set to zero), until manually de--muted.

Whenmute is active, theMUTEALL key changescolour to indicate that there is amuteactiveand the message

AUDIO MUTED

is displayed on the message bar once the operation has been completed.

‘MUTE’ is displayed on the Talkgroup or Radio key, and the key colour changes to reflect this.

Emergency calls, and talkgroups or radios in an open or closed connect group are excludedfrom the ‘All Mute’ facility. Any emergency calls arriving from Airwave on a muted talkgroupresult in that talkgroup being de--muted automatically.

6.22.3 De--Muting

It is possible to de--mute in four ways.

Note: For all the following cases, when there are no more radios or talkgroups muted, the MUTEALL key then changes to its idle state and themessage ‘Audio Demuted’ is displayed on themessage bar.

Individually De--Muting a Radio/Talkgroup

A radio or a talkgroup can be individually de--muted by touching the muted radio/talkgroupkey. When using this method, the muted key is returns to its original audio monitored state.

De--Muting all Muted Radio/Talkgroups

After touching the activeMUTEALL key, allmuted radios and talkgroups are returned to theiraudio monitored state.

Automatic De--Mute

Once the system configured time has elapsed, all muted radios and talkgroups are returnedto their audio monitored state.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.22_All MuteE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 105

Airwave Emergency on a Muted Talkgroup

When an emergency call is presented on a muted talkgroup, that talkgroup is automaticallyde--muted and returned to its audio Monitored state.

Helpful HintThe message

is displayed (Where TTT is the three character talkgroup alias) when anunsuccessful attempt has been made to de--mute a talkgroup.

DE--MUTE FAILED ON TG TTT

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.23_Alert Tone E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 106

6.23 Alert Tone

Note: Availability and screen position of the ALERT TONE key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

6.23.1 Introduction

This function allows you to transmit an audio alert tone to a Selected talkgroup. When youpress theALERTTONE key, a tonewill sound for a period of time, predeterminedby the radiosystem configuration (not the DS2000), or until the button is released.

6.23.2 Sending An Alert Tone

Touching the ALERT TONE key sends an Alert tone to the selected talkgroup.An operator’s User Type determines which of three available tones are sent.

When you press and hold the ALERT TONE key the following actions occur:

• The ALERT TONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is active.

• The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is active.

• The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup keyMonitored or Selected are changed to indicate the terminal position of the user‘keying’ the talkgroup.

• When Alert Tone is applied to the Selected talkgroups, initially the legend ’busy’ isdisplayed on all the Selected talkgroup keys.

• When Alert Tone is granted to the Selected talkgroups, by the radio system, thelegend ’busy’ is replaced by ‘Tx’.

• The Alert Tone sounds on the Selected talkgroups while the key is pressed subjectto amaximumduration configurable on the radio system, after which the tone stops.

When the key is released:

• TheALERTTONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive.

• The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive.

• The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup keyMonitored or Selected are changed back to the Selected state indicating theterminal position of the user ‘keying’ the talkgroup has stopped.

When the key is being pressed and the tone times out:

• TheALERTTONE key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive.

• The TX key attributes are changed to indicate that Alert Tone is inactive.

• The talkgroup key legend and attributes for all other users with the talkgroup keyMonitored or Selected are changed back to the Selected state indicating theterminal position of the user ‘keying’ the talkgroup has stopped.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.23_Alert ToneE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 107

Whena talkgroup is simultaneously selected bymore than oneoperator, contention betweenthe operators is resolved in the sameway as PTT, i.e., the first operator to activate Alert Toneis routed to, and transmits on, the talkgroup. While the operator routed to the talkgroup holdsAlert Toneactive, all other operators are disabled from transmitting on the talkgroup, i.e., theyare locked out until Alert Tone is released. This feature is dependent on the radio systemallowing operators to have priority over radio users. When Alert Tone is released, if anotheroperator has the talkgroup selected and theALERT TONE key pressed, they are not routedto and therefore cannot transmit on the talkgroup. If the second operator is to successfullytransmit on the talkgroup, they have to release and reapply Alert Tone once the first user hasreleased Alert Tone.

Helpful HintThe following error report messages are associated with the ALERTTONE function andmay be displayed in themessage area at the top of thescreen:

• The messageALERT TONE ERROR -- NO TALKGROUP

is displayed when there is no talkgroup Selectedand the ALERT TONE key is pressed.

• The messageALERT TONE ERROR -- PTT ACTIVE

is displayed when PTT is active and the ALERTTONE key is pressed. This could be due to anotheroperator Txing or the the operator having thefloorswitch depressed.

• The messageALERT TONE ERROR -- OUT OF RANGE

is displayed if the Alert Tone value is out of range.(See System Manger Configurable options.)

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.24_CCI_Port_ Usage E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 108

6.24 Communication Control Interface (CCI) Port Usage

The systemmanager is able to query their local, and any remote, access connectedDS2000sites to display the current usage state of all CCI ports available to that site. This querycommand is automatically repeatedat five second intervals for as longas theCCIPortUsagepage is displayed.

TheCCIPortUsagescreen is invokedby touching theCCIUSAGE key typically found viathe SUPER tab.

The system then interrogates theMain SNP (SwitchNode Processor) at this and all otherRemote Access connected DS2000 sites. Each DS2000 site returns the number of CCIports potentially accessible by that site and the number that are currently free for usage.

If the ‘low availability’ limit has been reached at that site, then this indication is returned anddisplayed on the CCI Port Usage screen.

Each DS2000 site has a configurable ‘low availability’ threshold limit defined and if thisthreshold is exceeded the corresponding entry on the CCI Port Usage screen is displayed inthe appropriate warning colour.

CCI Port Usage Screen

When the ”CCIPortUsage” screen is displayed it shows the total number ofMode4CCIportsand the number of CCI ports currently in use for each site.

The screen is removed from view by touching the mainQUIT key. Quitting this screen stopsthe repeat query commands being issued and any returned results are ignored.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.24_CCI_Port_ UsageE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 109

6.24.1 CCI Summary Display

Each site on the list can primed. When a site is primed and the summary key is touched, theCCI Port Summary Display screen for that site is invoked.If a site has no usage details, but the site name is displayed, then the list entry for that sitecannot be primed.

6.24.2 CCI Port Calculation

Because DS2000 sites can be configured to utilise CCI Ports at other sites, this can result inthe sum of the individual CCI Ports available being greater than the total actually in thesystem. Likewise, the Free figure reflects CCI Ports that are at this and other DS2000 sites.However, as soon as a CCI Port is reserved, the Free figure for all DS2000 sites that haveaccess to it will be updated.

6.24.3 Threshold Exceeded Warning

As CCI ports are being allocated the Tetra Gateways inform any attached DS2000 sites.The low availability threshold calculation is based on the following:

S ( Free CCI’s/Total CCI’s ) * 100

If the result is less than or equal to the ‘low availability’ threshold then a system faultmessageis generated in the following format:

LOW CCI PORTS XX where XX indicates the number of the available ports remaining at thissite.

Helpful HintIf a CCI usage request is made and a DS2000 site does not respond thedisplay still shows the site name but with ‘‘------” under the two numbertotals columns. If a site is displayed like this, you will not be able to invokethe CCI Port Summary display for that site.

If you touch the SUMM key without priming a site in the list, the message

is displayed.ERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.25_CCI_Port_ Summary E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 110

6.25 CCI Port Summary

This DS2000 function provides operators with information regarding the allocation, usage,condition and availability of Tetra CCI ports at a specified site.

Note: CCIPort summary displays for other sitesmaybesummoned from theCCIPortUsage list, bypriming the ‘site’ and touching the SUMM key.

Touch the list entry of the site you wish to see the summary of, then touch the SUMMkey. The CCI Port Summary screen for the primed site is invoked.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.25_CCI_Port_ SummaryE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 111

6.25.1 CCI Port Details

The icons shown in this manual are intended to represent the default icon set. As part of theFactory Configuration process alternative icons may be used to associate with anappropriate state to conform with a particular organisation’s request.

The display summarises theCCI port activity for the given site, and displays the site name asa heading. Each CCI port display key has the following skeleton format:

Icon ’A’ CCI Port Ref No Icon ’B’ Extra Info

Up to24CCIports are summarisedononescreen; ifmore than24ports are configured thenascroll bar may be used to access the remainder (up to 200). This will normally allow you toperceive an immediate site overview without changing pages. The display consists of amatrix of keys, each one describing a single CCI port.

Note: The background colour of the CCI port display key can be one of four combinations:

S Dark grey -- Uninitialised

S Light grey -- Available/Unknown/Unavailable

S Yellow -- Reserved

S Black -- Key primed to view details

6.25.2 Icon ‘A’

When the CCI port is in the base state (unreserved) then icon ‘A’ and the tile backgroundcolour is represented as illustrated in the following table:

Sta te D ef au lt B ackg rou nd Co lo ur D efa ult Ico n A

Un initia l ised Dark G rey

Un k no wn L ig ht G rey

A va ilab le L ig ht G rey

Reser ved fo r Perso nal Use

Y ellow

Av ailable – No R em ote A ccess Cap abili ty

D ark

Av a ilable b ut loca l T R IC f ai lur e

D ark

R ese rv ed f or Sh ared Use

Y ellow

No t Av ailable L ig ht G rey

F ailed L ig ht G rey

R ese rv ation In P rog ress L ig ht G rey

R e lease In P ro gress L ig ht G rey

See note below

See note below

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 112

Note: YELLOWCIRCLE -- This icon means the CCI Port is available (would be green circle) but atthis instant there is no or insufficient Remote Access (RA) capacity to make the port usable.Either there is noRA connection, or there is a connection but without two free telephone linesto route the audio.

Note: BLACKCIRCLE -- This iconmeans the CCI Port is available (would be green circle) but it’s alocalCCIPort and theTRIC(or it’s equivalent function in theTOIC) ismarkedashaving failed,so it’s unusable (This only applies to localCCIPorts as this site hasno knowledgeof theTRICstate at a Remote Site. A CCI Summary for a Remote Site however, would obtain the CCISummary information for that Remote Site).

6.25.3 Icon ‘B’

This icon indicates the currently configured operational mode of that CCI port.

Icon

6.25.4 Reserved for Individual Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’

Note: Thebackgroundcolour for aCCIport reserved for an individual call is as defined bySunGard.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 113

6.25.5 Reserved for Group Use Key State -- Icon ‘B’

Note: The background colour for a CCI port reserved for a group call is as defined by SunGard.

Note: Either the up--to--four--digits Talkgroup Id or the three alphanumeric character TalkgroupAlias is displayed depending on the factory configurable option.

6.25.6 Summary Area

In addition to individual CCI port information, a summary of all the ports is included within asummary area on the same display; this provides totals of ports in specific states. Thesummary area remains static when scrolling.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 114

The summary areas include the following information:

S Site Name

S Local CCI ports available

S Remote CCI ports available

S Mode 2 ports available

S Mode 4 ports available

S Mode 3/8 ports available

The illustration below shows the key for CCI port 17 has been primed and informationpertaining to this port is displayed in the ‘Details’ section of the summary area.

Details Area

When a particular CCI port key is primed, extra detail regarding the port may be providedwithin two allocated status areas on the same display. This data depends on the port modeand may consist of:

S CCI port reference

S CCI port mode

S Operator bound to port

S Role (Functional Area) tied the port

S Talkgroup tied to the port

S Migration Group tied to the port

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 115

6.25.7 Help Area

This area provides textual data on the state of the port, with a description of what both theicons mean.

Helpful HintIf you are displaying the CCI port summary for a remote site, and the linkbetween both sites is lost, the operator screen will change to the CCIUsage screen. The list shows the site name with “------” under the twonumber total columns. You are not able to invoke the CCI Port summaryuntil the link between both sites is resumed.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.26_Status Code List E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 116

6.26 Status Code List

The Status Code list displays status code updates for subscribers (radio users) that areaffiliated in talkgroupswhichareSelected,MonitoredorEventMonitoredby you. Newentriesare added to the end of the list when a subscriber changes status. The list can contain up to500 entries.

Touch the STATUS CODES key to invoke the Status List.

6.26.1 Status Code List

The Status Code list is a scrollable list with the title:

STATUS CODE LIST

The format for an entry in the list is:



S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the alias of the radio subscriber (maximum 12 characters)

S HH:MM is the time--stamp of the last status code logged for the radio subscriber

S SSSSSSSSSSSS is the subscriber’s current status, derived from their currentstatus code

The ‘Availability’ status codes are mapped to text messages according to your SystemManager configurable database.

List entries are displayed in chronological order, with the oldest status at the top of the list.Entries are only displayed for status events received subsequent to operator log on and willnot be persistent through a remote operator session log on and log off.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.26_Status Code ListE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 117


The SELECT TGRP, MAKE CALL, NEW SDM and the ACCEPT function keys are greyedout until an entry in the list is selected.

S Touching the TGRP SELECT key automatically puts the subscriber’s talkgroup tothe ‘selected’ state and the page that the talkgroup is on is automatically displayed.Any other talkgroups that were monitored or selected are returned to their basestate. Any ‘selected’ radio are automatically changed to the audio monitored state.

S Touching the MAKE CALL key initiates an individual call to the radio user.

S Touching theNEWSDM key initiates the short data text entry screenwith the detailsof the selected radio subscriber as the addressee.

S Touching the PREDEF SDM key initiates the predefined SDM functionality screenwith the details of the selected radio subscriber displayed.

S Touching theACCEPT key accepts the status code by removing it from the list. Anaudit log entry is created to indicate that you have accepted the status code. Thisaction removes the status code from your screen.

6.26.3 Refresh List

The status code list contains the list of the current status of subscribers in talkgroups that youhave Selected, Monitored or Event Monitored. New Subscriber Statuses are added to theend of the list. If a new status code arrives for a subscriber which is already in the list then thecurrent status will be removed and the new one will be added at the end of the list.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.27_Mobile Resource E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 118

6.27 Mobile Resource


TheMobile Resource screen displays a scrollable list of all of the resource groups which arecurrently affiliated to any of the Event Monitored, Monitored or Selected talkgroups includedin the currently selected functional area. Resource groups will be displayed if the primary orany of the secondaries are currently affiliated to any of these talkgroups.

The concept of Radio Resource Groups is based around radios available within a vehicle(Ambulance) and its crew. All these radios are grouped together to form a Radio ResourceGroup. (Radio Resource Group see section 6.28).

From the Mobile Resource screen it is possible to:

S Initiate simultaneous point--to--point calls to the members of the resource group,

or

S Initiate a single point--to--point calls to one member of the resource group

S Invoke the ‘Resource Group Configuration’ screen

6.27.1 List Entries

Each list entry is shown in the following format:

TTT AAAAAAAAAAAA SSSSSSSSSSS HH:MM EMG

Where:

S TTT is the 3 character talkgroup Alias

Note: The list entrymaybedisplayedasa result of oneof the secondarymembers beingaffiliated toa required talkgroup, the talkgroup Alias of the primary member will display as follows:

S TTT -- the talkgroup Alias may be that of a talkgroup which you are not currentlyusing or do not have access to.

S *** -- the talkgroup Alias may indicate that the primary member is in an ‘unknown’talkgroup

S ....-- the talkgroup Aliasmay indicate that the primarymember is deaffiliated (turnedoff).

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is the 12 character resource group

S SSSSSSSSSSS is the 11 character status code

S HH:MM is the timestamp of the last status code logged by any subscriber in theresource group

S EMG is displayed when a resource group member has an active emergency

The colour for each entry is defined by the status code for the resource entry.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.27_Mobile ResourceE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 119

6.27.2 Display Types

There are two different types of screen displays as follows:

6.27.2.1 Multi Column List

Area Selection Key Sort Selection Key

Event Refresh Key

The above list contains three columns of resources.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 120

6.27.2.2 Single Column List

Event Refresh Key

6.27.3 Dropdown Menus

The Mobile Resource Screen has a number of dropdown menus to navigate the screen.These dropdown menus work by touching the menu key. A dropdown menu then appearsshowing a list of items. You may then select the relevant option by either:

S Sliding to the item you wish to select and then un--touching,

or

S Un--touching the screen (whichwill leave themenu in place) and then touch the itemyou wish to select

Each dropdown menu has a Cancel option that, when selected, causes the dropdown list todisappear with no further action being made.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 121

6.27.3.1 Functional Area Dropdown Menu

By touching the AREA selection key, a drop down list is invoked as shown below.

AREA selection key Indicates the currently selected area

The functional areas available in the list are all the functional areas selected by you at logon,or changed during area set up.If o ne of these functional areas is selected, then your terminalposition retrieves all resource groups for all talkgroupsavailable on that functional area. Onlyone functional areamay be selected at a timewith the previous selection being automaticallydeselected.

If the ALL -- TALKGROUPS option is selected, then your terminal position will retrieve theresource groups for all the event monitored, monitored or selected talkgroups available onyour operator position. When this option is selected, the selected functional area will beautomatically deselected.

When the CANCEL option is selected, the drop down list disappears and the resource listremains unchanged.

6.27.3.2 List Ordering Dropdown Menu

The Sort Menu dropdown shows the current sort order.

SORT selection key

Indicates the currently selected option

Shown to indicate Descending order

Shown to indicate Ascending order

or

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 122

The list can be sorted in Ascending or Descending order for the following:

S Talkgroup -- ordered on the alphanumeric Talkgroup Alias

S Alias -- when this option is selected the sorting that takes placewill be determinedbytheAliasSortOption in theMobileResourceData configuration file configuredby thesystem manager. The configuration options are as follows:

1. Option 0 = Normal Sorting: the mobile resource list will be sorted in ascendingalpha numeric order

2. Option 1 = the mobile resource list will be sorted

Ascending is normal

Descending is numeric aliases placed first.


Ascending is numeric aliases placed last

Descending is normal.


Ascending is numeric aliases placed last

Descending is numeric aliases placed first.

S Status -- each status code is assigned a priority number, and the status code list isordered according to that priority

S Time

The descriptive title for each sort option can be changed as a factory configurable option.

When a sort order item is first selected, the mobile resource list will be sorted in ascendingorder by default for that option. If that option is selected again then the list is re--sorted indescending order for that option. An icon is placed next to the sort item to indicate the currentsort view.

A Cancel option is provided. When this is selected the drop down list disappears and theresource list remains unchanged.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 123

6.27.3.3 Resource Key

The resource list key can operate in threeways depending on how the key is touched and theconfiguration of factory settings:

a) If you instantaneouslyun--touch the resourcekey, thensimultaneouspoint--to--pointcalls are made to the members of the resource group. (Factory seting to -- ‘Call’)

b) If you hold down the resource key, then after a configurable time a subscriber dropdown menu appears as shown below. (Factory setting to -- ‘Menu’)

The heading text of the menu will be either:

S The Alias and ISSI of the resource group primary

S The Alias and ISSI of the radio (when not a member of a resource group)

The menu options are:

S Initiate a single point--to--point call to either the radio (if not a resource group) or theprimary member of the resource group

S Display the Subscriber Profile for the ISSI

S Display the Alias Update page of the Subscriber Profile

c) If you hold down the resource key, after a configurable time a drop down menuappears as shown below:

Menu options are:

S Configuration -- configure the resource group, as described in the Radio ResourceGroup section of this manual (see section 6.28).’Configuration -- New’ is displayed if the resource selected is not a member of a

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 124

group.’Configuration -- Update’ is displayed when the resource selected is a member of agroup.

S Resource Member Alias -- initiate a single point--to--point call to any member of theresource group.

S Cancel option is provided. When this is selected the drop down list disappears withno further action performed.

Theoptions available in themenuare configurable by theSystemManager via theUser Typedatabase file.

6.27.3.4 List Updates

The list is updated when the following updates are received:

S Talkgroup Events -- Affiliation, Reaffiliation, de--affiliation

S Alias updates

S Status Code Updates

S Emergencies

S Resource Group updates

When these updates are received, the resource affected by the update is dynamicallychanged to indicate the new update.

If the dynamic update means that the resource’s position in the list would change, e.g., astatus code update when the list is ordered on status code, then the following happens:

1. The Event Refresh key alerts you that the resource list needs to be refreshed toshow the new update.

2. After a configurable time the list is automatically refreshed, or you can touch theEvent Refresh key to manually refresh the list.

Refresh Key

Helpful Hintthe maximum number of items in the Mobile resource list is 1000.

The message

is displayed when the amount of resource groups returned is more than1000.

TOO MANY RESOURCE GROUPS TO DISPLAY

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.28_Radio Resource GroupE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 125

6.28 Radio Resource Group


The concept of Radio Resource Groups is based around a Primary radio resource (e.g.,vehicle) with its associated Secondary radio resources (e.g., hand portables). This sectiondetails how Radio Resources can be created, modified and deleted.

Certain incoming events such as Status Code updates andGroup Calls are deemed to havecome from the Resource Group and are presented to you as though they originated from thePrimary resource. Other incomingevents suchas IndividualCallbacksorEmergencyAlarmsare presented from the originating resource whether it be Primary or Secondary.

Likewise, certainother requests you require tomakesuchasan IndividualCall are targetedata Resource Group as a whole with both the Primary and Secondary resources beingcontacted simultaneously, the communication being established with whichever member ofthe Group responds first.

RESOURCE GROUP

Primary Resource Secondary Resources

6.28.1 Introduction

Depending on system configuration and your privileges you may have access to a RadioResource Group configuration screen which will give you the ability to create, modify themembership of, or delete ResourceGroups. If you are not privileged to edit themembershipof ResourceGroups youmay use the configuration screen to update the aliases of theGroupmembers.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.28_Radio Resource Group E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 126

6.28.2 Resource Group Edit

The Radio Resource Group configuration screen is displayed when you request theResource Group details for a Subscriber. If the Subscriber is already part of a ResourceGroup, be it as the Primary or as one of the Secondary resources, the screen is treated as‘‘Modify/Delete’’. If the selected Subscriber has no existing association with a ResourceGroup then the screen is treated as ‘‘Create”.

The following screen is invoked when creating a new Resource Group:

Note: TheDELETE key is not available (greyed out) as the ResourceGroup has not been created.

The following screen is an example of an existing Resource Group containing threeSecondary resources:

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 127

The above screen can be divided top to bottom into three logical areas:

S Information and functions relating to the Resource (vehicle) -- Primary

S Information and functions relating to the Portables (crewmembers) -- Secondaries

S Resource Group functions applicable to the Resource Group as a whole

These areas are described in more detail as follows:

6.28.2.1 Primary Area

The first field is thedescription for theResourceGroupwhich canbeup to 50 characters long.You can type directly into this field or, where a keyboard is unavailable, use the key with thekeyboard icon to invoke the on--screen alphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry.

The second field is the Alias for the Primary Subscriber of the Resource Group which can beup to 12 characters long. You can type directly into this field or where a keyboard isunavailable, use the key with the keyboard icon to invoke the on--screen alphanumerickeypad for touch screen text entry.

Subs Prof Key

Use this key to invoke the Subscriber Profile screen for the Primary Subscriber, e.g., 10004Alias.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 128

6.28.2.2 Secondary Area

This part of the screen is a scrollable list that displays all the Secondary members of theResource Group. A group may exist with no Secondary members or any number up to amaximum of 26 (this is a factory configurable option).

If an existing Resource Group is requested that contains more Secondaries than is allowedby the configured maximum, then only that many Secondaries are displayed and themessageMAX MEMBERS REACHED -- NOT ALL SHOWN

is displayed. The ADD key is also be disabled (greyed out) if this occurs.

Each entry in the list has the form:

AAAAAAAAAAAA [*]

Where:

S ‘*’ appears only if an update is attempted and the alias name is not valid. (See6.28.4.2).

S AAAAAAAAAAAA is theAlias of the radio subscriber and canbeup to 12 characterslong.

The position of each Secondary is significant (see Auto Alias function 6.28.3.5) and theremay be blank entries between populated entries. Blank entries will contain the text ‘‘Nth --Empty” instead of an Alias where ‘‘Nth” represents the list position number of the blank entry.

Note: By default, blank entries will not be displayed at the end of the list, except when a new blankentry is added to the end of an existing list. An example with a blank entry is given in below:

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 129

6.28.3 Secondary Area -- Function Keys

The availability of the function keys and their behaviour is dependent on the context, that is,whether an entry in the list is primed or not. In the above screen theKEYBOARD,SEARCHand SUBS PROF keys are greyed out and not available because an entry has not beenprimed (selected). When in this state, the only function keys available are ADD and AUTOALIAS.

In the following screen the second entry has been primed and the KEYBOARD, SEARCHand SUBS PROF keys have become available. The ADD key changes to become theREMOVE key.

6.28.3.1 Keyboard

This key is only available when an entry is primed. When touched it invokes the on--screenAlphanumeric keypad for touch screen text entry. This keyboard canbeused to assign anewAlias or edit an existing Alias for the selected entry.

6.28.3.2 Search

This key is only available when an entry is primed and is used to change an existingSecondary’s details. When this key is touched the subscriber search screen is displayedandyouare given the choice of searching for a subscriber to replace the primedentry or tomake ita blank entry.

The selected subscriber will be validated against currentmembers of theResourceGroup toensureaduplicate subscriber is not selected. If theselectedsubscriber is aduplicate then themessage ‘‘Subscriber Already in Group” will be displayed and the Resource Group displaywill remain unchanged.

6.28.3.3 Add

This key is only available when there is no primed entry and is used to add new Secondariesinto theResourceGroup. When this key is touched thesubscriber searchscreen is displayedand you are given the choice of searching for a subscriber to add to the list or to add a blankentry. This key is similar to the SEARCH key but adds to the list rather than modifying anexisting entry. It always adds the new entry to the end of the list.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 130

The number of Secondaries that can be added is restricted to the maximum number ofSecondaries allowed by the factory configurable option. If this maximum is reached, thenafter the last entry is added, the messageMAX MEMBERS REACHED -- NO MORE ADDS

is displayed and the ADD key becomes unavailable.

The selected subscriber will be validated against currentmembers of theResourceGroup toensureaduplicate subscriber is not selected. If the selected subscriber is a duplicate then themessage ‘‘Subscriber Already in Group” will be displayed and the Resource Group displaywill remain unchanged

6.28.3.4 Remove

This key is only available when an entry is primed and is used to remove the entry from theportable list. If the entry is not at the end of the list then a blank entry with the text ‘‘Nth --Empty” is inserted in its place instead of the Alias, where ‘‘Nth” represents the list positionnumber of the blank entry.

Note: To replace aSecondary, use theREMOVE key. This creates a blankentry. TheSEARCH keycan then be used to find a replacement if required.

6.28.3.5 Auto Alias

This is a toggle key which switches between ‘Auto Alias’ and ‘Normal’ modes for Aliasnaming. The key indicates that ‘Auto Alias’ mode has been entered via a configurable colour.The default state of the key is configurable by the System Manager

When the ‘Auto Alias’ feature is in ‘Auto’ mode, the Alias defined for the Primary resourcewillbe usedas thebasis for theAlias for all theSecondaries. TheAlias for eachSecondarywill bethe vehicle Alias plus one or two characters derived from the Resource Suffix (Configurableby System Manager ).

Note: That if the vehicle Alias is such, that adding the Suffix would create a Secondary Alias thatwould exceed 12 characters then, the vehicle Alias will be truncated before the suffix isapplied.

If the Secondaries list is already populated then the Aliases for all existing entries will bemodified. If there are no entries, then any that are subsequently added will use the ‘AutoAlias’ feature until the key is touched again to revert back to ‘Normal’ Mode.

TheResource suffix canbeanumber or character immediately following thePrimaryAlias, orwith a space or underscore inserted between.

The order of the Portables on the screen is significant. Blank entries will affect the suffix offollowing entries but won’t in themselves be allocated an Alias.

If a numeric suffix is specified then the Secondaries order will be used to specify a numericvalue starting at ‘‘1”.

If an alphabetic suffix is specified then the Secondaries order will be used to specify analphabetic character starting at ‘‘A”.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 131

Examples of the possible combinations are:

Alphabetic Alias Example -- three Secondaries

If the Primary has an alias of ”M0017” then the three Secondaries are:

S M0017A

S M0017B

S M0017C

Numeric Alias Example -- three Secondaries

If the Primary has an alias of ”M0017” then the three Secondaries are:

S M00171

S M00172

S M00173

Space first and Alphabetic Alias Example -- two non--consecutive Secondaries

If the Primary has an alias of ‘‘M0017” and only the first and third slots have Secondariesassigned then the three Secondaries are:

S M0017 A

S 2nd -- Empty

S M0017 C

Underscore first and Numeric Alias Example -- two non Consecutive Secondaries

If the Primary has an alias of ‘‘M0017” and only the first and third slots have Secondariesassigned then the three Secondaries are:

S M0017_1

S 2nd -- Empty

S M0017_3

6.28.3.6 Subs Prof

This key is only available when an entry is primed and will invoke the Subscriber Profilescreen for the primed Secondary Subscriber.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 132

6.28.4 Resource Group Functions

The following function keys are applicable to the Resource Group as a whole (Primary andSecondary) and the availability of the function keys and their behaviour is dependent on thecontext, that is, whether you are creating or updating a Resource Group.

6.28.4.1 OK

This key will either create a new Resource Group or update an existing one according to thedata specified on the screen.

The following table describes how the editable fields update when the OK key is touched.

Field Update Action

Primary (Vehicle)Alias

This is the Alias of the Primary ISSI and will be updated.

Primary (Vehicle)Description

This free text field is tied to the Resource Group (not thePrimary ISSI) and thus will be updated.

Add Secondary(Portable)

This will result in the ISSI being deemed a Secondary memberof this resource group. If prior to the update it was aSecondary member of another resource group then it will beremoved from that group.

Remove Secondary(Portable)

Removing a portable will result in that slot in the list beingempty. The affected ISSI is no longer a Secondary member ofthis Resource Group, becoming independent instead, butotherwise the ISSI’s details are unchanged. If however, theAlias for the Secondary resource is different from its defaultAlias, then it will revert to its corresponding ”Default Alias” asdefined in the Alias database.

Secondary (Portable)Alias

If the Alias has been changed then the Secondary memberISSI will have its Alias updated to the new value.

If the create or update is successful the messageCOMMAND SUCCESSFUL -- GROUP UPDATED

is displayed in the message area of your screen and you are returned to the screen thatinvoked the Resource Group screen. An audit log entry is also created.

If the update is not successful then an error message is displayed and the Resource Groupscreen remains displayed.

6.28.4.2 Updating and Alias Validation

The systemmaybe configured to prevent a subscriber fromhaving the samealias asanothersubscriber. This is achieved by resetting the ’old’ subscriber’s alias to its default alias (seeVol 2 Chapter 5). For the purpose of the duplicate check comparison, the case is sensitivei.e., A101 and a101 are not treated as duplicates.

When a group update is attempted where the alias has changed, and the new alias wouldbecome the same as the default alias of another subscriber, the update will fail and themessageERROR -- INVALID ALIAS

is displayed in the message area and the alias restored to its original value. The DatabaseManagement application can be used to identify the subscriber with this default alias andupdate if necessary.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 133

The Vehicle and Portable alias names are also validated prior to the group update attemptand if this fails the messageERROR -- INVALID ALIAS


The validation will fail if any of the following applies:

S If the alias name is ‘DUPLICATE’, in any character case combination

S If the first three characters of the alias name are ‘‘UNK” (or any character casecombination) and the valid ISSI for the associated subscriber does not follow

S If the first three characters of the alias name are ‘‘DEF” (or any character casecombination) and the valid ISSI for the associated subscriber does not follow

S If any of the secondaries are duplicates of the primary or of eachother -- this check iscase sensitive so ‘‘A101” and ‘‘a101” are different names

If a Vehicle or Portables’ alias fails, the pre--update validation, an asterisk (’*’ character) willalso be displayed next to the alias name of the Vehicle or Portable that failed the validation.Where aliases are the same, this character will be placed against all the duplicate aliasnames.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 134

6.28.4.3 Updating and Multiple Operators

It is possible that two operators may have the same Resource Group displayed at the sametime. If they both decide to update the Resource Group then inconsistencies could arise.

To overcome this problem, if two ormore operators are displaying the sameResourceGroupand one updates the group, all other operators will receive amessage dialog informing themof theupdate. Themessagedialogprovides theseoperatorswith anumber of options onhowto proceed. This dialog may additionally be displayed if a Resource Group update isperformed by a TRSI client.

The message dialog is shown below:

S REFRESH -- returns you to the Resource Group screen and displays the newchanges

S OVERRIDE -- returnsyou to theResourceGroupscreenas itwas, i.e., newchangesare not displayed

S CANCEL -- returns you to the previous screen

If twoormore operators are attempting aCreate to the samenewgroup (samePrimary), thenthe operators that receive the above dialog and choose eitherREFRESH orOVERRIDE areautomatically placed into ‘Update’ mode. This is indicated by the DELETE key becomingavailable.

Similarly if two or more operators are attempting to delete the same new group (samePrimary), then the operators that receive the above dialog and choose either REFRESH orOVERRIDE are automatically placed into ‘Create’ mode. This is indicated by the DELETEkey becoming unavailable (greyed out).

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 135

6.28.4.4 Delete

This key is used to delete a Resource Group. The key is not available (greyed out) if you arecreating a Resource Group.

DeletingaResourceGroup results in thatgroupbeing removed from theAliasDatabase. ThePrimary ISSI remains unchangedbut becomes independent and is no longer associatedwitha Resource Group. All the Secondary ISSIs remain unchanged but they also becomeindependent and are no longer associated with a Resource Group. If however, the Alias forthe Primary or any of the Secondary resources is different from their default Alias, then thosewill revert to their corresponding ‘‘Default Alias” as defined in the Alias database.

When the DELETE key is touched a confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown below:

S CONFIRM -- to continue with the deletion of the Resource Group

S CANCEL -- returns you to the Resource Group screen

If the deletion is successful then the messageCOMMAND SUCCESSFUL -- GROUP DELETED

is displayed in themessage area of your screen and the screen displayed prior to theUpdateResource Group screen is returned to.

6.28.4.5 Multicall

This key is used to initiate a multi point--to--point call to the Resource Group.

6.28.4.6 Dflt Alias

This key will revert the Alias for the Primary and all Secondary resources to theircorresponding ‘‘Default Alias” as defined in the Alias database, if different from thatdisplayed.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 136

6.28.4.7 Cancel

When this key is touched the screen displayed immediately prior to the Resource Groupscreen is redisplayed. If any of the fields on the ResourceGroup screen have been changedand an update has not been performed then a confirmation dialog box will be displayed, asshown below.

S CONFIRM -- to continue with the cancel command and return you to the previousscreen.

S CANCEL -- returns you to the Resource Group screen

Helpful HintIf a ‘Create’ or ‘Update’ action for a Resource Group fails, one of thefollowing error messages is displayed, depending on the nature of theerror:

S

S

S The message

is displayed for all other errors

ERROR -- SECONDARY IS A PRIMARY

INVALID OPERATION

ERROR -- INVALID ALIAS

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.29_Group RepeatE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 137

6.29 Group Repeat


Youmay be given the privilege to update theGroup Repeat state on a per talkgroup basis. Avisual indication of a talkgroup’s current Group Repeat state is presented on the Talkgroupkey if the state differs from the talkgroup’s configured basestate, and provided you have thetalkgroup audio Monitored or Selected.

6.29.1 Introduction

If a talkgroup has the Group Repeat function enabled, any radios which are affiliated to thattalkgroup will hear all audio transmissions from you, other operators and other radios.

If a talkgrouphasGroupRepeat disabled thenany radioswhich are affiliated to that talkgroupwill only hear audio transmissions from operator positions and will not hear audiotransmissions from other radios. You will however hear all audio transmissions from anyradio and from other affiliated operators.

The Group Repeat state of a talkgroup can be changed either by an operator at this DS2000Site or externally (either an operator at another DS2000 Site or by another dispatcherterminal on the Tetra radio system).

The Group Repeat enable and disable, control the Dimetra System in the samemanner as aMotorola Elite Dispatcher terminal.

6.29.2 Group Repeat Key

You can Enable or Disable Group Repeat on a talkgroup via the GROUP REPEAT functionkey.

The GROUP REPEAT key is primed when you touch the key, and the messageCHOOSE A TALKGROUP KEY


Talkgroup keys on radio pages not currently displayed can be accessed as normal via theMORE RADIO key.

Touching any key apart from a talkgroup key or the MORE RADIO key will invoke thatappropriate function and in the message area, generate the warningINVALID OPERATION

whilst restoring the Group Repeat key to its unprimed state.

Note: The warning message may be overwritten by any messages generated by the invokedfunction.

Touching a talkgroup key when the GROUP REPEAT key is primed will toggle the GroupRepeat state of that talkgroup and restore the GROUP REPEAT key to its unprimed state.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.29_Group Repeat E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 138

6.29.3 Changing Group Repeat State

The Group Repeat state may be changed by any operator position that has the GROUPREPEAT key and the appropriate talkgroup audio Monitored or Selected, following thesequence defined above.

If you attempt to toggle the Group Repeat state of a talkgroup which is only Preselected orEvent Monitored at your terminal, this will fail and a warning message will be displayed.

If Group Repeat has been successfully enabled by you, the messageGROUP REPEAT ENABLED

is displayed in themessageareaand, if the repeat basestate for that talkgroup isDisabled, an‘‘RE” legend is displayedon the talkgroup key at all operator terminals that have the talkgroupaudio Monitored or Selected.

If Group Repeat has been successfully disabled by you, the messageGROUP REPEAT DISABLED

is displayed in themessage area and, if the repeat basestate for that talkgroup is Enabled, an‘‘RD” legend is displayedon the talkgroup keyat all operator terminals that have the talkgroupaudio Monitored or Selected.

6.29.4 External Group Repeat State Change

A talkgroup’s Group Repeat state may be changed by other DS2000 Sites or within theAirwave system itself. In this case the new Group Repeat state is reported to this DS2000Site provided that the talkgroup is at least audioMonitored. As defined above, if this results inthe talkgroup’s Group Repeat state differing from it’s basestate then the appropriate ‘‘RE” or‘‘RD” legend will be displayed to all operators who have the talkgroup audio Monitored orSelected.

Helpful HintIf anattempt ismade to change theGroupRepeat state of aPreselectedorEvent Monitored talkgroup then the message

is displayed.

If an attempt is made to change the Group Repeats state of a talkgroupwhile a console transmission is taking place the request will fail and themessage

is displayed.

INVALID OPERATION

GROUP REPEAT CHANGE FAIL DUE TO TX

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.30 Radio Revert_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 139

6.30 Radio Revert

Note: Availability, operation and screen position of the RADIO REVERT key is dependent on yoursystem’s specification.

When you log on you are utilising one or more Functional Areas. Whilst logged on you mayadd additional radios/talkgroups to, or remove radios/talkgroups from your Radio page. Youare also able to rearrange the Radio Page contents such that the Radio/Talkgroups that arespecified by their Functional Area are in different positions from the default. This can result inyour Radio page varying considerably from what should be available based on yourFunctional Area selection.

TheRADIOREVERT key is used to revert the radiosand talkgroupsonyourRadio/TalkgroupPage(s) to only those specified in the assigned Functional Area(s), that is, the baseline radiopreselection.

6.30.1 Radio Revert Key

Touching theRADIOREVERT key invokes adialoguebox (as shownbelow)which asksyou to confirm or cancel the action.

Note: The action described above is the default action; the dialog box can be configured to notappear via the Factory Configuration options, in which case the revert takes placeimmediately the key is touched.

.

If you cancel, no action is taken.

If youconfirm theaction, all currently preselected radios and talkgroups that are notmembersof the functional areas being used by you will be removed, if possible.

Radios that are in the preselection state (idle) are removed. Only Talkgroups that are in theirbase state are removed. This removal takes place irrespective of the un--preselect flag valueset in the database.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.30 Radio Revert_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 140

If you have a radio or talkgroup in any of the following states, then it will not be removed:

S Event Monitored (talkgroups only), if this is not the base state

S Audio Monitored

S Selected

S In an Open or Closed Connect Group

Radiosand/or talkgroups that shouldbepreselectedaccording to the functional areasdefaultsetting, but are not, will be restored back onto the Radio Page.

It may not always be possible to restore a radio/talkgroup to its original position. This willoccur when the position it should be restored to contains an active radio/talkgroup. If this isthe case then the radio/talkgroup will be restored to the next available position. This meansthat once the revert process has been completed, the Radio Page may not look exactly as itwas at logon.

If the revert completes successfully, that is, all the default radios/talkgroups have beenrestored and all those that should have been removed have been removed, the messageCOMMAND SUCCESSFUL -- ALL RESTORED

is displayed.

If all the default radios/talkgroups have been restored but there were active ones that couldnot be removed, the messageCOMMAND SUCCESSFUL -- NOT ALL RESTORED

is displayed.

Helpful HintIf it is not possible to remove some talkgroups or radios and the functionalareas contain their full quotaof radiosand talkgroups, theRadioPagemaybecome full. In this case the messageCOMMAND SUCCESSFUL -- NOT ALL RESTORED

is displayed and as many functional area radios and talkgroups aspossible are restored. This restoration takes place in strict functional arealist order.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.31_INTROE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 141

6.31 Analogue Radio Introduction

6.31.1 Radio Channel Keys

Touch theRADIO key to invoke theRadio pages screen in theGeneralWorkAreawhereup to 15 Radio Base Station and/or talkgroup keys can be displayed as default. Therecan be several pages of keys to allow you to access up to 40 keys.

If there aremore than15 radios, further pageswill be available to accommodate them. Ifthereareadditional pages, touching theMORERADIO key steps thedisplay through theother pages in rotation. Radio keys can also be configured so that they are positionedacross several pages, therefore all 15 positions on page onemay not be populated andfurther pages can be accessed as above.

Each Radio page has 15 touch--sensitive areas which can be assigned to a preselectedRadio. When a Radio is preselected, it shows as a key in the touch--sensitive area andchanges its attributes to indicate the state of the radio. The Radio key also shows thechannel number (01 to 99) to which the Base Station is tuned, the MASC identity, andother information such as Pip Tones, Talkthrough, Faults, Channel Status.

Some Radios may have been preselected as default for you by the System Manager.They will always appear on the preselected radio pages, but they can be rearrangedtemporarily by using the Radio Setup feature.

Your access to Radio keys and the way in which they are displayed depends on your USERID.

Certain Radio keys may have been configured to be already preselected for you by theSystem Manager and are automatically displayed when you log on. To access additionalradio channels use the Radio Setup feature.

Analogue Radio keys have three conditions: Preselected, Monitored and Selected.

Preselected Any Radio keys available to you are initially in this state. PreselectedRadio keys are displayed in the idle condition.

Monitored Monitored radio enables you to hear radio traffic in your headset or viathe loudspeaker.

Selected Selected radio allows you to take control of the channel and transmit.

Depending on the size of your system and its configuration, you can have a maximum of 40preselected radios. You can monitor or select up to 10 radios at any one time, with amaximum of five in a Connect Group.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.31_INTRO E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 142

6.31.2 Radio Key Description

Key colours, attributes and identification numbers can be reconfigured by the SystemManager. However, for the purposes of key descriptions in themanual, it is assumed that thecolours and attributes (flashing, dimming, grey-out, bright-up, etc.) present on delivery andinstallation of the equipment still apply.

ChannelIdentity2 x 9 characters

FLT

Channel Selection State is:d = Disabled for this userp = Preselected for this usere = Event monitored for this users = Selected for this userc = In a Connect Group for this

userMUTE This radio’s audio is muted

DPxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxXXXXXXMASC Id

Channel Status:Cn = Channel is in a Connect Group at this terminal,

where n is the number of the Connect Group.Cxxx = Channel is in a Connect Group at another terminal,

where xxx is the teminal number at which the channelis part of a connect group.If the Channel is part of a Remote user’s group, xxxindicates the site ID, not the terminal number.

S = Channel is selected at this terminal or at anotherterminal (if the talkgroup is enabled for multi--user select).

Snnn = Channel is selected at another terminal wherennn is the terminal number of the other user.If the talkgroup is selected by a Remote site user, nnndisplays the site ID, not the terminal number.

Txnnn = Channel is keyed by another user where nnnis the terminal number of the user keying.If the Channel is keyed by a Remote site user,nnn displays the site ID, not the terminal number.

Cxxx

Pip tones Enabled

p

FLT = I/O card or Line Fault IndicationBSF = Base Station FaultICOM = Radio Intercom

Comb

TRN = Quasi Sync training in progressCombined.Tnnn = Talkthrough applied by terminal number nnn.(Number not displayed to you if you have overrideTalkthrough privileges).COMB = Radio Channel is part of a combine group.

Channel (Frequency)Indication xxx

Channel Disabled, can still be used by ‘Disabler’,e.g., Engineer or Supervisor. (Letter appears on‘Disabler’s’ and privileged users’ keys only).

The function identifiers indicate thestateof the channel or theparticular function that is active.A user terminal position number is displayed when another operator has selected thechannel.

‘FLT’ is displayed on the top line when the system has detected an I/O card or radio fault. Onsome systems a code or reference number may be displayed instead of the letters FLT. Thisis dependent on signals returned to the DS2000 from the radio equipment.

Key colours, attributes and identification numbers are set by the System Manager.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.32 RADIO SET UPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 143

6.32 Radio Setup

TheRADIOSETUP key is used to change the layout of the radio keys, and to display keysnot automatically preselected.

Touch the RADIO SETUP key to display the list of radio Base Stations.

During theprocessof adding, removingormovingkeys theMORERADIOkey canbeused tochange pages as required.

6.32.1 Radio Setup Table

The Radio Page Setup table is divided into four columns with colour coded entries.

Columns:

S The first column of the table contains an area code

S The second column shows the name and location of the Base Station

S The third column shows the band, U for UHF or V for VHF

S The fourth column shows the channel number

Typical Colour Coding:

S BaseStations that are in useare shown in dark greenandcannot beun-preselected(removed), but can be repositioned

S Base Stations entries that change to dark green after they have been preselectedcannot then be un-preselected (removed), but can be repositioned

S Base Stations shown pale green are available to be preselected (put on a page)

S Base Stations shown in dark blue can be un--preselected (removed)

S Base Stations shown in grey are not available

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.32 RADIO SET UP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 144

6.32.2 Adding Radio Channels

a) Touch the line of a channel that you wish to add to your display. The message

CHOOSE A BLANK PRESELECTION KEY

is displayed.

b) Touch a blank key space on the Radio page.

c) Repeat the process for each channel you want in your display.

d) Touch the QUIT key to save the selection and return to the Main Screen.

Helpful Hint When you log off or change to another Functional Area via the Area Setupscreen, any channels which you added to the Radio Setup pages are notsaved.

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 145

6.32.3 Removing Radio Channels

Touch the RADIO SETUP key to view the page showing the list of channels available toyou.

a) Touch the line of the channel in the list that you wish to remove from your display.The colour of the list entry changes to confirm removal and the radio key is removedfrom the radio page.

b) Repeat the process for each channel you want to remove from your display.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.32 RADIO SET UP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 146

6.32.4 Rearranging Radio Channel Key Positions

You can change the layout of the keys in the Radio pages. Radio keys can be swapped fromtheir current positions to any other position on any page.

a) Touch the RADIO SETUP key to view the list of radio channels.

b) Use theMOREPAGES key to find the pagewith the key to be repositioned. Touchthe key of the radio channel that you wish to move. The message

is displayed.

c) Choose a second key and touch it. The two keys swap position.

d) Repeat the process for each channel you want to move/reposition.

CHOOSE A PRESELECTION KEY

VOLUME 1RADIO



Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 147

Helpful HintThe following system report messages are associated with the RadioSetup function andmay be displayed in themessage area at the top of thescreen:

The messageCHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUPOR PRESEL is displayed ifthe same radio key is touched twice when trying toswap positions.

The messageCHOOSE A RADIO/TALKGROUPOR PRESEL is displayed ifa different radio or talkgroup key is touched. Theposition of the two keys will be swapped.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.33_USE OF RADIO KEYS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 148

6.33 Use of Radio Keys

6.33.1 Introduction

Channels preselected for you as a default will be displayed on the Radio pages. You canpreselect additional channels as required up to amaximum of 40. If you touch a preselectedradio key, its attributes change to theMonitoredstate, and its audio is directed to yourheadsetor speaker.

The radio pages are displayed in the General Work Area (GWA) of the screen when theRADIO key is touched. Each radio page can display up to 15 radio keys.

6.33.2 Radio Key Access

Touch the MORE RADIO key to step through the radio sub-pages. (To return to youroriginal page, keep touching the MORE RADIO key.)

Incoming radio on keys not currently displayed will cause the MORE RADIO key toflash.

6.33.3 Mute Speaker Key (Speaker Mute)

If the loudspeaker is not currently muted, theMUTE SPKR key will display in an idlestate. Touching theMUTESPKR key in this statewill causemonitoredaudio from theloudspeaker to be muted. TheMUTE SPKR key will now display in an active state.


If the loudspeaker is currently muted, the MUTE SPKR key will display in an activestate. Touching the MUTE SPKR key in this state will cause audio from theloudspeaker to be restored to its previous level. TheMUTESPKR keywill now returnto display in an idle state.


Loudspeaker audio muted

Loudspeaker audio enabled

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.34_TALKTHROUGHE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 149

6.34 Talkthrough

6.34.1 Introduction

Normally, all mobile radios communicate only with the control centre (by way of the hill-toptransmitter/receiver). To establish direct communication between radio users, touch T/T toset up ‘Talkthrough’.

6.34.2 Setting up Talkthrough (T/T)

To set up Talkthrough, touch the T/T key -- the T/T key will become highlighted.

Touch the required radio key.

Note: In situations where permanent Talkthrough is the normal operating procedure, the actionsdetailed above will be reversed (and for some installations, if Talkthrough is removed, PipTones will automatically be applied ).

The key touchedwill display a ‘T’ to indicate that Talkthrough is applied and the number of theterminal applying Talkthrough will be displayed on the key at other terminals.

To terminate Talkthrough, touch the T/T key again and then the Radio key.

Helpful HintTypically, Talkthroughcannot be set ona radiowhichhasbeenselectedbyanother operator and Talkthrough can only be removed by the operatorthat applied it (these limitations can be removed by your SystemManager). If you attempt to set Talkthrough on a radio which has the func-tion disabled, the message


Talkthrough can be configured (by the System Manager) with a timeoutperiod. When Talkthrough is not removed before the end of the timeoutperiod, it is automatically removed. The warning message

is displayed in the message area. A system error message is also gener-ated and logged.

Talkthrough can be applied to only one radio in a Voting Group.

Talkthrough will be temporarily removed if you use the TX key or the foot-switch.

INVALID OPERATION

T/T TIMEOUT

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.35 MONITORING & SELECTING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 150

6.35 Monitoring and Selecting Radio Channels

6.35.1 Radio Monitor

Touch a preselected radio channel key to monitor it.

The key will change colour and an ‘M’ will be displayed in the border instead of a ‘P’.

Incoming audio will cause the key to flash. If the monitored Radio key is on a page notcurrently displayed, theMORE RADIO key will flash instead. Use theMORERADIO key tofind and display the page the flashing Radio key is on.

Helpful HintIf you are monitoring a channel in a Site Select Voting Group and anotherchannel is voted, you will lose the received audio if you do not have thevoted channel monitored or selected.

On some systems, when a voted radio is selected by another user, itsmonitored audio will be reduced at your terminal, other monitored audioremainingunchanged. To return the voted radioaudio to full volumeselectthe radio.

A radio can only be put into one Automatic Voting Group.

You cannot put a Remote radio into a Voting Group.

If Adjacent Mute is enabled, you will not be able to hear audio on amonitored channel whilst a user at an adjacent terminal is transmitting onthat channel.

6.35.2 Radio Select

Note: You can only transmit on radio channels which are selected.

Touch a monitored radio to select it.

Helpful HintNormally, you cannot select a radio which is already selected by anotheroperator. Privileged users can select a radio channel which is alreadyselected by another operator.

If you do not deselect (Monitor) the radio, the radio will automatically resetto theMonitoredstatewithin a set time, andasystemerrormessagewill begenerated.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.35 MONITORING & SELECTINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 151

6.35.3 Transmit

To transmit, select one or more radios then press and hold either the TX key orfootswitch.

If your system uses Pip Tones, they will be generated when there is no audiopresent.

The TX key changes to its Active state when it is touched or when the footswitch isoperated. Your speech will be transmitted simultaneously over all of the selectedradios.

Helpful HintEven if you are allowed to select a radio which is already selected byanother operator, your TX key will not operate whilst the other operator istransmitting.

When twooperators have the same radio selected, the first to touch theTXkey transmits.

When a radio in a Voting Group is selected, it is removed from the grouptemporarily. This enables other users to continue monitoring other BaseStations. If more than one user has a group Base Station in its Selectstate, it will only be returned to its group after the last user has returned it tothe Monitor state.

If AdjacentMute is enabled, youwill not beable tohear audioonaselectedchannel whilst a user at an adjacent terminal is transmitting on that chan-nel.

TheModulation area of the TX key is not touch-sensitive. It flashes to indicate thatthe audio from your microphone is at a sufficiently high level to provide good signalquality. If it does not light up, move your microphone closer to your mouth.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.35 MONITORING & SELECTING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 152

6.35.4 Radio Demonitor and Deselect

The, dual--purpose DEMONDESEL key can be used to return a single Monitoredradio channel to the Preselected state, or return all Monitored radios to thePreselected state.

Demonitor a Single Radio

To demonitor a single radio channel touch the DEMON key. The message

is displayed. Touch the appropriate key; the message

is displayed, confirming the action.

CHOOSE TGRP OR RADIO KEY

RADIO CHANNEL DEMONITORED

Demonitor all Radios

To return allMonitored radios to thePreselected state, touch theDEMON key twicein succession, the message

will be displayed. The radios must all be in the Monitored state for this action towork.

RADIO CHANNELS DEMONITORED

Note: A warning is normally generated if the channel is not being monitored by anyone.

Deselect a Single Radio

ToDeselect a single radio channel, touch theappropriate (Selected)Radio key; themessage

is displayed and the key changes to the Monitored state.CHANNEL DESELECTED AND MONITORED

Deselect All Radios

This action will only apply to radios in the Selected state.

To return all Selected radios to the Monitored state, touch the DESEL ALL keytwice in succession, the message

is displayed.CHANNEL DESELECTED AND MONITORED

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.36_COMBINEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 153

6.36 Combining Channels

TheCOMB key allows you to group a number of radio channels (Base Stations), talkgroupsandMigrationGroups so that you canoperate them togetherwith single key operation. In thiscontext the term ‘radio’ meansRadio Channel, Talkgroup orMigrationGroup. Typically up toten may be combined at a time.

6.36.1 Combine

The COMB key is used to put Radio Channel, Talkgroup and Migration Group keys into, orout of, a CombineGroup. Each operator can set up one CombineGroup containing up to themaximum number of radios configured for that group.

Touch the key to change it to its Active state.

The message CHOOSE A TGRP OR RADIO KEY is displayed.

Touching any key, other thana valid radio key or theMORERADIO keywhile theCOMBkey is in the Active state, returns the COMB key to the Idle state.

Radio keys on Radio pages not currently displayed can be accessed via the MORERADIO key as normal.

The functions available for Combine Groups are:

a) Monitor/Demonitor

b) Select/Deselect

c) Transmit

c) Talkthrough On/Off -- Radio channels only

d) Event Monitor On/Off -- Talkgroups/Migration groups only

6.36.2 Uncombine

To remove Radio keys or a talkgroup from a Combine Group, repeat the above se-quence. As each Combine key is touched, instead of being added, it will be removedfrom the Combine Group.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.36_COMBINE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 154

6.36.3 Radio Combine

6.36.3.1 Combine

When a radio channel is put into a Combine Group it is automatically set to the Preselectedstate and all other radios already in the group are also automatically set to the Preselectedstate.

Note: When a radio joins a Combine group, all talkgroups already in the Combine Group areautomatically set to Event Monitored.

When a radio channel is put into the Combine Group, the border legends of the Radio keydisplays COMB and the message CHANNEL INTO COMBINE GROUP is displayed in themessage area.

6.36.3.2 Uncombine

The message CHANNEL OUT OF COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area and theborder legend (COMB) of the radio key is removed when a radio channel is taken out of theCombine Group. The radio channel will be set to the preselected state upon removal.

6.36.4 Talkgroup Combine

6.36.4.1 Combine

When a talkgroup is put into a Combine Group it is set to the Event Monitored state, and allother talkgroups already in theCombineGroup are set to theEventMonitored state. All radiochannels already in the Combine Group are set to the Preselected state.

The message TALKGROUP INTO COMBINE GROUP is displayed in the message area and theborder legends of the Radio key displays COMB when a talkgroup is put into the CombineGroup.

6.36.4.2 Uncombine

Themessage TALKGROUP OUT OF COMBINE GROUP is displayed in themessageareaand theborder legends (COMB) of the radio key is removed when a talkgroup is taken out theCombine Group. The talkgroup is set to the Event Monitored state upon removal.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.37_REMOTE RADIOE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 155

6.37 Remote Radio

Note: Availability of this facility is dependent on your system’s specification.

Remote Radio access permits operators at a local Control Room site to preselect, monitorand select radio channels that are terminated at a remote Control Room site and normallyunder the control of the remote site users.

User actions, screen messages and restrictions are similar to those described for RemoteTerminal, with the proviso that only Radio functionality is available to you.

6.37.1 Preselecting the Remote Radio Channel

Touch theRADIOFNSkey, followedby theRADIOSETUPkey; theGeneralWorkAreawill change to display theRadioDirectory screen. If yourUSER ID orUser Type allowsit, this screen will include both local and remote radio Base Stations. The message


Choose the required remoteBaseStation from the list, as if it were a local BaseStation.The message

is displayed in the message area and a delay (typically 1 to 30 seconds, dependent onequipment) occurs whilst the remote access is established.

When the remote control links have been established, the relevant Site Select key onboth sites changes to indicate that a remote access session is active between thosesites.

CHOOSE A CHANNEL

REMOTE CHANNEL ACCESS:PLEASE WAIT

6.37.2 Using the Remote Radio

Depending on the configuration at your site, you will be able to operate in one of thefollowing modes:

a) Single channel capability with more than one user beingable to use the channel,

or

b) Just you on the link and having multi-channel capability.

Note: There may be a slight delay whilst the audio link is established to theremote site.

Use theRemoteRadio keyas though itwereoneof your ownLocalRadio keys. Nowthat both control and audio links are present, the key behaves normally withminimaldelays.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.37_REMOTE RADIO E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 156

Helpful HintThe maximum number of remote operators for each site is defined at thetime of manufacture; see the System Manager for details.

You do not have access to the Radio Configuration page for the remotesite.

Remote radios cannot be included in Voting Groups that contain local ra-dios.

You can only preselect radioswhich are terminated at the remote site afteryouhave loggedon, i.e., remote radio channels cannot be associatedwitha USER ID or User Type to be automatically preselected at logon.

If the audio or control link cannot be set up, the Site key is highlighted andthe message

or

is displayed in the message area and an entry made in the system faultslog.

Call logger information on radio channels terminated at the remote site isrecorded at the remote site.

Your audio is recorded at your own local site, i.e., where you are physicallylocated. A user at the remote site cannot replay your recorded audio,which was (to them) recorded off-site. Any attempt to do so results in themessage

being displayed in their message area. However, you can use the INSTREPL key in the normal way and use it to replay your own audio.

The messages

or

indicate typical breakdowns of the communications between sites. Youwill normally remain connected to the remote site unless youexplicitly signoff. The only exceptions to this are a line or an equipment failure -- indi-cated by amessage similar to the above which is also displayed in the re-spective supervisors’ message areas. An entry is also automaticallymade in the System Faults log.

REMOTE ACCESS TO SITE NOT AVAILABLE

REMOTE RADIO TO SITE NOT AVAILABLE

OPERATOR REMOTE -- ACCESS DENIED

REMOTE OP TERMINATED TO SITE XXX

REMOTE OP TERMINATED FROM SITE XXX

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.37_REMOTE RADIOE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--025 6 -- 157

6.37.3 Leaving (Un--preselecting) the Remote Radio

Un--preselect the radio in the normal way via theRADIOSETUP key to return toyour own local Radio screen. Your link to the remote site is discontinued.

When you demonitor the Remote Radio, the control links remain and you canquickly re-establish the Monitor state.

You need to un-preselect the Remote Radio when you log off.

VOLUME 1RADIO


Amb_6.37_REMOTE RADIO E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--0256 -- 158


Chapter 7

Conferencing and InternalIntercom

VOLUME 1CONFERENCING & INTERNAL INTERCOM


7 -- 2Amb_7.0_CONF & INT INTERCOME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Amendment Record


A First draft incorporatingrelease V9.11 functionality

SS 25.04.06

B Text changes SS 24.06.06


1A First Draft V 161 TS 18.09.07


SS 01/11/07



7 -- 3Amb_7.0_CONF & INT INTERCOM E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Contents

7.1 Connect Group Options 7 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.1 Introduction 7 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2 Connect Conferencing 7 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.2.1 Telephone Only Connect Groups 7 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.2 Radio and Telephone Connect Groups 7 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups 7 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.4 Talkgroup Only Connect Groups 7 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.5 Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups 7 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.6 Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups 7 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups 7 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1.2.8 Individual Call and Single Telephone 7 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Connect Groups -- Connecting 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.1 The Connect Keys 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.2 Opening and Closing Connect Groups 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.2.1 Opening a Connect Group 7 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.2.2 Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call -- Option) 7 -- 127.2.2.3 Closing a Connect Group 7 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.3 Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 14. . .7.2.3.1 Adding Telephones to a Group (From held) 7 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.3.2 Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call -- Option) 7 -- 147.2.3.3 Removing Telephones from a Group 7 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.4 Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 16. . . . . . .7.2.4.1 Adding Radios to a Group 7 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.4.2 Removing a Radio from a Connect Group 7 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.5 Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group 7 -- 18. . . .7.2.5.1 Adding Talkgroups to a Group 7 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.5.2 Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.6 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups 7 -- 19. . . . .7.2.6.1 Monitor and Select for Closed Groups 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.6.2 Monitor and Select for Open Groups 7 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.6.3 DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect 7 -- 20. . . . . . .

7.2.7 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups 7 -- 20. .7.2.8 Talkthrough and Connect Groups 7 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.9 Operator Push-To-Talk Override. 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.10 Open Connect Group Restrictions 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.11 Individual Call Restriction 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2.12 Connect Group Security 7 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Operator Intercom 7 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.1 Making an Intercom Call to Other Users 7 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.2 Receiving an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.3 Clearing an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference 7 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Operator Intercom (Partitioned) 7 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.1 Internal Intercom Screen 7 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.2 Function Keys 7 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.3 Making an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



7 -- 4Amb_7.0_CONF & INT INTERCOME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.4.4 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.5 Taking an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4.6 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call 7 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



7 -- 5Amb_7.1_CONNECT GRPS OPTIONS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1 Connect Group Options

7.1.1 Introduction

The Connect function allows operators to interconnect audio from radio channels,talkgroups, individual calls and telephones, i.e., in conferencewith all connected parties ableto converse with each other. Each Connect Group can contain up to a maximum of fivemembers excluding the operator. There can only be one operator in a Connect Group.

Connect conferences in which the operator is participating are termed ‘Open ConnectGroups’. Connect conferences in which the operator is not participating are termed ‘ClosedConnect Groups’.

Each operator has up to two independent Connect Groups (CONN1 andCONN2) which canbe used to interconnect radios, talkgroups, individual calls and/or telephones. BothConnectGroups can be simultaneously active, but only one can be open at a time, i.e., you can onlyparticipate in one Connect Group at a time.

Certain telephone, radio and talkgroup cross--connect combinations are automaticallybarred.

Conventionally, CONN 1 is used for telephone conferencing and CONN 2 for radioconferencing. When radio, talkgroups and telephone users are in the same conference,either CONN 1 or CONN 2 can be used.

To control conference groups, an ‘In Connect’ box is provided on the Active Telephone page.TheOnHold box is also used in conjunctionwithConnectGroups. BothConnectGroups canbeusedsimultaneously, only the telephone lines inCONN1are placed in the InConnect box.The first four telephone lines to be put onHold are displayed in the adjacentOnHold box priorto being placed in a Connect.

There are specific restrictions in mixing telephone and radio users in a conference. Sometelephone lines may not be connected to a radio channel/talkgroup, and in all casesconnections have to be initially set up by you. These conditions are set in the database by theSystem Manager.

Note: When telephones and conventional radios are put into Connect Groups with talkgroups, anypossible security implications should be considered.

Helpful HintYou cannot put a Migration Group into a Connect Group.

If theConnectGroup contains amixture of either radios and telephones orboth with talkgroups, you cannot leave the Connect Group.



7 -- 6Amb_7.1_CONNECT GRPS OPTIONSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1.2 Connect Conferencing

There are eight types of connect conference:

• Telephone only (open or closed group)

• Radio and telephone (open or closed group)

• Radio only (open or closed group)

• Talkgroup only (open group only)

• Talkgroup and telephone (open group only)

• Talkgroup and radio (open group only)

• Talkgroup, radio and telephone (open group only)

• Individual Call and telephone (open group only)

7.1.2.1 Telephone Only Connect Groups

Audio from each telephone line in the Connect Group is routed to all other telephone lines inthe group.

If the Connect Group is open, audio from all telephone lines in the group is routed to you, andyour microphone is routed to all lines.

If theConnectGroup is closed, no audio fromany of the telephone lines in the group is routedto you, and your microphone is not connected to any of the lines in the group.

Note: When more than three telephone calls are connected in a group, audio quality may bedegraded.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1.2.2 Radio and Telephone Connect Groups

Audio from all telephone lines in the Connect Group is routed to all telephone lines and radiochannels in the group.

The audio routing from radios in the Connect Groups can be factory configured to operate ineither of the following modes:

a) The incoming audio from a radio channel is only routed to the Connect Groupwhen the received call indication for that channel goes active, and if no otherincoming radio channel is currently being routed. The first radio to be receivedhaspriority. When the receivedcall indication from thecurrently routed incomingradio goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming radio audiorouting takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radiochannel in the connect group.

b) The incomingaudio fromeach radio channelwith received call active is routed toall other radio channels and telephones in the group.

The radio channels in the group are transmit VOX keyed (i.e., transmission is enabled whenaudio is present on the channel output).

If the Connect Group is openwhile PTT is active, yourmicrophone is routed to all talkgroups,all telephone lines andall selected radio channels in thegroup. Audio fromall telephone linesand all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you.

Note: Due to the introduction of sidetone it may be possible for audio intended for the telephone tobeheardat anattenuated level on the radiowithout you touching theTX key. For this reason itis advisable to remove the radio from the Connect Group if your speech is intended fortelephone only.

If theConnectGroup is closed yourmicrophone is not connected to any of the telephone linesin the group. Your microphone is, however, connected to any Selected radio channels in thegroupwhile PTT is active. Audio fromanyMonitored or Selected radios in the group is routedto you. If any radios areMonitored or Selected in the group, you also hear any telephone lineaudio, since audio from Monitored radios consists of both received and transmitted audio.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1.2.3 Radio Only Connect Groups

Theaudio routing in radio--only connect groupsmaybe factory configured to operate in eitherof the following modes:

a) The incoming audio from a radio channel is only routed to the Connect Groupwhen the received call indication for that channel goes active, and if no otherincoming radio channel is currently being routed. The first radio to be receivedhaspriority. When the receivedcall indication from thecurrently routed incomingradio goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming radio audiorouting takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any radiochannel in the Connect Group.

b) The incomingaudio fromeach radio channelwith received call active is routed toall other radio channels in the group.

If the Connect Group is open while PTT is active, your microphone is routed to all Selectedradio channels in the group overriding any active radio call. Audio from all Monitored orSelected radio channels in the group is routed to you.

If the Connect Group is closed, your microphone is not connected to any Selected radiochannels in the group while PTT is active. Audio from any Monitored radios in the group isrouted to you.

7.1.2.4 Talkgroup Only Connect Groups

Audio from each talkgroup in the Connect Group is routed to all other talkgroups within thegroup. The audio is routed from theConnectGroups in the ‘First Speaks’ mode. Thismeansthat the incomingaudio froma talkgroup is only routed (to all other talkgroups)when receivedcall indication goes active, and no other incoming talkgroup is currently routed. The firsttalkgroup to set up a call has priority (hence ‘First Speaks’). When the received call indicationfrom the currently routed talkgroup goes inactive (i.e., call terminates), no further incomingaudio routing takes place until a new received call indication is detected on any talkgroup inthe Connect Group.

Anewcall (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in theConnectGroupas soonas a callon any talkgroup is received. Audio will then be routed from the original call to all othertalkgroups.

If the Connect Group is open while PTT is active, your microphone is routed to all Selectedtalkgroups in the group, overriding any active talkgroup call.

Audio from all Selected talkgroups in the group is routed to you.

If the Connect Group is closed, audio from anyMonitored talkgroups in the group is routed toyou.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1.2.5 Talkgroup and Telephone Connect Groups

Audio fromeach telephone line in theConnectGroup is routed to all other telephone linesandtalkgroups in the group.

The incoming audio from a talkgroup is only routed (to all other talkgroups and telephones inthe group) when received call indication goes active, and if no other incoming talkgroup iscurrently routed. The first talkgroup to be received has priority. When the received callindication from the currently routed incoming talkgroup goes inactive (i.e., the callterminates), no further incoming talkgroup audio routing takes place until a new received callindication is detected on any talkgroup in the Connect Group.

Anewcall (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in theConnectGroupas soonas a callon any talkgroup is received. Audio will then be routed from the original call to all othertalkgroups.

The talkgroupsare transmitVOXkeyedby the telephones. Whenaudio is detectedoutboundto the talkgroups, a new call(s) will be set up to all talkgroups in the Connect Group.

In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, whilst PTT is active, to all telephonelines in the group and to all Selected talkgroups within the group. Audio from all telephonelines and all Selected talkgroups in the group is routed to you.

7.1.2.6 Talkgroup and Radio Connect Groups

The incoming audio from a radio channel/talkgroup is only routed (to all other groupmembers) when received call indication goes active, and if no other incoming radiochannel/talkgroup is currently routed. The first radio/talkgroup to be received has priority.When the received call indication from the currently routed incoming source goes inactive (iethe call terminates), no further incoming audio routing takes place until a new received callindication is detected on any radio channel/talkgroup in the Connect Group.

A new call (or calls) will be set up to all other talkgroups in the Connect Group, as soon as acall on any talkgroup is received or an incoming audio is detected from the radio channel.Audio will then be routed from the original call/radio to all the other talkgroups.

In theopenConnectGroupyourmicrophone is routed,whilstPTT is active, to all talkgroups inthe group and to all Selected radio channels within the group. Audio from all talkgroups andall Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group is routed to you. (You must have theprivilege to deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group.)




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.1.2.7 Talkgroup, Radio and Telephone Groups

Audio from all telephone lines in the Connect Group is routed to all other telephone lines, alltalkgroups and all radio channels in the group.

The incoming audio froma radio channel/talkgroup is only routed (to all other radio channels,talkgroups and telephones in the group) when received call indication goes active, and noother incoming radio channel or talkgroup is currently routed. The first radio/talkgroup to bereceived has priority. When the received call indication from the currently routed incomingsource goes inactive (i.e., the call terminates), no further incoming audio routing takes placeuntil a new received call indication is detected on any radio channel/talkgroup in theConnectGroup.

The radio channels and talkgroups in the group are transmit VOX keyed (i.e., transmission isenabled when audio is present on the channel output).

In the openConnectGroup yourmicrophone is routed,whilePTT is active, to all talkgroups inthe group, all telephone lines and all Selected radio channels in the group. Audio from alltalkgroups, all telephone lines and all Monitored or Selected radio channels in the group isrouted to you.

7.1.2.8 Individual Call and Single Telephone

Audio from the individual call is routed to the telephone line when the individual call is active.

The individual call will be VOX keyed when audio from the telephone line is detected on thechannel output.

In the open Connect Group your microphone is routed, while PTT is active, to bothmembersand audio is routed to you.



7 -- 11Amb_7.2_CONNECT GRPS --- CONNECTING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2 Connect Groups -- Connecting

7.2.1 The Connect Keys

The connect function allows you to interconnect audio from radio channels, talkgroups andtelephones in a conference. Each operator has their own independent connect groupswhich may be used to interconnect radios, talkgroups and/or telephones.

The operator is provided with two independent Connect Groups, controlled by the abovekeys, bothofwhichoperate inan identicalmanner (except telephone lines inCONN2donotget put in theConnect box). In the followingdescriptions theConnect key refers to either theCONN 1 or CONN 2 key, and its related Connect Group.

A connect conference inwhich youare participating is termedanopen connect groupandaconnect conference in which you are not participating is termed a closed connect group.

Both of your connect groupsmay be simultaneously active, but only one connect group canbe open at a time i.e., you can only participate in one connect group conference at a time.

After logon all the operators’ Connect Groups are initially inactive, i.e., empty and closed.

The audio routing modes between members of a Connect Group are detailed in ConnectGroups (Audio Routing).

7.2.2 Opening and Closing Connect Groups

7.2.2.1 Opening a Connect Group

A closed Connect Group is opened by touching the relevant Connect key.

Opening a Connect Group performs the following actions:

• Any currently open Connect Group is closed (see closing actions)

• Open telephones are put on Hold. If the maximum allowable number of telephonelines are already on Hold, the message OPERATION DENIED -- HOLD LIMIT isdisplayed and the connect operation is barred

• Selected radio channels are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state

• Selected talkgroups are deselected, i.e., they revert to the Monitored state

• Any unanswered dialled call is cleared

• Any telephone monitor is cleared



7 -- 12Amb_7.2_CONNECT GRPS --- CONNECTINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

• Any inter-operator call transfer is cleared

• Any intercom call is cleared

• Solid state recorder replay is stopped

• Any motorway phone is placed on Hold

• Eavesdrop is cleared

• Any miscellaneous system audio routing is paused, e.g., external recorder replay

When the Connect Group is opened:• Monitored radios in the group are automatically put to the Selected state

• Any Monitored talkgroups in the group are automatically put to the Selected state

• An intrusion tone, if enabled, is issued to all parties in the Connect Group if anyPSTN lines are part of the group

• TheConnect keyattributesare changed to indicate that theConnectGroup is now inthe ‘Open’ state

Acurrent closedConnectGroup cannot be opened if an individual call is in progress andAutoHold functionality is not enabled. The message INDIVIDUAL CALL IN PROGRESS is displayedand the operation is barred.

7.2.2.2 Opening a Connect Group (Auto Connect Active Call -- Option)

This follows the same actions as described above except for the following:

• If the group is empty and an open telephone call is in progress, then the call isimmediately entered into the connect group

Note: This option is factory configurable.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.2.3 Closing a Connect Group

An open Connect Group is closed by touching the relevant Connect key.

Closing a Connect Group performs the following actions:

• Selected radios in the Connect Group are deselected, i.e., they revert to theMonitored state

• Selected talkgroups in the Connect Group are deselected, i.e., they revert to theMonitored state

• If the Connect Group consists of only one item (radio, telephone or talkgroup), theitem is removed from the Connect Group and the messageCONNECT GROUP # TERMINATED (where ‘#’ is the Connect Group number)

• The Connect key attributes are changed to indicate that the group is now in the‘Closed’ state

• The intrusion tone, if present, is removed and conference tone generation isenabled if any PSTN line is a member of the Connect Group

The Connect Group cannot be closed if an individual call is in progress. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- CALL IN PROGRESS is displayed and the operation is barred.

The Connect Group can be closed if it contains a mixture of talkgroups and other membertypes, but only under certain CCI port type restrictions. A group may close if:

All talkgroups involved in the group reside on shared CCI ports,

or

Where all talkgroups involved in the group reside on a single CCI port

If these restrictions are not met, the message OPERATION DENIED, WRONG PORT TYPES isdisplayed and the operation is barred.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.3 Adding and Removing Telephones to/from a Connect Group

7.2.3.1 Adding Telephones to a Group (From held)

Telephones are added to a Connect Group by touching a held Telephone Line key while theConnect Group is open. The line is not added to the group if any of the following conditionsare true:

• The connect group already contains the maximum number of members. Themessage OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayed and the operation isbarred.

• The cross connection of the telephone line to any other member of the connectgroup is barred. The message OPERATION DENIED -- ILLEGAL CONNECT isdisplayed and the operation is barred.

• The line is notHeld. Themessage OPERATION DENIED -- LINE BUSY is displayedandthe operation is barred.

• The connect group already contains a talkgroup and the option to bar a telephone toconnect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The messageCONNECT BARRED -- TALKGROUP IN GROUP is displayed and the operation isbarred.

If the telephone line is successfully added to the Connect Group the messageINTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend arechanged to indicate that it is part of the Connect Group. The key attributes and legend forother operators (with that key displayed) change to indicate that the line is in use by theoperator applying the connect.

7.2.3.2 Adding Telephones to a Group (Auto Connect Dialled Call -- Option)

• Acall can beadded to anopen telephone connect groupby dialling from thedial pador use of a telephone Hot key while the group is open and contains a single call.Once the call is answered, the call is immediately added to the connect group.

If the telephone line is successfully added to the Connect Group the messageINTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend arechanged to indicate that it is part of the Connect Group. The key attributes and legend forother operators (with that key displayed) change to indicate that the line is in use by theoperator applying the connect.

Note: This option is factory configurable.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.3.3 Removing Telephones from a Group

Telephones are removed fromagroup by touching theTelephone Line keywhile theConnectGroup is open. If the line is successfully removed from the Connect Group the messageOUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the Telephone Line key attributes and legend arechanged to indicate that it is no longer part of the Connect Group.

The system can be factory configured to either:

• Clear down the telephone line when it is removed from a Connect Group,

or

• Place the telephone line on Hold when it is removed from a Connect Group. If themaximum number of lines is already on Hold, the messageOPERATION DENIED -- HOLD LIMIT is displayed and the operation is barred.

When a telephone line in a Connect Group clears down, the line is automatically removedfrom the Connect Group. The message OUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed.

In a closed Connect Group, where only a single telephone line remains in the group (causedby other lines within the group clearing down or the operator closing the group), the line isautomatically removed from the group (and either placed onHold or cleared down as definedabove). The message CONNECT GROUP TERMINATED is displayed.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.4 Adding and Removing Radios to/from a Connect Group

7.2.4.1 Adding Radios to a Group

Touching a Radio Channel key while a Connect Group is open adds the radio channel to theConnectGroup. The radio is not added to the group if any of the following conditions are true:

• The Connect Group already contains the maximum number of members. Themessage OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayedand theoperation isbarred

• The cross connection of the radio channel to any other member of the ConnectGroup (radio channel or telephone line), is barred. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- ILLEGAL CONNECT is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The radio channel is Selected by any other operator and:

The system is not configured to Select channels in another operator’s Connect,

or

You are not privileged to Select a channel Selected by other operators.

• The text OPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed inmessage area and theoperation is barred.

• The radio channel is part of another operator’s Connect Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The radio channel is part of your other Connect Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The radio channel is part of your own Combine Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The radio channel has Talkthrough applied by any other operator. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The radio channel is disabled and you are not enabled to access disabled radiochannels. Themessage OPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL DISABLED is displayed andthe operation is barred.

• The connect group already contains a talkgroup and the option to bar a radio toconnect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The messageCONNECT BARRED -- TALKGROUP IN GROUP is displayed and the operation isbarred.

If the radio is successfully added to the Connect Group the radio is Selected, and themessage INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed. TheRadioChannel key attributes and legendare also changed to indicate that they are part of theConnectGroup. TheRadioChannel keyattributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that the channel is busy andpart of your Connect Group.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.4.2 Removing a Radio from a Connect Group

Touching a Monitored or Selected Radio Channel key while a Connect Group is openremoves the radio from the group.

If the radio channel is successfully removed from the Connect Group the messageOUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed.

The Radio Channel key attributes and legend are also changed to indicate that they are nolonger part of the group. The radio state is changed toMonitored on removal from the group.The Radio Channel key attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate thatthe channel is no longer busy and part of your Connect Group.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.5 Adding and Removing Talkgroups to/from a Connect Group

7.2.5.1 Adding Talkgroups to a Group

Touching a Talkgroup key while the Connect Group is open adds that talkgroup to theConnect Group. The talkgroup is not added to the group if any of the following conditions aretrue:

• The Connect Group already contains the maximum number of members. Themessage OPERATION DENIED -- GROUP FULL is displayed and the operation isbarred.

• The Connect Group already contains a telephone line whose cross connection tothis talkgroup is barred. The message OPERATION DENIED -- ILLEGAL CONNECT isdisplayed and the operation is barred.

• The Talkgroup key represents a Migration Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- MIGRATION GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The talkgroup is Selected by any other operator. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The talkgroup is part of another operator’s Connect Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The talkgroup is part of your other Connect Group. The messageOPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed and the operation is barred.

• The request is rejected by the radio system (e.g., talkgroup is part of a RemoteDataTerminal (RDT) patch group or is configured not to support patch group functionalityin the radio system configuration). The operation is barred and the messageOPERATION DENIED -- TALKGROUP BUSY is displayed.

• Theconnect groupalready containsa telephoneand theoption tobara telephone toconnect to a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The messageCONNECT BARRED -- TELEPHONE IN GROUP is displayedand theoperation is barred.

• The connect group already contains a radio and the option to bar a radio to connectto a talkgroup has been enabled by the System Manager. The messageCONNECT BARRED -- RADIO IN GROUP is displayed and the operation is barred.

If the talkgroup is successfully added to the Connect Group, the talkgroup key state isSelected and themessage INTO CONNECT GROUP is displayed. TheTalkgroup key attributesand legend are also changed to indicate that they are part of the Connect Group. TheTalkgroup key attributes and legend for all other operators change to indicate that thetalkgroup is busy and part of your Connect Group.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.5.2 Removing a Talkgroup from a Connect Group

Touching a selected Talkgroup key while a Connect Group is open removes the talkgroupfrom the Connect Group.

If the talkgroup is successfully removed from the Connect Group the messageOUT OF CONNECT GROUP is displayed, and the talkgroup key’s attributes and legendarealsochanged to indicate that they are no longer part of the group. The talkgroup key statechanges toMonitored on removal from the group. The Talkgroup key’s attributes and legendfor all other operators change to indicate that the talkgroup is no longer busy and part of yourConnect Group.

7.2.6 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Radios in Groups

A User Type can be enabled by system configuration to Select/Deselect andMonitor/Demonitor radio channels which are part of their Connect Group(s), withoutremoving the channel from the group.

Note: Availability of this is dependent on your system’s specification.

Thepermittedoperations dependon theopen/closed status of theConnectGroupas follows:

7.2.6.1 Monitor and Select for Closed Groups

Radio channels that are part of a closed Connect Group can be Monitored, Selected andDeselected, without removing them from the group, i.e.,

• Touching a Preselected Channel key Monitors the channel

• Touching a Monitored Channel key Selects the channel

• Touching a Selected Channel key Deselects the channel (back to Monitored)

7.2.6.2 Monitor and Select for Open Groups

If you are enabled to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group, thenradio channels that are part of an open Connect Group can be Demonitored, Monitored andSelected without removing them from the group as follows:

• A Preselected (demonitored) channel that is part of the group can be Selected bytouching the Channel key

• A Monitored channel that is part of the group can be Demonitored by first touchingthe DEMON/DESEL key followed by the Channel key

• A Selected channel that is part of the group can be Deselected (monitored) bytouching the Channel key

If you are not enabled (by configuration) to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an openConnect Group, then touching the DEMON/DESEL followed by the Channel key, while aConnect Group is open is an error, and the message OPERATION DENIED -- CONNECT OPEN isdisplayed.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.6.3 DEMON/DESEL Function Key Operation and Connect

If you are not enabled to Demonitor/Deselect radio channels in an open Connect Group,touching a Radio Channel key that is part of an open Connect Group while theDEMON/DESEL function key is ‘primed’ is an error, and the messageOPERATION DENIED -- CHANNEL BUSY is displayed.

If youareenabled toDemonitor/Deselect radio channels inanopenConnectGroup, touchingthe DEMON/DESEL function key primes the key as normal, and the messageCHOOSE A CHANNEL is displayed.

When the DEMON/DESEL key is primed, touching a radio channel key that is part of aConnect Group, initiates the following actions:

Channel State Open Group Action Closed Group Action

Preselected None None

Monitored Demonitor channel Demonitor channel

Selected Deselect channel None

If you are enabled toDemonitor radio channels in an openConnectGroup, all radio channelsin either an open or closed Connect Group can be Demonitored by touching the ConnectGroup key while the DEMON/DESEL key is primed.

If you are enabled to Demonitor radio channels in an openConnect Group, all Selected radiochannels (including those in an open or closed Connect Group) can be Deselected bytouching the DEMON/DESEL key twice, as normal.

7.2.7 Select/Deselect and Monitor/Demonitor Talkgroups in Groups

In an open Connect Group the only valid talkgroup state is ‘Selected’. In a closed ConnectGroup the only valid talkgroup state is ‘Monitored’. Unlike radio channels it is not possible tochange the Selected or Monitored state in open or closed Connect Groups.

7.2.8 Talkthrough and Connect Groups

You can apply (SystemManager configurable) Talkthrough to any radio channel in your openConnect Group, if Talkthrough is enabled for the channel. You can remove Talkthrough fromany channel of your open Connect Group that has Talkthrough applied. Talkthrough can beapplied to any number of channels (that have Talkthrough enabled capability) in your openConnect Group.

You cannot apply Talkthrough to channels in your closed Connect Group, or channels in anyother operator’s Connect Group (open or closed). The message INVALID OPERATION isdisplayed, and the function cancelled.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.2.9 Operator Push-To-Talk Override.

When you activate PTT (either the foot switch or the TX screen key) with an open ConnectGroup, the conference is temporarily overridden and the operator’s microphone is routed toall telephones, Selected talkgroups and Selected radios in the group.

When youactivatePTTwith a closedConnectGroup, yourmicrophone is only routed to radiochannels in the closed Connect Group that have been Selected. Your microphone is notrouted to any talkgroups in the Connect Group.

7.2.10 Open Connect Group Restrictions

While you have an open Connect Group, the functions that are accessible are restricted. If afunction key that has such a restriction is touched, the message INVALID OPERATION isdisplayed.

7.2.11 Individual Call Restriction

It is only possible to put a single telephone call into a Connect Group with a single individualcall. No other permutations involving individual calls are permitted. It is not possible to closea Connect Group containing a single telephone line and individual call.

7.2.12 Connect Group Security

Note: Availability of this functionality is dependent on your system’s specification (factoryconfigurable option).

If you have a talkgroup in a Connect Group with either a radio or a telephone, thencommunications on that talkgroup could be unsecure. All operators are informed of this by aborder text colour change on the unsecure Talkgroup key. The border colour is configurableby the System Manager. The Connect Group legend ‘C’ is substituted with ‘xsecC’.

Helpful HintIf your terminal fails while you have active Connect Groups, an alarmevent is generated. Any telephone lines in your Connect Groups areplaced onHold. Any radio channels or talkgroups in yourConnectGroupsare returned to the Preselected state.

CCI port failure results in the relevant talkgroup(s) being removed from theConnect Group and returned to the Preselected state.



7 -- 22Amb_7.3_STANDARD_INTERCOME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.3 Operator Intercom

Important:This chapter reflects standard intercom functionality. If your system supports GroupPartitioning functionality, refer to Sections 7.4, 8.15 and 8.16.

7.3.1 Making an Intercom Call to Other Users

To talk to another user:

a) Put any Selected radios/talkgroups to Monitored.

b) Touch the INTERCOM key.

The key changes to its active colour and a page of logged on users is displayed.Use the PREV and NEXT page keys to display other users when there are morethan 12 operator terminals at the site.

The status of all logged on users is shown, for example

You can select only terminals which are listed asTALKING

FREE



7 -- 23Amb_7.3_STANDARD_INTERCOM E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

c) Choose an entry on the page using the mouse or by touching the appropriateline. As with the touch keys, the choice is made when you lift your finger fromthe screen. The line changes colour indicating the choice you have made.

After touching the CALL key, the message

is displayed. When the call is accepted by that user

is displayed. You can now talk to them.

d) If youwish, you can quit the Intercom selection screen and return to the previ-ous screen by touching the QUIT key.

INTERCOM CALLING

INTERCOM CONNECTED

Helpful HintThe functions available to you are limited to RADIO ALARM, PAGER,TELDIR (but not dialling),H/SETSPKR,H/SETVOLandMICOFF.Whenyou touch the INTERCOM key:

• Unanswered calls dialled by you are cleared

• The key of any open telephone line is automaticallyput into the Hold condition

7.3.2 Receiving an Internal Intercom Call

The INTERCOM keywill flashwhenanother user tries to establishan intercomcon-nectionwith you and the normal incoming call alarmmay sound (depending on fac-tory configured options). Touch the key to accept the call.

7.3.3 Clearing an Internal Intercom Call

Note: If the Intercom screen is not displayed, youwill need to touch the INTERCOM key before youcan clear an intercom call.

Either the calling or called user can terminate the call using the CLR ICOM key.Touch the key to clear any intercom call (or to cancel any call you are setting up).

When you cancel or clear a call, the message

is displayed in the message area.INTERCOM DISCONNECTED



7 -- 24Amb_7.3_STANDARD_INTERCOME SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.3.4 Setting Up An Operator Conference

e) Carry out only steps a) to b) of the procedure for an internal intercom call asdescribed in Section 7.3.1.

f) Select another operator from the list by touching their entry line. Thisconnects the new operator into the group.

Helpful HintSimultaneously:

• Unanswered calls dialled will be cleared

• The keys of any open telephone line will automati-cally be put into the Hold condition

No connected lines will be heard in the headset, but all participants in thegroup will be able to talk to each other.

The functions available to operators in the group are limited to RADIOALARM, PAGER, TEL DIR (but not dialling), H/SET SPKR, H/SET VOLand MIC OFF.

Any of the users already in the conference can add another, but users notinvolved cannot invite themselves in.



7 -- 25Amb_7.4_PARTITIONED_INTERCOM_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.4 Operator Intercom (Partitioned)

Note: Availability and screen position of the Internal Intercom screen keys is dependent on yoursystem’s specification.

This chapter reflects partitioned intercom functionality. If your system supports GroupPartitioning functionality, this chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and8.16.

The Internal Intercom facility provides a conferencing facility for operators connected to thesameDS2000 site. Each operator’smicrophone is routed to the headset of each of the otheroperators in the conference.

7.4.1 Internal Intercom Screen

Touching the INTERCOM key invokes the Internal Intercom screen which displaysa list containinganentry lineof information for each loggedonoperator in thatgroupas shown below.

Specific to Internal Intercom is the status range, whereONE status from the following table isdisplayed on an entry line at one time:--



7 -- 26Amb_7.4_PARTITIONED_INTERCOM_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Dispayed Status Status Description

FREE User is available

OFF MAIN The user is logged on but off Main Screen and is therefore unavailable

TALKING CXX User is in an intercom call, conference number CXX(XX = Conference number)

CALLING XXX User is calling terminal number XXX and is therefore busy

CALLED BY XXX User is being called by terminal XXX and is therefore busy

INTRUDE ON XXX User is intruding upon terminal XXX

INTRUDE BY XXX User is being intruded upon by terminal XXX

TX BCAST The user is broadcasting to members in the same group

RX BCAST XXX The user is being broadcast to by a member in the same group

7.4.2 Function Keys

When the Internal Intercom screen is invoked and there are no intercom calls being made orreceived the only enabled function key is the BCAST GRP key.

After an operator list entry has been primed the CALL key becomes enabled. Touching theCALL key initiates the call to the chosen operator.

Touch the INTRD key to force an audio connection to an operator who does not respond to anintercom call.

Touch the CLR ICOM key to clear from an active intercom connection or to cancel calling.

Touch the BCAST GRP key to speak to other operators within the same group, withoutmaking an intercom call. Operators cannot reply.

As other operators log on/log off theREFRESH key will be enabled and flash to indicate this.Touching the active REFRESH key updates your display to include/exclude those entries.

Touch the QUIT key to return to the Main (default) screen.

7.4.3 Making an Internal Intercom Call

To connect to an operator, choose theGroup the operator is amember of by scrolling throughthe tabs at the top of the display. (Non logged on terminals are not displayed).

Touching the line of the required operator highlights the operator entry andenables theCALLkey.

To initiate the call, touch the CALL key.

The message

is displayed in yourmessage area. The chosen called operatormay be deselectedby retouching the line to cancel or by touching another list entry.

If the required operator is free, the status display changes and the INTERCOM keyat the called position flashes indicating a connection request pending. The caller isdisplayed as ‘‘CALLING XXX’’ and the operator being called is displayed as‘‘CALLED BY XXX’’.

Should you need to join additional operators to the same intercom call repeat theprocess of priming the INTERCOM key and then choosing another operatorposition. Typically a maximum of five operators may be joined in the call.

INTERCOM CALL SENT



7 -- 27Amb_7.4_PARTITIONED_INTERCOM_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

7.4.4 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call Request

The CLR ICOM key is enabled when the CALL key is primed and a call request is sent.

To cancel the call before it is answered, touch the CLR ICOM key.

The INTERCOM key reverts to its idle state and the message

is displayed at the called terminal.INTERCOM CANCELLED

7.4.5 Taking an Internal Intercom Call

Touch the flashing INTERCOM key to accept the intercom call.

The message

is displayed in your message area. The Internal Intercom screen list entry showsthestatusas ‘‘TALKING’’ and ‘‘CXX’’whereXX is theconferencenumberallocated.

If a telephoneor individual call is in progress on the calledposition it is automaticallyput on Hold when the intercom call is answered. If a radio channel or talkgroup isSelected it will need to be Deselected, although it can still be Monitored, before anintercom call can be accepted.

INTERCOM CONNECTED

7.4.6 Cancelling an Internal Intercom Call

An Internal Intercom call is cancelled when any of the following actions are taken:

a) To cancel the active call, touch the CLR ICOM key. The audio is disconnectedand the INTERCOM key reverts to its idle state and the message

is displayed to other users in the conference and the status of the diconnecteduser(s) reverts to ‘‘FREE’’

b) Accepting a telephone call or removing a call from Hold

c) Making an Outgoing telephone call

d) Accepting an individual call or taking an individual call from hold

e) Making an individual call

f) Selecting a radio or talkgroup

g) Priming and beginning another function, e.g., Mimic or Telephone Eavesdrop

Note: The last user in a conference is automatically cleared from theconference when all other parties have cleared their intercom calls.

INTERCOM CANCELLED



7 -- 28Amb_7.4_PARTITIONED_INTERCOM_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A


Chapter 8

Miscellaneous

VOLUME 1MISCELLANEOUS


8 -- 2Amb_8.0_MISCE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Amendment Record



SS 25.04.06

B Changes to LocalRecording -- Instant Replay

SS 24.06.06




SS 01/11/07



8 -- 3Amb_8.0_MISC E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Contents

8.1 Local Recording -- Instant Replay 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.1 Introduction 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.2 Replay Keys 8 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.3 Accessing Another Operator Terminal’s Recording 8 -- 6. . . . . . . . .8.1.4 Types of Call Recorded 8 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5 Recording Precedence 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.5.1 Recording Start and Stop 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5.2 Emergency Events 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.5.3 Examples 8 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.6 Replaying a Recording 8 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.6.1 Screen Description 8 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1.6.2 Screen Function 8 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.7 Cancelling a Replay 8 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications 8 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms 8 -- 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.3 New PIN or Password 8 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3.1 Changing Your PIN or Password 8 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels 8 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5 Call Supervisor (Console Request) 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.5.1 Introduction 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5.2 Method of Operation 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.5.2.1 Making a Call Supervisor Request 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5.2.2 Confirming a Call Supervisor Request 8 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.6 Area Set Up 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.1 Introduction 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.2 Selecting Functional Areas 8 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.3 Rearranging Functional Area Positions 8 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6.4 Deselecting Functional Areas 8 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.7 Remote Access 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.1 Introduction 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.2 Accessing the Remote Site 8 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7.3 Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site 8 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.1 Introduction 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.2 Method of Operation 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.3 Alphanumeric Keypad 8 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.8.4 Numeric Keypad 8 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9 Operator Note Pad 8 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9.1 Operator Note Pad List 8 -- 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9.1.1 Searching 8 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.9.1.2 New Note 8 -- 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10 System Partitioning 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1 Operator Groups Overwiew 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.1.1 Operator Terminal Positions 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.2 Legacy Radios 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.3 Talkgroups 8 -- 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



8 -- 4Amb_8.0_MISCE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.10.1.4 Functional Areas 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.5 ICCS Sites 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.6 Telephone Lines 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.7 Telephone Extensions 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.1.8 Telephone Groups 8 -- 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.2 Operator Selection 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.3 Call Supervisor Segregation 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10.4 Fault Message Segregation 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10.4.1 Critical Fault Log Filtering 8 -- 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.11.1 Functional Overview 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.1 Operator Group 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.2 Terminal Identifier 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.3 User Name 8 -- 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.4 Status 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.5 Other Terminal Number 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.1.6 Activity Icon 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.11.2 Function Keys 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.2.1 Refresh Key 8 -- 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.11.2.2 Priming an Operator 8 -- 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.12 Browser 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12.1 Introduction 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.12.2 Browser Screen 8 -- 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



8 -- 5Amb_8.1_LOCAL RECORDING_3 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1 Local Recording -- Instant Replay

Important:This section reflects local recording functionality with Group Partitioning. If your systemsupports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction withSections 8.15 and 8.16.

8.1.1 Introduction

This operator recording function allows you to playback your own and other operators’recordings (depending on your access rights) made on a secure external audio server. Allrecordings are available for simultaneous playback at any terminal, subject to configurablepermissions, and recordings in progress are available for playback within a few seconds ofrecording initiation. Playback start location can be specified to within a few seconds.

Recording is performed at the operator position and streamed to an audio server. Anythingspoken over the Tannoy (if used) is not recorded.

During the recording of telephone conversations a Recording Warn Tone, as defined in BS6305:1982, is routed to all parties.

8.1.2 Replay Keys

The instant replay function can be accessed by either of the following methods:

If you have the access rights to replay recordings from other terminals, touch theINST REPL key.INST

REPL

If displayed, theREPL LAST (or LASTMSG) key provides an immediate replay ofyour last recorded message without the need to touch the START/STOP key.REPL

LAST



8 -- 6Amb_8.1_LOCAL RECORDING_3E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1.3 Accessing Another Operator Terminal’s Recording

If you use the INST REPL key the Terminal Select screen is invoked in the General WorkArea as shown below;

Function and chosen group name

Group listing -- All chosen

Operator position chosen

Replay key enabled

To listen to recordings from a specific operator, choose the operator position. If you have theaccess rights this enables the REPLAY function key. Touching this key will access theRecorder Replay List Screen for that terminal.

If access to other terminal local recorders is not allowed then touching the INSTREPL keywillimmediately display the Recorder Replay List Screen for your personal recordings.

Touching theLASTMSG key also immediately displays theRecorder Replay List Screen foryour personal recordings, and, as with the above, the latest recording will be preselected.Playback of this recording will start immediately.

Listening to another operator’s recordings does not preclude an operator listening to thesame recording.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1.4 Types of Call Recorded

Call recording is triggered by the following actions:

a) Emergency Roadside Telephone (VAIU Aux Input)

b) Telephone

S Incoming or outgoing call

S Call monitored

S Call taken from being on hold

c) Select Radio or Select Talkgroup

S Radio channel selected

S Talkgroup selected

d) Intercom (optional)

S Intercom call connected

e) Ambient Listen

S Start ambient listen

f) Individual Call

S Connected -- incoming or outgoing

S Call unheld

g) Monitored Radio or Monitored Talkgroup (optional)

S PTT start (other console user)

S Channel Rx Audio on

S Incoming talkgroup call start

Recording ceases when the call type is cleared, held, deselected or demonitored asappropriate.

These calls will be identified in the Recorder Replay List screen as follows:

a) ERT

b) Telephone

c) Sel Radio

d) Indiv Call

e) Ambient

f) Intercom

g) Mon Radio




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1.5 Recording Precedence

If more than one event is generated at an operator terminal the resulting recording will betagged with the highest precedence call type. The following list shows the order ofprecedence for these call types, with 1 highest and 6 lowest:

1) ERT

2) Telephone

3) Select Radio or select talkgroup

4) Individual Call

5) Ambient Listen

6) Intercom

7) Monitored Radio or Monitored talkgroup

8.1.5.1 Recording Start and Stop

For each of the trigger events listed above, a recording start instruction is generated. If arecording is already in progress when a new start instruction is generated, the followingconditions determine whether the current recording continues or if it is stopped and a newrecording is started:

S Higher precedence call type -- the current recording is stopped and a newrecording created with the new call type.

S Same call type -- the recording will continue, i.e. there will be a single audio recordcoveringmore than one trigger event. The recordingwill continue until all ‘samecalltype’ triggers have completed.

S Lower precedence call type -- the recording will continue with the same call typetag, i.e., there will be a single audio record covering more than one trigger event. Ifthis event ends before the initial trigger event, the recording will continue until theinitial trigger event ends. If the higher precedence event ends first, a new recordingwill be started for the lower precedence event.

8.1.5.2 Emergency Events

Any recordings which start during an emergency, or which are already in progress, will betaggedwith an emergency flag. These recordings are indicated on theRecorder Replay Listscreen using the text EMG in the top right hand corner of the relevant list item.

8.1.5.3 Examples

Event Audio Recording TagIncoming telephone call Starts Telephone

Operator monitors radio Continues Telephone

Operator demonitors radio Continues Telephone

Telephone call ends Stops Telephone

Example 1: Multiple trigger events resulting in a single audio recording




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Event Audio Recording TagIncoming telephone call Starts Telephone

Operator monitors radio Continues Telephone

Telephone call ends Continues

New recording starts

Telephone

Mon Radio

Operator demonitors radio Stops Mon Radio

Example 2: Multiple trigger events resulting in multiple audio recordings

Event Audio Recording TagOperator monitors radio Starts Mon Radio

Incoming telephone call Original recording stops


Mon Radio

Telephone

Operator demonitors radio Continues Telephone

Telephone call ends Stops Telephone

Example 3: Higher precedence event resulting in multiple audio recordings

Event Audio Recording Tag

Emergency Alarm handledby Operator

Started Selected Radio, EMG

Aux Input switch enabled Original recording stops


Selected Radio, EMG

ERT (not EMG)

Aux Input switch disabled Original recording stops


ERT (not EMG)

Selected Radio, EMG

Operator demonitors radio Original recording stops


Selected Radio, EMG

Selected RadioOperator deselects andthen demonitors Talkgroup

Stops Selected Radio

Example 4: ERT takes precedence over Selected Talkgroup




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1.6 Replaying a Recording

8.1.6.1 Screen Description

The Recorder Replay List screen occupies the General Work Area and is headed with theoperator terminal identity.

Below the heading is a list of the recordings available. Each recording is shown with:

S Call type

S Time of recording -- in the format DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS

S Duration -- in the format MM:SS, updated at one second intervals until recordingstops

S Activity indicator -- this consists of an icon indicating the activity, if any, for that entry.Only the selected entry and/or the entry with recording in progress will have an icondisplayed. The icons displayed are as follows:

This icon indicates recording in progress. This activity indicatoroverrides the playback indicator if the same recording is bothrecording and being played back at the same time.

This icon indicates that recording is selected but playback stopped.The same icon is used on the Stop button and also in the playbackstatus areabelow the slider bar. N.B., this activity indicatorwill not bedisplayed if the entry being played back is still recording (seeabove).

This icon indicates playback in progress. The same icon is used onthe Play button and also in the playback status area below the sliderbar. N.B., this activity indicator will not bedisplayed if the entry beingplayed back is still recording (see above).

This icon indicates playback paused. The same icon is used on thePlay button and also in the playback status area below the slider bar.N.B., this activity indicator will not be displayed if the entry beingplayed back is still recording (see above).

S Emergency -- if the recording is flagged as an Emergency this will be indicated by‘EMG’ being displayed in the upper right hand corner of the entry

The recordings are ordered chronologicallywith themost recent first. The selected recordingis shown in analternate colour. Whenanentry is in playback or pausedmode all entries in thelist become disabled -- this is to prevent accidental selection of another entry which wouldresult in the termination of the current playback.

When a recording is selected, certain functions are available to control playback of theindividual recording. These are identified and explained as follows:




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

This key is used to start the recorder replaying the currently selectedmessage. While replaying it can be used to pause playback. Thekey’s attributes reflect the replay state, i.e., it shows the Play iconwhile stopped or paused, and the pause icon while replaying.

This key is used to stop playback and return to the start of therecording. It is disabled when playback is stopped and enabledduring playback or when paused.

This key moves the replay forwards by a factory configured amount.The elapsed time field updates to reflect the new position in therecording and playback continues from this point. At the end of aselected recording this key will not be enabled.

This key moves the replay backwards by a factory configuredamount. The elapsed time field updates to reflect thenew position inthe recordingandplayback continues from this point. At thestart of aselected recording this key will not be enabled.

This bar acts as both a display and a position selection mechanism.The horizontal bar is marked with start and end times (in minutes andseconds) to depict the duration of the call.

While playing is in progress a cursor on the bar indicates the positionwithin the message presently being heard.

If currently replaying, pausedor stopped the playback position canbechanged by clicking on the slider bar at the required point. Theelapsed time field updates to reflect the new position in the recordingand playback continues from this point.

Slider Bar

This display--only area indicates the current playback status using anicon (see above) plus text (’Stopped’, ’Playing’, ’Paused’). Below thisis displayed two time values in the format MM:SS/MM:SS; the firstvalue is theelapsed timesinceplayback started, and the second is theduration of the currently selected recording.

Playback Status

8.1.6.2 Screen Function

When the screen is displayed, all recordings available to youare shown in a scrollable listwiththe most recent at the top. The most recent recording is preselected by default.

Recording in progress is indicated by the ‘Recording in Progress’ icon in the activity indicatorcolumn of the list, and the duration value is periodically updated. New recordings will beadded to the list shortly after they begin. Recordings in progress can be played back. N.B., ifthis entry is selected for playback the activity indicator will still indicate recording rather thanplayback activity.

Whena recording in the list is selected thePlay andFast Forwardsbuttons, and the sliderbar,will become active. At the same time the slider bar will return to the start position and thePlaybackStatus areawill indicateStopped, elapsed time is initialised to zero and thedurationvalue set to the duration of the selected recording.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Thedatabase canbeenabled to allowyou to only play recordingsmadeonyour own recordersince you last logged on. As you may have logged off accidentally or been forced to log off,the timeof the last log onwill be givenas from the timeof your first log on. If you select (touch)a recording in the list that is earlier than the last log on time, then all functionality will bedisabled for this entry. This option does not prevent you accessing other terminal localrecorders if you have the required access rights.

The following screen shows the Recorder List with a recording preselected:

Replay is started by touching the PLAY key. During playback the key label changes to thepause icon and ‘Playing’ is displayed in the Playback Status area. Replay is paused bytouching thePLAY key again, whereupon its label changes back to theplay iconand ‘Paused’is displayed in the Playback Status area. During playback, the slider bar and elapsed timeindicators are updated.

The playback position of the selected recording can also be adjusted while stopped, pausedor during playback using the slider bar or the REWIND and FAST FORWARDS keys;elapsed time will be adjusted accordingly.

TheREWIND key is not enabled at the start of a recording and only becomes available whenthe recording playback has advancedpast one second. This keywill becomeenabled even ifthe recording is less than the configurable skip duration.

The FAST FORWARDS key becomes disabled at the end of a recording and only becomesenabled again when the recording has been rewound by at least one second. This key willbecome enabled even if the recording is less than the configurable skip duration.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

The following illustrations show the Audio Replay screen during playback and then playbackpaused:




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Playback stops automatically at the end of the recording or by use of the STOP key. Whenplayback is stopped, either automatically or by you, the playback position returns to the startof the recording, i.e., the PLAY key shows the play icon, the slider bar cursor returns to thestart position, and the elapsed time resets to 00:00.

If no recording is selected, i.e., whenanempty list is displayed, all playback controls (SLIDERBAR, PLAY, STOP, REWIND and FAST FORWARDS) are unavailable and greyed--out(disabled). The playback status area indicates stopped, with time values zero--ed.

The following shows the Recorder Replay list screen with an empty list:

8.1.7 Cancelling a Replay

If the Recorder Replay List screen is exited, e.g., while changing screens, any replay activityis stopped.

8.1.8 Recording State Icon

If, on your system the Main Screen contains a Status Bar then an icon will be displayedshowing the current recording state. Two possible states can be displayed “Recording” or“Idle”.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.1.9 VAIU Aux Input Recording

TheVAIUwill detect that external analogue audio is available at the Aux Input socket when aswitch connected to this socket is closed. The VAIU will signal that audio is available at AuxInput and the audio will then be routed through and recorded. This recording will have a CallType of ERT.

At the same time all other audio in the VAIU will be de--routed. This means that the ERTrecording will contain only audio from the Aux Input.

ERT recordings have the highest precedence so when the Aux Input switch is activated anyother recording currently in progress will be stopped and a new recording started.

If, for example, a Talkgroup is selected either before or during an ERT recording but has notbeen deselected in themeantime, thenwhen the ERT recording ends a new recordingwill bestarted with the appropriate call type, in this case Sel Radio. If, however, the TalkGroup isdeselected/demonitored, no new recording will be started when the ERT recording ends.

If an Emergency Alarm is handled by the operator either before or during the ERT recordingthe EMG tag will not be set on the ERT recording. Recordings either side of the ERTrecording will have the EMG tag set if the alarm is active at that time. SeeExample 4 above.

8.1.10 Terminal Override Considerations

During Terminal Override all audio for the overridden OP’s headset primary ear is redirectedto the overriding OPs’ terminal position. Similarly, microphone audio at the overriding OP’sterminal position is routed to resources selected on the overridden OP.

8.1.10.1 Audio Recording

If audio is being recorded at an overriding operator position it will be stored on the server forthat OP and not for the overridden operator position. Eg. if an operator at position threeoverrides operator position four the recording is labelled for operator position three as that iswhere theaudio is recordedand it will contain operator position three’s voice, not theoperatorat position four’s.

If audio is being recordedat anoperator positionwhen that operator position is overridden therecording is stopped at the overridden operator position and restarted at the overridingoperator position.

If audio is being recorded at the overriding operator position when Terminal Override iscancelled the recording is stopped at the overriding operator position and restarted at theoverridden operator position.

8.1.10.2 Audio Replaying

During Terminal Override audio recordings selected for playback will be redirected to theoverriding operator position’s headset primary ear. No audio will be routed to the overriddenoperator position.

If audio is being replayedat anoperator positionwhen that operator position is overridden theplayback is stopped at the overridden operator position. Playback at the overriding operatorposition will not be restarted unless that operator position requests it.

If audio is being replayed at an overriding operator position when that operator positioncancels Terminal Override the playback is stopped at the overriding operator position.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Playback at theoverriddenoperator positionoperator positionwill not be restarted unless thatoperator position requests it.

8.1.10.3 Audio Replay Recording List

If an overriding operator position chooses Inst Repl you will either get the Terminal Selectionscreen, if the overridden operator position has the appropriate privileges, or you will get a listof recordings created by the yourself.

If the overriddenoperator position has access to other operator position’s recordings then theoverriding operator position will be able to replay recordings made by themselves or theoverridden operator position. This will be the case even if the overriding operator positiondoes not have the appropriate privileges.

If the overriddenoperator position only has access to their own recordings then theoverridingoperator position will only be able to see recordings made by themselves, i.e. the overridingoperator position. This will be the case even if the overriding operator position has theappropriate privilege.

Recordings created during Terminal Override will be listed under the overriding operatorpositions id.


is displayed in the message area, and no further action taken if replay isattempted while primary audio is routed.

The message

is displayedandno futher action taken if replay is attemptedand theAudioServer is not available.

The message

is displayed and no further action taken if replay is attempted if theoperator has not been configured correctly on the Audio Server.

INVALID OPERATION -- AUDIO ROUTED

INVALID OPERATION -- AUDIO SERVER UNAVAILABLE

AUDIO SERVER LOGON FAILURE



8 -- 17Amb_8.2_ANCIL CONT & ALARMS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.2 Ancillary Controls and Alarm Indications

Note: Availability and screen position of the ANCIL key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

Touch the ANCIL key to display the Ancillary Control screen. This allows you toremotely control doors, gates, CCTV cameras, etc, and to accept alarms.

Many of theAncillary keys are non-latching (i.e., they operate only when your fingeris on the key). Someof theAncillary keysmay also have been configured to directlyaccess telephone lines.

Only one user at a time may access each group of controls. The user’s terminalnumber will appear on the keys at the other terminals.

Note: The ANCIL keys automatically change to the ‘Pending’ state when there are anyunacknowledgedancillary inputs (e.g., Alarms/Inputs fromother equipment connected to theAncillary function, see section 8.2.3).

Important:The Ancillary keys shown in this section are examples and will vary from those available atyour site. The System Manager will set up the screen according to the controlled andmonitored equipment.



8 -- 18Amb_8.2_ANCIL CONT & ALARMSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.2.1 Ancillary Key Alarms

When an ancillary input signal is received (e.g., alarm), the ANCIL key on the MainScreen changes to its Active state. Touch the key to display the Ancillary screen in theGeneral Work Area.

Next, touch the ALARM key to display the individual Alarm keys screen.

The relevant keywill be in its Pending state; touch the key to acknowledge the alarm. The keywill change to its Active state.

Follow local site procedures to ensure that appropriate action is taken to deal with the causeof the alarm. The key will return to its Idle state when the Alarm condition has been removed.

Use the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Main Ancillary page.

Use the QUIT key to return to the Main Telephone page.



8 -- 19Amb_8.3_CHANGE PIN_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.3 New PIN or Password

Note: Availability of this functionality is dependent on your system. You may have either option orboth.

8.3.1 Changing Your PIN or Password

If one of these keys is displayed on thePreselectionmenu, you can use it to changeyour PIN or Password.

When you touch the appropriate key the Preselection screen is replaced by theChange Pin or Change Password screen.

Enter your new PIN/Password by touching the required characters on the keypad.Four or five digits are usually used for a PIN, and six alphanumeric characters for aPassword. Checkwith the SystemManager to see if your site has been configuredto make use of fewer digits or characters.

When you have entered your new PIN/Password correctly, touch the ENTER keyfor it to be validated.

The message

or

is displayed in the message area. You must enter your new PIN/Password exactlyas the first time. The new characters will only be accepted if both entries are ident-ical.

Once the new PIN or Password is accepted, the message

or

is displayed and the Preselections menu screen will be displayed. The accessauthority of your old PIN/Password will be transferred to the new one.

PLEASE ENTER NEW PIN AGAIN

PLEASE RE--ENTER NEW PASSWORD

PIN ACCEPTED : VALID AT LOG ON

PASSWORD OK; VALID AT LOG ON

Helpful HintIf the two entries you made do not match, the message --

or

will be displayed. When a number is displayed on the NEW PIN or NEWPASSWD key, then another user is accessing this facility. Youwill see themessage

displayed and no further action can be taken until they finish. If the newPIN/Passwordcoincideswithanother that is already inuse, themessage

or

is displayed. The owner of the compromised PIN/Password will then beprompted to change it when they next log on.

PIN ENTRIES DO NOT MATCH : RE--ENTER PIN

PASSWORDS DO NOT MATCH : RE--ENTER

ACCESS DENIED -- IN USE BY OP XX

PIN NOT ACCEPTED . RE--ENTER PIN

PASSWORD NOT ACCEPTED . RE--ENTER PASSWORD



8 -- 20Amb_8.3_CHANGE PIN_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

If you decide not to change your PIN/Password, touch theQUIT key to return to thePreselection screen.

Use the BACKSPACE key to delete the last character entered.

Use the CLEAR key to delete all the characters entered.



8 -- 21Amb_8.4_H/SET VOL E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.4 Headset and Loudspeaker Volume Levels

Note: Availability and screen position of the H/SET VOL key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

If you do not have a headset volume control on the speaker, the volume level at your terminalautomatically sets itself to 75% of the system value. An on-screen headset volume controland loudspeaker control is provided, and is accessed via the H/SET VOL key.

Touch the H/SET VOL key and the Volume Control screen is invoked in the GeneralWork Area of the screen; you can set the volume level of the audio in your headsetand/or the volume level to the loudspeaker.

Adjust the volume to the required level by touching the coloured ‘slider’ and dragging yourfinger to the new setting. When you remove your finger, the level will lock at that setting.

Certain installations have dual-purpose double headsets, with radio on one earpiece andtelephone in the other. In these cases, two sliders and scales are displayed, one for radio andone for telephone.



8 -- 22Amb_8.4_H/SET VOLE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Use thePREVDSPLY key to return to the previous screen, or theQUIT key to returnto the default Main Screen.

Helpful HintThe system is set up to prevent you from reducing the audio level below25%.

Whenasystemallows volumeadjustment via theVAIUand theon--screencontrols, the on--screen settings should be set to 100% and theadjustments made thereafter at the VAIU.



8 -- 23Amb_8.5_CONSOLE REQUEST E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.5 Call Supervisor (Console Request)

Note: Availability and screen position of the CALL SUP key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

Important:This chapter reflects standard call supervisor functionality. If your system supports GroupPartitioning functionality, this Section should be read in conjunction with sections 8.16 and8.17.

8.5.1 Introduction

The CALL SUP key calls the Supervisor wherever they are logged on; it is used to alertsupervisors that you want their attention. This function does not support speech thereforeexisting audio links are to be used for speech, e.g., Internal Intercom or Telephone Monitorfacility.

When you touch this key it causes the equivalent key to flash on the Supervisor’s screen.

8.5.2 Method of Operation

8.5.2.1 Making a Call Supervisor Request

Touch the CALL SUP key. The corresponding key will flash on the desk(s) nominatedby the SystemManager to receiveCALL SUP request calls. Your terminal number willbe displayed on their key to identify the calling terminal.The message

is displayed in your message area.CALL SUPERVISOR ACTIVE

8.5.2.2 Confirming a Call Supervisor Request

If you are a receiver of call requests, i.e., supervisor, when the CALL SUP keyflashes, touch it to acknowledge the request. The message

is displayed in your message area.

Unless there is another call waiting, your CALL SUP key will stop flashing,confirming the acknowledgement.

CALL SUPERVISOR ACCEPTED



8 -- 24Amb_8.5_CONSOLE REQUESTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintIf there is another operator also making a Call Supervisor request callbefore you, calls are stacked and when the previous call is cleared yourrequest is displayed automatically.

If you touch the key before it has beenacknowledged, it cancels the request.

At the Supervisor’s console the message

indicates that someone else has taken therequest, or that the caller has cancelled therequest.

The CALL SUP key operates in one directiononly. It is anoutgoing facility for operators andanincoming facility for Supervisor users.

The system is configured by the SystemManager to determine which User Types arereceivers and which are senders.

ALERT ALREADY ACCEPTED OR GONE AWAY



8 -- 25Amb_8.6_FUNC AREA SETUP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.6 Area Set UpNote: Availability and screen position of the AREA SETUP key is dependent on your system’s

specification.

8.6.1 Introduction

The AREA SETUP key is used for accessing different Functional Areas. Functional Areascontains a preconfigured combination of radios, talkgroups, telephone keys and telphonepages that have been set up in the database by the System Manager.

The key is also be used for accessing, in order to remove or rearrange Functional Areas.

8.6.2 Selecting Functional Areas

Touch the AREA SETUP key. If your User Type allows it, the General Work Areawill change to display the Functional Area Selection screen. The message


TheNEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys are provided for those sites having morethan one page of Functional Area keys.

CHOOSE A FUNCTIONAL AREA

Select thedesiredFunctional Area(s) by touching theassociatedarea key. The keychanges to its Active state and the area is populated in the ‘Selected’ column. Youcan add more than one area if required. If you select the wrong area key, you cancancel the selection by touching it again.

When you have made your selection, touch the DONE key.

The PreselectedRadio keys and Telephone Line keys will appear on their respect-ive pages in the order in which they were selected. When additional FunctionalAreas give you more than 12 telephone pages, Page 13 and above are not dis-played and are ignored. However, if youdeselect aFunctional Area that includes atelephone page below Page 13, the gap will be closed and the first of the ‘ignored’pages will be added at the end.

Touch the QUIT key to abandon the Functional Area selection.



8 -- 26Amb_8.6_FUNC AREA SETUPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintIf you touch DONE with no Functional Area selected, the message

is displayed and you are not permitted to exit the display.The message

is displayed if you select several Functional Areas and the number ofpreselected radio/talkgroups channels is exceeded.

INVALID -- NO FUNCTIONAL AREAS

INVALID -- TOO MANY RADIO CHANS

8.6.3 Rearranging Functional Area Positions

Radio and Telephone pages appear in the order that corresponds to the order in which theFunctional Areas were selected. Their positions can be rearranged if necessary.

With the Functional Area screen displayed, touch one of the Functional Areas listed in theleft--hand ‘Selected’ column. The message

will be displayed.

Next, touch the line containing the Functional Area with which you want to exchange yourfirst selection. Repeat the process as necessary until the order is as you want it.

This new orderwill be retained and storedwhenyou logoff. It will be reinstatedwhen you logon again.

If you need to abandon a line you have chosen, touch any screen key that is not in the list ofFunctional Areas.

Touch the DONE key when you have finished your selection. The message

is displayed.FUNCTIONAL AREAS RE-ORDERED

SELECT DESTINATION POSITION



8 -- 27Amb_8.6_FUNC AREA SETUP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.6.4 Deselecting Functional Areas

Touch the AREA SETUP key. The General Work Area will change to display theFunctional Area Selection screen. The message

is displayed in the message area.CHOOSE A FUNCTIONAL AREA

Deselect the Functional Area by touching the active key. This key will change to itsIdle state and the message

is displayed.FUNCTIONAL AREA REMOVED

When you have finished your selection, touch the DONE key.

If you touch theDONE key with all the Functional Areas deselected, themessage

is displayed.INVALID NO FUNCTIONAL AREAS

Press QUIT to return to the main screen without saving.

Helpful HintIf you select awrong key andactivate an inactive Functional Area, you cancancel the selection by touching it again.

If you try to cancel a Functional Area selection that has:

a) Radio channels/talkgroups Monitored and/or

b) Radio channels/talkgroups Selected, or

c) Has an active telephone call:the message displayed in the message area willbe either

or

If, when a Functional Area is deselected, noother user has it preselected, the message

is generated and displayed at the logged--onSupervisor’s position.

Important:Althoughausermay havepreselectedaFunctionalArea, part of theFunc-tional Areamay be hidden due to individual radio and telephone subgroupmasks for that user. The ‘Not Preselected’ alarm takes no account ofthese masked settings, so some radios and telephones may not be cov-ered.

INVALID -- RADIO CHANNELS ACTIVE

INVALID -- PHONE CALLS ACTIVE

FN AREA XXXXX NOT PRESELECTED



8 -- 28Amb_8.7_REMOTE ACCESSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.7 Remote Access

8.7.1 Introduction

Note: This facility may not be available to all users.

TheRemoteAccess facility permits you to access adifferent ControlRoom. It canbe used tosupport another site when required. It also allows a Control Room to be evacuated and itsfunctions to be handled by other Control Centres.

Provided that your access rights permit, and that the intersite link is available for use, remoteaccess enables your terminal to become a virtual terminal at a selected remote site.

8.7.2 Accessing the Remote Site

Touch theREMACC key to display theRemote Access screen in theGeneralWorkArea. The message


Select the site required; there will be a delay of typically from 1 to 30 seconds whilstthe remote access session is established, and the message

is displayed in the message area. When the remote control link has been estab-lished, the message area changes to show

and the General Work Area changes to show the Logon screen.

Log on using the User ID and Password allocated to you for the remote site.

Theremay be a delay of up to 70 seconds while your ID is verified and confirmationis returned. When this is received you become an operator with radio channels,talkgroups and telephones listed for the remote site.

If required, after logging on enter your User Type. You have all the access rightsgiven to the ID and/or User Typewhich have been set up for you at the remote site.

The Supervisors at your site and the remote site will be advised via the messages

and

CHOOSE A SITE TO ACCESS

REMOTE OPERATOR ACCESS, PLEASE WAIT

REMOTE OPERATOR ACCESS CONNECTED

REMOTE OP ESTABLISHED TO SITE XXX

REMOTE OP ESTABLISHED FROM SITE XXX



8 -- 29Amb_8.7_REMOTE ACCESS E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintIf the data link cannot be set up, the Site key will be highlighted and themessage

is displayed in the message area. If the site is already being accessed itskey will be highlighted, and when you try to select it the message

maybedisplayed in themessagearea. If it is not available the fact is auto-matically recorded in the system faults log.

The maximum number of remote operators for each site is defined at thetime of manufacture; see the System Manager for details. You can onlypreselect radios/talkgroups which are terminated at the remote site. Calllogger information on radio channels, talkgroups, telephone lines andother equipment terminated at the remote site is recorded at the remotesite. You will not be able to:

a) Answer motorway telephones from the remotesite.

b) Mimic a user at the remote site.

c) Override the terminal of a user at the remote site.

d) Select Remote again from the remote site.

e) Be mimicked by a user at either the remote siteor your own local site. Instant replay audio isrecorded at your own site -- use it in the normalmanner to replay your own and the remote site’sterminals recordings (if permitted). Users at theremote site will not be able to access yourrecordings, if they try to they will see themessage

If you select a PRINT command, the resultingprintout appears on theprinter at the remote site.The message

indicates that the printer is off line or is out ofpaper. The message

means that the printer is not connected.

Continued.....

REMOTE TERMINAL UNAVAILABLE

REMOTE TERMINAL UNAVAILABLE

OPERATOR REMOTE -- ACCESS DENIED

PRINTER NOT ATTACHED

PRINTER ERROR



8 -- 30Amb_8.7_REMOTE ACCESSE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful Hint

The messages

and

indicate typical breakdowns of the communica-tions between sites. You will normally remainlogged on at the remote site until you logoff. Theonly exceptions to this are a line or anequipmentfailure, indicated by a message similar to theabove with

and

displayed in the Supervisor’s message area. Ifthis happens an entry is automatically recordedin the system faults log.

REMOTE AUDIO LINK FAILED (XXX YYY)

CONTROL LINK FAILED



8.7.3 Leaving (Logging Off) the Remote Site

To log off, QUIT from the Main Screen to get the Preselections Menu screen andtouch QUIT again to return to your own local Remote Access screen.

The extra terminal is removed at the remote site and the Supervisors at your siteand the remote site will be advised

and

respectively.





8 -- 31Amb_8.8_ALPHA NUMERIC KEYPADS_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.8 Alpha Numeric Keypads

Note: Availability of the keypads is dependent on your system’s specification.

8.8.1 Introduction

There will be two styles of keypad, Alphanumeric and Numeric. They are to provideoperators with keyboard facilities via the touch screen or mouse. Certain displays whichrequire keyboard input will be configured to summon an on--screen keypad.

8.8.2 Method of Operation

Akeypad canbe invokedby touching theKEYBOARD key, or automatically, whendisplayinga screen that contains a text/numeric field requiring data entry.

Two keypads are defined:

Alphanumeric keypad -- This keypad can be used to enter text, numbers, charactersand symbols. It can be used for input boxes that require any kind of text, i.e.,numbers, letters or symbols.Numeric keypad -- This keypad can be used to enter numbers in input boxes thatonly allow numbers, e.g., the ISSI address input box.

8.8.3 Alphanumeric Keypad

The touch keypad has the same layout as a standard Qwerty keyboard. The followingbuttons can be used to amend characters entered into a field:



8 -- 32Amb_8.8_ALPHA NUMERIC KEYPADS_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.

Touch the ERASE key to delete all the characters entered.

Touch the CANCEL key to remove the keypad and return to the screen fromwhich it was invoked.

Touch the DELETE key to delete the character to the right of the cursor.

8.8.4 Numeric Keypad

The touchnumeric keypadhas the same layout as a standard numeric keypad. The followingbuttons can be used to amend characters entered into a field:

Touch the BACKSPACE key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.

Touch the ERASE key to delete all the characters entered.

Touch the CANCEL key to remove the keypad and return to the screen fromwhich it was invoked.



8 -- 33Amb_8.9_OPERATOR_NOTE_PAD_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.9 Operator Note Pad


The Operator Note Pad is an application that provides a list of notes that can be individuallyselected, viewed, edited and deleted. There are two different types of notes available:

1. Personal notes which give read/write access to an operator.

2. Global notes that give read access to an operator and read/write access to asupervisor.

Functionality is provided that will allow a supervisor to remove a user and his/her notes fromthe system. Functionality is also included to allow a System Manager to setup the notesenvironment. The Notes Application is accessed via the browser integrated into theDS2000Operator. Notes are always accessed from the local site to which the operator is logged on,even if they log onto another site as a remote operator.

Note: The Note Pad function key is accessed through the browser functionality either directly orindirectly by selecting another browser function.

8.9.1 Operator Note Pad List

Touch the OP NOTES key to invoke the Note Pad list.

When the Operator Notepad is invoked the user is presented with a list of notes as shown inthe following diagram. The application configuration determines the displayed. It is possiblefor the initial display to show the personal notes, global notes or personal and global notes.ThePERSONAL,GLOBAL,SHOWALL,ADMIN, NEWNOTE andSEARCH keys changecolour when pressed. The colour of the PERSONAL andGLOBAL keys is configured suchas to associate the personal key colour with the colour of personal notes and the global keycolour with the colour of global notes. This readily identifies which set of notes is beingdisplayed.



8 -- 34Amb_8.9_OPERATOR_NOTE_PAD_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Touching the PERSONAL key displays a list of your personal notes.PERSONAL

Touching the GLOBAL key displays a list of site global notes (global notesare not specific to an individual user).GLOBAL

Touching the SHOW ALL key displays a list of all notes that are available toyou, i.e., a mix of your personal notes and global notes.SHOW ALL

This key is only displayed to a user logged on as an administrator.Touching the ADMIN key displays the administration screen.ADMIN

Touching theNEWNOTE key displays a screen for viewing, creating, editingand deleting an individual note (see the following section on editing).NEW NOTE

Touching theSEARCH key after input to the Search field, displays a list of allnotes relevant to the search criteria (see the following section on searching).SEARCH



8 -- 35Amb_8.9_OPERATOR_NOTE_PAD_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Touching the DETAILS key displays the information contained in theselected note.DETAILS

8.9.1.1 Searching

When instigating a search, the titles only are searched. The search criteria is entered in theSearch field. Any title field that contains the input text is retrieved. Searches are performedon both global and personal notes, i.e., if ‘the’ is entered in the search text any notes thatcontain ‘the’ in the title is returned. Search text is not case sensitive.

Note: Standard wildcards are not used. The search facility just looks at specific entered text.

Touching the SEARCH key after input to the Search field, returns a list ofnotes filtered to the relevant search criteria.SEARCH

8.9.1.2 New Note

The NEW NOTE key is disabled at all times except:

S When the personal key is pressed

S If you have supervisor rights and the global key is pressed

Touching theNEWNOTE key allows you to input new note details as shownin the following screen:

NEW NOTE



8 -- 36Amb_8.9_OPERATOR_NOTE_PAD_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

When the DETAILS or NEW NOTE keys are pressed the operator is presented with thescreen shownabove. This screen is for viewing, creating, editing or deleting individual notes.The PERSONAL,GLOBAL, SHOWALL, ADMIN, NEWNOTE and SEARCH keys are stillavailable and their functionality is the same as previously described.

Touching the SAVE key saves changes to the updated note. This key is enabledwhen thenote is updatable by you, e.g., personal notes to anoperator and/or globalnotes to a supervisor.

SAVE

Touch the DELETE key to delete the viewed note. This key is enabled when thenote is updatable by you, e.g., personal notes to an operator and/or global notes toa supervisor.

DELETE

Helpful HintIf the web server is inoperative when the Notepad key is touched, thestandard browser ‘‘Page cannot be displayed” page is displayed.

If data cannot be displayed in the Notepad application, an advisorymessage detailing the problem is displayed.

If the problem persists contact the Administrator. If when trying to invokethe on--screen keyboard, the external keyboard application is not foundthe message

is displayed.KEYBOARD APPLICATION NOT FOUND



8 -- 37Amb_8.10_SYSTEM_PARTITIONING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.10 System Partitioning


This facility allows groups of operators attached to the samecommonequipment to be largelyisolated from each other, therefore allowing them to work independently as if they are in‘virtual control rooms’.

8.10.1 Operator Groups Overview

There are 32 groups. Group names are defined within the Operator Groups database file.Each entry defines the short and long name for each group.

Resources can bemembers of any combination of groups or none of the groups. Resourcesthat are not members of any groups are not accessible by any operators andare not reportedon to any operators; similarly they are unable to access any other operators.

Certain resources are tagged with a group membership mask; these are described in thesub--sections below.

8.10.1.1 Operator Terminal Positions

Operators have their group membership defined by terminal configuration and userconfiguration. While a terminal is logged off, the terminal assumes the group membershipdefined in the terminal configuration entry for that position. When the position logs on, theterminals group membership is upgraded to include any additional groups specified in theusers configuration. When an operator terminal is logged on, the joint group membership (ofterminal anduser configuration) is used to definewhich resources that position has access toand which system fault messages are displayed at that position.

When an operator terminal logs off, the group membership reverts to that specified by theappropriate terminal configuration entry.

8.10.1.2 Legacy Radios

Radios have their group membership defined within Radio Channels database file. Eachentry includes a group membership mask.

An operator terminal position only has access to a radio if the user’s logged on groupmembership overlaps that configured for the radio.

The group membership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault messagerelated to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.

8.10.1.3 Talkgroups

Talkgroups have their group membership defined by Talkgroup database file. Each entryincludes a group membership mask.

An operator terminal position only has access to a Talkgroup if the user’s logged on groupmembership overlaps that configured for the Talkgroup.

The groupmembership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault generatedto this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.



8 -- 38Amb_8.10_SYSTEM_PARTITIONINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.10.1.4 Functional Areas

Functional Areas have their group membership defined by FuncArea. Each entry includes agroup membership mask.

An operator terminal position will only have access to a functional area if the user’s loggedongroup membership overlaps that configured for the functional area.

The group membership for this resource is also used to determine whether a fault messagerelating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.

8.10.1.5 ICCS Sites

Sites have their groupmembership defined by theRemote Access database file. Each entryincludes a group membership mask.

The group membership for this resource is used to determine whether a fault messagerelating to this resource is displayed on operator terminal positions.

8.10.1.6 Telephone Lines

Lines have their groupmembership definedby theTelephoneLines database file. Eachentryincludes a group membership mask.


8.10.1.7 Telephone Extensions

Extensions have their group membership defined by the DPNSS Extensions database file.Each entry includes a group membership mask.


8.10.1.8 Telephone Groups

Telephone groups have their groupmembership defined by the Telephone Groups databasefile. Each entry includes a group membership mask.




8 -- 39Amb_8.10_SYSTEM_PARTITIONING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.10.2 Operator Selection

Operator Functions that involve choosing another terminal position for action are all filteredaccording to the current group membership of each operator position. An operator terminalposition only has visibility of another position if their group membership overlaps.

The following operator functions have other terminal visibility controlled by the operatormask:

• Intercom

• Enable & Disable Terminal

• Eavesdrop (Terminal)

• Telephone Eavesdrop

• Local Recorder Replay

• Call Transfer

• Mimic

• Terminal Override

8.10.3 Call Supervisor Segregation

This uses the group membership of each operator to determine which terminals are alertedwhen a group’s member calls a supervisor for assistance. When the system is partitioned,only Supervisors in overlapping groups are alerted when an operator requests assistance.

8.10.4 Fault Message Segregation

This uses group membership associated with each resource to confine Fault Messages sothey are only displayed on operator terminal positions to which the fault might be applicable.It uses the group access mask associated with each reportable resource.

When a fault report is raised, the reporting node collates and ‘OR’s’ together all groupmasksfor any reported item, e.g., if the SNP reports that an Operator (OpId) has answered atelephone line (LineId) out of sequence and reports a fault, it ‘OR’s’ the groupsmasks for theOpId and LineId. The group mask is included within the Fault Report and forwarded to alloperator terminal positions (where the fault is configured for operator display). Eachoperatorterminal position is able to filter the message by ‘AND’ing his group mask with the FaultMessage groupmask and then only displaymessages whichare applicable to their group(s).

Note: TheFault Log is currently unfilteredand contains all fault messageswhether they apply to theviewing operator or not. Each fault does, however, contain the combined groupmembershipinformation.

8.10.4.1 Critical Fault Log Filtering

Critical faults shown on the Critical Fault list at an operator terminal position are filteredaccording to the same rules as for conventional ‘top--line’ faults.



8 -- 40Amb_8.11_TERM SEL _WITH_GRP PARTITIONINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.11 Terminal Select with Group Partitioning

Note: Availability of this functionality is dependent on your system’s specification.

This section is to be read in conjunctionwith the section on the specific function you are tryingto access, i.e., transfering a call (Trans Call).

The Terminal Select screen is used by functions that require the user to prime a terminalposition, e.g., MIMIC (Mimic), TELE EAVES (Telephone Eavesdrop), EAVES (TerminalEavesdrop), INTERCOM (Internal Intercom), TRAN CALL (Transfer Call), INST REPL(Local Recorder), E/D TERM (Enable/Disable Terminal) and TERM OVRD (TerminalOverride).

8.11.1 Functional Overview

The Terminal Select screen is displayed in the General Work Area and shows the OperatorGroups that are available to you. When a Group has been primed the operators within thatGroup are listed with an entry line of information per operator. A maximum of 11 operatorsmay beviewedat one timewith a vertical scrollbar provided to viewadditional operators. Thefollowing screen shows the layout of a typical Terminal Select screen:

FunctionNameand long groupname

Operator group with scrollbars

(Pol1 selected)

Terminal ID

Operator Name

Status

Other terminal number

Activity icons

Work area listing up to 11

operators per screen

Vertical scrollbar to view

additional operators

Function keys including Refresh

8.11.1.1 Operator Group

Horizontal tabs along the top of the work area, incorporating arrow keys that are used tonavigate to a Group and hence the operator positions listed within that Group.

8.11.1.2 Terminal Identifier

The terminal identifier is a reference to the three digit operator terminal number.

8.11.1.3 User Name

As specifiedwithin thedatabase for theuser (up to 24 characters). If no user is logged on, thelist entry is displayed as <not logged on>.



8 -- 41Amb_8.11_TERM SEL _WITH_GRP PARTITIONING E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.11.1.4 Status

Displays the status of the operator position. This varies depending on the function accessed.

8.11.1.5 Other Terminal Number

This is displayed as appropriate, when one terminal is performing an action on anotherterminal, e.g., Eavesdrop or terminal override.

8.11.1.6 Activity Icon

Provides additional information as to the current status and activity of each operator. Theseicons are described in the Dynamic Operator Status section of this book.

The following table shows a list of functions with their display charateristics:

Function Key User Name Status Other Terminal No.

MIMIC p p (a) p

TELEEAVES p ¢ ¢

EAVES p p (a) p

ICOM p p p

TRANCALL p ¢ ¢

INSTREPL p (b) p p

E/DTERM p (b) p ¢

TERMOVRD p p (a) p

Note: (a) only when a function is in progress, otherwise this is not displayed

(b) only when a terminal is logged on, otherwise this is not displayed

8.11.2 Function Keys

The function keys that are displayed are dependant on the functionality you are accessing,i.e., Mimic. The function keys are greyed--out (disabled) when they are not available.

8.11.2.1 Refresh Key

The REFRESH function key appears on all terminal select screens. The key flashes toindicate pending changes to a terminal’s Group membership during operation or where anoperator has logged on or logged off. Touching the flashing REFRESH key updates thedisplayed list.

For those functions that only list loggedon users, i.e., Mimic, TelephoneEavesdrop, TerminalEavesdrop, Internal Intercom, Transfer Call and Terminal Override, when a group member



8 -- 42Amb_8.11_TERM SEL _WITH_GRP PARTITIONINGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

logs off, the operator name is changed to <not logged on> and the REFRESH key flashes.Choosing the REFRESH key removes the logged off user from the display. If a groupmember logs on to the system, the user is added to the end of the list and theREFRESH keyflashes. Touching the REFRESH key moves the newly logged on user to their sequentialposition in the list.

8.11.2.2 Priming an Operator

Touchor click themouseon the requiredoperator position list entry. Anoperator positionmaybe deselected by retouching or by priming an alternative operator position.



8 -- 43Amb_8.12_BROWSER E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

8.12 Browser

Note: Availability, operation, screen position and labelling of the BROWSER key is dependent onyour system’s specification.

8.12.1 Introduction

The browser facility is customer configurable and can beused to access variousWeb--basedinformation systems, e.g., your Intranet, CCTV.

8.12.2 Browser Screen

Touching theBROWSER key invokes thebrowser screen in theGWAof thescreen.Theremay be several keys displayedat the top of the browser screen givingaccessto specified Web--based systems.

TheSIZE key is a toggle key and is used to change the size of the screen frombeingcontained within the GWA to filling the whole screen and vice versa.

TheKEYBOARD key is used to invoke theMilosoft on--screen keyboard for editingweb--based applications.



8 -- 44Amb_8.12_BROWSERE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A


Chapter 9

Support Functions

VOLUME 1SUPPORT FUNCTIONS


9 -- 2Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Amendment



SS 25.04.06




SS 01/11/07



9 -- 3Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCT E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Contents

9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop 9 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.1 How to Terminal Eavesdrop 9 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 Mimic 9 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2.1 Mimic (Standard) 9 -- 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2.2 Mimic with Group Partitioning 9 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic 9 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3 Terminal Override 9 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4 System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4.1 Overview 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4.2 Fault Log 9 -- 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.4.3 System Log 9 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5 Call Logger 9 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen 9 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6.1 Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen 9 -- 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display 9 -- 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.3 Icon Description 9 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication 9 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.5 ACD Indication 9 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.6 Telephone Activity 9 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.7 Radio Activity 9 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity 9 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.9 Tetra Individual Call Activity 9 -- 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.10 Internal Intercom Activity 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.11 Instant Replay Activity 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.12 Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6.12.1 Adding a New Position 9 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.6.12.2 Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon 9 -- 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.7 Critical Faults 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.1 Overview 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.2 Operator Presentation 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.3 Displaying the Critical Faults List 9 -- 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.4 Acknowledging Critical Faults 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.5 Clearing Critical Faults 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.6 Adding a Reference Tag 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.7.7 Customised Help 9 -- 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.8 Web Based Help 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.1 Overview 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.2 HTML Based Help Screen 9 -- 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.3 HTML Edit Tool 9 -- 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.4 Help Data 9 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8.5 HTML Link Error 9 -- 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



9 -- 4Amb_9.0_SUP FUNCTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A




9 -- 5Amb_9.1_TERM_EAVESDROP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.1 Terminal Eavesdrop

Note: Availability and screenposition of theTerminalEavesdrop key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

Important:This section reflects standard terminal eavesdrop fuctionality. If your systemsupportsGroupPartitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and8.16.

The DS2000 system supports either telephone eavesdropping or terminal eavesdropping.This section gives an operational explanation for terminal eavesdrop (for telephoneeavesdrop see Chapter 5).

9.1.1 How to Terminal Eavesdrop

Terminal eavesdrop allows you to listen to the primary audio andmicrophone channels of anoperator at another terminal.

Touch the TERM EAVES key to listen to the audio of a user at another terminal.

The Terminal Select screen is now displayed and the message

appears in themessage area. Up to 11 terminals can be displayed at one time in alist; use the SCROLL to view other entries.

Touch your required terminal list entry, then when the EAVES key is touched, themessage

is displayed in the message area. A user being eavesdropped will not know thatyou are listening unless they have a Terminal Select screen to view.

When terminal eavesdropping, your calls in progress are put on Hold and yourSelected radio channels and talkgroups change to Monitor; you will hear a mix ofthe other user’s headset and microphone audio.

Cancel Eavesdrop by touching the CANCEL key; you will see the message

displayed in the message area.

EAVESDROP IN PROGRESS


EAVESDROP CANCELLED

The Terminal Eaves facility can also be cancelled by touching the QUIT key.



9 -- 6Amb_9.1_TERM_EAVESDROPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintRemember when you Eavesdrop:

a) Active internal intercom calls are cancelled.

b) Unanswered outgoing calls are cancelled.

c) Your current Eavesdrop is cancelled if youanswer an individual call.

d) Eavesdrop is cancelled if a radio is selected.

e) Eavesdrop is cancelled if an incoming telephonecall is answered.

f) Eavesdrop is cancelled if an internal intercomcall is initiated or answered.

Eavesdropping on an eavesdropper is allowed by the system. The maxi-mum number of users in one eavesdrop is limited -- refer to the SystemManager for details.



9 -- 7Amb_9.2_MIMIC E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.2 Mimic

Note: Availability andscreenpositionof theMIMICkey isdependent onyour system’s specification.

Important:This section reflects standard mimic and mimic with Group Partitioning. If your systemsupports Group Partitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction withSections 8.15 and 8.16.

9.2.1 Mimic (Standard)

The Mimic function is used to view the screen and listen to the headset audio of anotherlogged on terminal within the same control room.

Touch the MIMIC key to mimic the screen of a user at another terminal.

The Terminal Select screen is now displayed, and the message

appears in the message area. Up to 11 terminals can be displayed at one time in alist on a page; use the SCROLL to view other entries.

Select a terminal by touching the list entry then touch the now active MIMIC keycurrent screen for that terminal will appear and the message

will be displayed in themessage area. Youwill hear audio instantly but your screenis updated after apporoximately five seconds.

A user being mimicked will have no indication unless they have a Mimic Selectscreen to view.

During Mimic your calls in progress are put on Hold and Selected radio channelschange to Monitor.

Cancel the Mimic facility by touching anywhere on the screen; the message



MIMIC IN PROGRESS

MIMIC CANCELLED



9 -- 8Amb_9.2_MIMICE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintRemember when you mimic another terminal:

a) Any Eavesdrop function you have is cancelled.

b) Active internal intercom calls you have arecancelled.

c) Unanswered outgoing calls you have arecancelled.

d) Mimic is not available to or from detached oper-ators or remote operators.

e) Selected radio channels are put into theMonitored state.

f) Calls in progress are put on Hold.

g) If the mimicked user logs off, Mimic is cancelledand the display returns to the Terminal Selectscreen. The message

is displayed.

h) Attempting to select a terminal not logged on re-sults in the message

being displayed.

i) Attempting to to select a terminal that is alreadybeing mimicked results in the message

being displayed.

If any part of themimicker’s screen is touched, theMimic is cancelled andthe display returns to the Terminal Select screen. The message

is displayed.

Themaximum number of Mimics that can be performed simultaneously iseither two or three per site (see the SystemManager for details of your in-stallation).

ACCESS NOT AVAILABLE

TERMINAL NOT LOGGED ON

MIMIC CANCELLED

MIMIC CANCELLED



9 -- 9Amb_9.2_MIMIC E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.2.2 Mimic with Group Partitioning

The Mimic function is used to view the screen and listen to the headset audio of a logged onterminal, providing themimicking operator has access to theGroup containing the logged onterminal.

Touching the MIMIC key invokes the Terminal Select screen.

Choose an operator from the Terminal Select screen which enables the MIMICfunction key. Touch the key to mimic and and the message

appears in the message area and the mimicked screen appears.

The status for you as the mimicker changes toThe status for the mimicked operator changes to(Where XXX is the terminal number).

The following actions are taken by the system when you start the Mimic function:

a) Selected radio channels and Talkgroups are put into the monitored state.

b) Calls in progress are put on hold.

c) Active internal intercom calls are cancelled.

d) Unanswered outgoing telephone and individual calls are cleared.

MIMICKING

MIMICK ON XXX

MIMIC BY XXX

The mimicked operator is not aware that the mimic is in progress from the main screen,(unless the mimicked operator is viewing the Mimic screen).

The mimicking terminal will still sound its own audible alarms for Urgent and NormalTelephone calls and for fault conditions, although no visual indication is given if themimickedterminal does not provide a visual indication itself.

If any part of the mimicked screen is touched, with the exception of the title bar, the mimic iscancelled. The screen of the operator beingmimicked is always on top of any other programbeing run by the mimicking operator.

Exceptions:

a) Mimic is not available to or from remote operators and is not recommended foruse over low bandwidth connections to detached operators.

b) Dropdown lists and scrollbar movement are not shown on the mimickingoperator’s screen.

c) Scrolling within an internet browser window is not shown on the mimickingoperator’s screen.

d) Data input fields are updated on the mimicking operator’s screen only after themimicked operator moves away from a field.



9 -- 10Amb_9.2_MIMICE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.2.2.1 Cancelling a Mimic

If any part of themimicked screen is touched, themimic is cancelledand thedisplay returns tothe Terminal Select screen.

Mimic is automatically cancelled by the system if one of the following actions is taken:

a) The mimicked operator logs off.

b) The mimicking operator leaves the mimic selection screen.

c) Scrolling within an internet browser window is not shown on the mimickingoperator’s screen.

Helpful HintIf the number of mimics in progress at any one time at a site reaches theupper limit, and an operator attempts a further mimic, the message

is displayed.

Mimic will fail if:

a) You attempt mimic and have an open connectgroup.

b) An attempt to mimic a remote terminal is made.

c) An attempt is made to mimic a terminal which isalready mimicking another terminal.

d) The terminal to be mimicked is not logged on.

e) An attempt is made to mimic your own terminal.

f) You attempt to mimic whilst being mimicked byanother terminal.

MIMIC FAILED



9 -- 11Amb_9.3_TERMINAL OVERRIDE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A


Important:This section reflects standard terminal override functionality. If your system supports GroupPartitioning functionality, this section should be read in conjunction with Sections 8.15 and8.16.

This facility, which is accessed from the PreselectionsMenu screen, enables you to overridean operator at another terminal.

Touch the TERM OVRD key to display the Terminal Select screen.The message

appears in themessagearea. Up to 11 terminals can bedisplayed at one time ina list; use the SCROLL to view other entries.


Only logged on terminals show an Active key.

Select the terminal you wish to override by touching the list entry.

The OVRDE key becomes active. Touch this key to begin the override. terminal youwish to override by touching the list entry

On a successful override, the overridden terminal displays the ‘‘Terminal Overridden, PleaseStandby” dialog as shown below and their touch screen is disabled. The currently displayedradio and telephone page (if any) continues to reflect the current state of that operator andtheir activities.



9 -- 12Amb_9.3_TERMINAL OVERRIDEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

The overriding terminal is presented with the Main Screen of the overridden terminalwith its radio and telephone page configurations. Audio sources routed from theoverridden terminal’s headset primary ear (e.g., individual calls, Monitored, Selectedand connected radio channels or talkgroups, open, connected and monitoredtelephone lines, dependant on audio mix style) are now presented to, and controlledby, the overriding operator.

Your microphone is routed to the selected resources of the overridden operator. Youcan key up those radios, talkgroups and individual calls as normal via the footswitchorTX key on screen.

The overridden operator hears identical audio to you but is not able to transmit.

Cancel the Override facility by touching the CANCEL or QUIT key. The message

is displayed in the message area of the previously overridden terminal, and thefunctions that were active on the overriding terminal are re--activated.

The display on the overriding terminal returns to the Terminal Select screen.

TERMINAL OVERRIDE CANCELLED



9 -- 13Amb_9.3_TERMINAL OVERRIDE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintRemember when you override another terminal:

a) Any Eavesdrop function you have is cancelled.

b) Active internal intercom calls to the overriddenterminal are cancelled.

c) Active hold override to the overridden terminal iscancelled.

d) Unanswered outgoing calls you have arecancelled.

e) Override is not available to or from detached op-erators or remote operators.

f) If the overridden operator logs off, Override iscancelled and the display returns to the TerminalSelect screen. The message

is displayed.

g) Attempting to select a terminal not logged on re-sults in the message

being displayed.

h) A terminal can only be overridden when it isshowing its Main Screen. If any other screen isbeing displayed the message

is displayed.

OVERRIDE CANCELLED

TERMINAL NOT LOGGED ON

TERMINAL OVERRIDE NOT AVAILABLE



9 -- 14Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.4 System Alarms, Faults and Event Messages

9.4.1 Overview

If a system Alarm, a system Fault or a recordable system Event occurs, a message (usuallywith a flashing background) is displayed in the message area of a privileged user’s terminal,and that terminal’s audible alarm is sounded.

When an Alarm, Fault or Event message is displayed, you must act on the message asappropriate and then acknowledge it by touching themessage area. Messages are stackedbehind one another, so when the first one has been acknowledged and cleared, you need toact, acknowledge and clear any other messages in turn.

Note: Critical fault entries may also appear in the Fault Log. These can also be viewed via theCritical Faults list which is a separate facility see section 9.9.

When required, a list of Fault messages can be viewed (and printed) by using the FAULTLOG (or SYS LOG) key on the Preselection Menu screen; this provides access to theAlarms, Faults and system Event screens.

As well as determining the colours and/or flash rate used to draw your attention to themessage on the screen, the SystemManager can also determine via the database whetheran Alarm, Fault or systemEventmessage is directed to the screen, the fault log, event log, orthe printer -- or is ignored altogether. This means that a message you see on the screenmaynot appear in the log.

Use of the FAULT LOG, SYS LOG and PRINT keys is described on the following pages.

9.4.2 Fault Log

The system identifies its own faults, alarms and events, and reports them to this log, with themost recent report being entered at the top of the log. When a new message is added theoldest is removed. The fault log, which normally has a capacity of 240 events (10 pages of 24entries), is accessed from the Preselection Menu screen.

Touching the FAULT LOG key causes the FAULT LOG SITE SELECT screen tobedisplayed. Where theRemoteSite facility is not implemented, the systemwill gostraight to the second screen -- shown on the next page. Select the location for thefaults you wish to view and/or print out. Not all the sites shown will be accessiblefrom every site. In these instances the display will close up so that there are nogaps between keys.



9 -- 15Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Touch the PRINT key to print the currently displayed page.PRINT



9 -- 16Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys to access the other log pages.

Under the current system the fault log includes Critical Faults, Faults, Alarms andEvents. These are identified in the list by a letter preceding the ‘Code’ entry and bycolour. The letters in the ‘Code’ column are C, F, A or E respectively.

Touch the appropriate line in the list to view theHelp screen for that particular entry. TheHelpscreen is invoked with a more detailed explanation. A text input area is at the top of the Helpscreen for customer input, as shown below.

If you have the access rights the EDIT key will be visible. This key allows you to edit the toparea of the screen, e.g., with a local explanation for clarification, or to put in a prompt to call anengineer.

Touch the QUIT key to return to the Fault Log display.


is displayed in the message area if the printer is not connected.FAULT LOG PRINTER NOT AVAILABLE



9 -- 17Amb_9.4 FAULT LOG_3 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.4.3 System Log

The system log contains an extra column to identify the site to which a fault refers; it isotherwise similar to the site log. Event messages are not normally sent to the system log.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE keys to access the other logpages.

Touch the PRINT key to print the currently displayed page.

Touch the appropriate line in the list to view theHelp screen for that par-ticular item.



9 -- 18Amb_9.5_CALL LOGGERE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.5 Call Logger

Acall loggermay be provided as part of the systemat some installations. The call logger logsall telephone and radio traffic. Details of its operation are given in the manufacturer’sliterature. The call logger has its own dedicated printer -- it does not use the system printer.

Some installations may direct the output signals, normally used to drive the call logger, todrive event recording devices.

See the System Manager for details of your installation.



9 -- 19Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPs E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6 Dynamic Operator Screen

Note: Availability and screen position of the DYN OPS key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

The Dynamic Operator screen enables authorised users (Supervisors) to quickly assess alloperator activity from their terminals. The operating state of telephone lines, selected radio,intercom and instant replay can all be monitored. Up to 99 user consoles, including remoteterminals, can be displayed on the screen.

The illustration below shows an example of a typical Dynamic Operator screen. The displaycan be configured to represent the control room layout. The ability to edit the screen wouldnormally be a System Manager function (see Volume 2).

9.6.1 Accessing the Dynamic Operator Screen

TheDynamicOperator screen replaces theRadioAreaand theGeneralWorkAreaof theMain Screen; the Telephone Call queue and top and bottom row function keys are stilldisplayed. Access to the screen is normally only available to Supervisors and higheraccess users.

Touch the SUPER tab followed by the DYN OP key to access the screen.



9 -- 20Amb_9.6_DYNAMIC OPsE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.2 Dyn Ops Display

Each operator may be represented by a tile positioned within this area. Any operator(s) maybe included or excluded from the display. Line, box and text features can be added to thedisplay by System Manager configuration.

Remote operators to this sitemayalso bepositionedon this display by specifying anoperatornumber in the range of remote operators.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.3 Icon Description

Each terminal position is represented by an icon. The icon is divided into several areas:MainIcon area, ACD area, Held Call area and the Activity area. There are three different iconstyles available:

T010

10T

T

10

Icon Style 1

Activity Area

Icon Style 2

Icon Style 3

On some installations the Held Calls area may be replaced by a Held Telephone symbol;this is a System Manager configurable item.

Main Area

ACD Activity Area

Terminal (Op) ID

Main Screen (User) Type

Held Calls Area




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.4 Operator Logged On Indication

When a terminal is not in use, the only information displayed on the terminal icon is theterminal number.

Where a terminal is logged on but has no radios/talkgroups selected or telephone calls inprogress, the terminal icon displays the logged on colour.

TheMain Screen Type field displays the user’s Main Screen as set in the User Type file (seeVolume 2). The options available are:

T -- Telephone Main Screen

R -- Radio Main Screen

S -- Special (Airwave) Main Screen

The icon can be configured to be a different colour to display remote operators (seeVolume2Other Colours).

9.6.5 ACD Indication

The triangular area at the top right of the key is used to display ACD (Automatic CallDistribution) information (see Chapter 5). There are four possible states:

• Unavailable

• Active -- Typically set to purple

• Suspended -- Typically set to light green

• Call Active or Wrap-Up -- Typically set to black

ACD state is indicated by the colour and/or flash rate set in the Other Colours file.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.6 Telephone Activity

Telephone activity is indicated by the icon changing colour and a Telephone icon whichreplaces the flashingsquare in theActiveareawhenever a terminal hasa telephone lineopenor on monitor.

TelephoneCall in Progress

Monitored Telephone Call

Held telephone calls can be indicated by either the Held Call area or the Held Telephone linesymbol.

9.6.7 Radio Activity

A selected radio is indicated by the icon changing colour and displaying a radio handset.When the operator transmits, the icon changes colour and displays a radiatingradio.

Radio Channel Selected

Radio Channel Tx




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.8 Tetra Talkgroup Activity

A selected talkgroup is indicated by the icon changing colour and displaying a radio mast.When the operator transmits, the icon colour alternates displaying a radiatingmast as shownbelow.

Talkgroup Selected

Talkgroup Tx alternating to

9.6.9 Tetra Individual Call Activity

An operator with a Tetra individual call in progress is indicated by the icon changing colourand displaying a radio mast with a no entry sign adjacent to it. When the operator transmits,the icon changes colour and displays a radiating mast with a no entry sign adjacent toit.

Individual Call in progress

Individual Call transmitting




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.6.10 Internal Intercom Activity

Intercom activity is indicated by the icon changing colour and an icon of two talking headswhich appears in the Active area whenever a terminal has an intercom call open or is amember of an intercom conference.

Intercom Call

9.6.11 Instant Replay Activity

Instant replay of a terminal’s recordings is indicated by the icon changing colour and a TapeRecorder icon which appears in the Active area.

Instant Replay

9.6.12 Editing the Dyn Op Screen Layout

The positioning of local operators on the Dynamic Operator screen can be setup andaltered using the touch screen or mouse. To enable the edit mode, touch the DYN OPSkey whilst viewing the Dynamic Operator screen. Edit mode is cancelled by touching theDYN OP key again, by selecting another function key, or by quitting the DynamicOperator screen.

9.6.12.1 Adding a New Position

Select a blank area of the dynamic display where you would like the new terminal icon to besituated (either by touching the screen or left--clicking with the mouse). A new terminal iconwill appearwith *** to signify the terminal number. Select the terminal IDbyusing the topscrollbars and then select one of the three styles of tile. Select OK to accept your choices.

New icon

ID scroll bars

Icon style options

9.6.12.2 Editing/Deleting an Existing Icon




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Touch the terminal icon you wish to edit; the following menu is invoked:

Exit this menu

Open the edit menu

Delete the terminal iconMove the icon position

CANCEL Removes the edit menu

EDIT Allows you to change the terminal ID using the up and down scroll bars

MOVE Select this option then indicate thenewpositionon thescreenbymouseclick or touch

DELETE Deletes an icon from the layout

Helpful HintThe following error reports are associated with the Dynamic Operatorfunction and may be displayed in the message area at the top of thescreen:

• Adding an operator terminal with the same IDresults in the message

being generated.

• If the ID is out of the range of the system, themessage

is generated.

DUPLICATE OPERATOR TILE

INVALID OPERATOR TILE



9 -- 27Amb_9.7_CRITICAL FAULT E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.7 Critical Faults

Note: Availability and screen position of the CRIT FLT key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

9.7.1 Overview

Faults can have an additional classification to allow specific faults to be specified as ‘Critical’.TheCritical Fault Logging functionality intercepts faults with this classification and adds themto a system wide Critical Faults list.

Operator positions download theCritical Faults list at logon and the list is thenmaintained viaupdates received from the DS2000.

Privileged operators can view the Critical Fault list, acknowledge and clear faults and add areference tag to active faults as well as displaying customised help information relating toeach type of fault.

Note: The Critical Fault List is cleared when a full system reset occurs, and relies on faults beingre--detected for them to be added to the Critical Faults list again.

9.7.2 Operator Presentation

Aspart of the logonsequence theOperator position downloads theCritical Faults list from theDS2000 and then receives automatic updates that are used to maintain the local copy of thelist. When thereareeither unacknowledgedor acknowledgedcritical faults outstanding in thesystem, the CRIT FAULT key is displayed in its active state (with optional audible alarms).

9.7.3 Displaying the Critical Faults List

The key is displayed in one of the following states:

• Idle -- No faults active in the system

• Unacknowledged Critical faults present

• Acked Critical faults present

This key shows the count of unacknowledged faults in the bottom left corner and thecount of acknowledged faults in the bottom right corner.Touching the CRIT FAULT key invokes the Critical Faults list screen. This displaysan ordered list of active faults in the system in the following order:

• Unacknowledged Critical faults

• Faults Acknowledged by this operator

• Faults Acknowledged by other operators



9 -- 28Amb_9.7_CRITICAL FAULTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Each line entry in the list includes:

< Date > < Time > <Fault Text > < Reference Tag > <Acknowledging Op ID >

Note: The <Acknowledging Op ID > is only shown where the fault was acknowledged by anotherterminal position.

The faults list canbescrolled if requiredusing the scroll bar and individual fault entriesmaybeprimed (or unprimed). Once an item has been primed the following functions are availableusing the keys provided, dependent on the operator’s configuration:

• Acknowledge

• Clear

• Apply a reference tag

• Display customised Help information

The Critical Faults list display is refreshed when any new fault arrives, but maintains anyprimed entry.

Touching any other Fault Entry or any other function key other than those at the bottom of theFaults List screen causes a primed Fault Entry to be automatically unprimed.



9 -- 29Amb_9.7_CRITICAL FAULT E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.7.4 Acknowledging Critical Faults

To carry out this action, touch (prime) the desired entry in the list then touch theACK key.

This action is immediately presented to all other operators who are currently displaying theCritical Faults screen and the ‘Acking Op Id’ is added to that fault entry.

The number of unacknowledged critical faults displayed on the CRIT FAULT key isdecreased by one and the acknowledged count is increased by one.

9.7.5 Clearing Critical Faults

To carry out this action, touch (prime) the desired acknowledged fault entry inthe list then touch the CLR key.

This action is immediately presented to all other operators who are currently displaying theCritical Fault screen and the ‘Acking Op Id’ is added to that fault entry.

The number of acknowledged critical faults displayed on the CRIT FAULT key is decreasedby one.

9.7.6 Adding a Reference Tag

An alphanumeric reference tag (up to eight characters) can be attached to a particular listentry, i.e., for audit purposes.

The reference canbe set up in the ‘Text Field’ between theAPPLYTAGandHELP keys. Textcan be entered from either a keyboard (a) or via an on screen keyboard (b).

a) Enter text into the ‘Text field’, then prime the desired list entry. Touch theAPPLYTAG key to add the input reference text to that entry

b) Touching the key with the keyboard icon invokes an on screen alphanumerickeyboard. Enter text via this keyboard. Touch the TAG TEXT to automaticallypopulate the ‘Text Field’ with the reference text. Prime the desired list entry.Touch the APPLY TAG key to add the input reference text to that entry.

Note: Anexisting reference canbeeditedby priming the entry andproceeding in either of theaboveways.

9.7.7 Customised Help

When a Critical Faults list entry is primed, customised help information can be displayed inthe GWA by pressing the HELP key. The EDIT key is only available to privileged users forlocal editing of the top area of the screen which relates to that fault. To escape from the helpinformation screen touch the QUIT key; the GWA reverts to the Critical Faults list.

Helpful HintIf you touch the ACK, CLR, APPLY TAG, or HELP keys without firstselecting an entry in the list, the message

is displayed in the message area.ERROR -- NO ITEM PRIMED



9 -- 30Amb_9.8_WEB BASED HELPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

9.8 Web Based Help

Note: Availability and screen position of theWeb--basedHELP key is dependent on your system’sspecification.

9.8.1 Overview

Help text regardingaparticular function canbeviewedby touching theHELPkey, followedbythe function key for which help information is required.

The messageCHOOSE A FUNCTION FOR HELP

is initially displayed in themessage area. When a function key is touched, themessage thenchanges toHELP INFORMATION

The Help information that relates to the function/screen for which help was requested isdisplayed in a single screen split into two defined areas: one area for SunGard Vivista Helpand other area for Customer Help.

Touching theQUIT key removes the Help information and returns the user to the previouslydisplayed General Work Area screen.

9.8.2 HTML Based Help Screen

Theupper framedisplaysCustomerHelp and the bottom framedisplays theSunGardVivistaHelp. If a Customer Help page is not available a default blank page is displayed.



9 -- 31Amb_9.8_WEB BASED HELP E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

The EDIT key is only displayed to users who have the privilege to edit Help. Theseusers can edit the Customer Help using HTML Edit Tool that is invoked by selectingthe EDIT key. The following screen displays the Customer Help edit update screen.

EDIT

9.8.3 HTML Edit Tool

The HTML tool allows standard features of Word formatting to format selected Help Text. Amouse fitted to thePC canmake this easily accessible. However, all functions are supportedusing the keyboard.

Key Combinations Function

Ctrl + B Toggles the Bold/Regular Font Type on selected text

Ctrl + I Toggles the Italic/Regular Font Type on selected text

Ctrl + U Toggles the Underline/Regular Font Type on selected text

Ctrl + K Toggles Strikethrough property for the selected text

Ctrl + F Open a Font Dialog for selection of Font and size

Ctrl + G Insert image

Ctrl + L Align the selected paragraph to the left

Ctrl + R Align the selected paragraph to the right

Ctrl + T Align the selected paragraph to the centre

Ctrl + J Justify the selected paragraph

Ctrl + M Toggles the number list

Ctrl + . Toggles the bullet point

Ctrl + Tab Increases the indent

Ctrl + Shift + Tab Decreases the indent

Ctrl + Z Undo



9 -- 32Amb_9.8_WEB BASED HELPE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Ctrl + Y Redo

Ctrl + C Copy the selected text

Ctrl + X Cut the selected text

Ctrl + V Paste the previously copied/cut text

Ctrl + A Select All

9.8.4 Help Data

The SunGard Vivista and customer Help data information is stored in separate folders. Thiscapability allows a customer to customize aHelp file explanation to suit local requirements orto prompt any local procedures.

9.8.5 HTML Link Error

A default error page as shown below is displayed on the screen when the HTML link to thehelp files is not found.

Chapter 10System MaintenanceEngineering Functions

VOLUME 1SYSTEM MAINTENANCE


10 -- 2Amb_10.0_SYS MAINTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Amendment Record


A First draft SS 25.04.06

B Update to E/D Term forV9.11 functionality

SS 24.06.06




SS 01/11/07



10 -- 3Amb_10.0_SYS MAINT E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Contents

10.1 Introduction 10 -- 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.1 Introduction 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2.2 To Enable Terminal Logon 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2.3 To Disable Terminal Logon 10 -- 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Enable/Disable Line 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.1 Introduction 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.2 To Disable a Line 10 -- 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3.3 To Enable a Line 10 -- 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 Enable/Disable Channel 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.1 Introduction 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.2 To Disable a Channel 10 -- 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4.3 To Enable a Channel 10 -- 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5 Route Tone 10 -- 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6 Radio Configuration 10 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6.1 Introduction 10 -- 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.2 First Level Configuration 10 -- 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3 Second Level Configuration -- Physical Channels 10 -- 17. . . . . . . . .

10.6.3.1 Options 10 -- 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults 10 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.3 Bay and Channel Selection 10 -- 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.4 Configure Pip Tone Parameters 10 -- 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters 10 -- 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.1 To Access the Edit Function 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.2 To Add a Terminal Icon 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7.3 To Edit or Delete an Icon 10 -- 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.8 Calibrate Screen -- Adjustment 10 -- 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



10 -- 4Amb_10.0_SYS MAINTE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A




10 -- 5Amb_10.1_INTRO E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.1 Introduction

TheSystemMaintenance functions give access to facilities necessary to ensure the efficientrunning of the DS2000.

The following functions are available to suitably authorised users:

• Enable or disable terminals

• Enable or disable radio channels/talkgroups

• Enable or disable telephone lines

• Route a test tone to any radio channel (nonTetra)

• Configure radio channels/talkgroups

• Adjust screen calibration



10 -- 6Amb_10.2_E/D TERM LOG ONE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.2 Enable/Disable Terminal Log On

Important:This chapter reflects standard Enable/Disable Terminal fuctionality. If your system supportsGroup Partitioning functionality, this Chapter should be read in conjunction with Sections8.15 and 8.16.

10.2.1 Introduction

The Enable/Disable Terminal key is accessed via theENG tab. The facility is usedto re-enable a terminal where a user has had three Log On failures, or to disable aterminal to prevent unauthorised use.

10.2.2 To Enable Terminal Logon

Touch theE/D TERM key to display the Terminal Select screen. The key now takeson its Active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the appropriate disabled terminal; its status will be toggled to theEnabled state and the message

is displayed in the message area of your terminal.

CHOOSE A TERMINAL TO ENABLE/DISABLE

TERMINAL LOG ON ENABLED

10.2.3 To Disable Terminal Logon

Touch the E/D TERM key to display the Terminal Select screen. The key takes onits Active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the appropriate enabled terminal and its status will be toggled tothe Disabled state, the key being highlighted.The message


CHOOSE A TERMINAL TO ENABLE/DISABLE

TERMINAL LOG ON DISABLED



10 -- 7Amb_10.2_E/D TERM LOG ON E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintDisabled terminals cannot be used, even by an engineer.

If you touch any key other than an idle or disabled Terminal key, themess-age

is displayed in the message area, and the E/D TERM key reverts to itsInactive state.

Software interlocks prevent the instant disabling of a terminal which is inuse. It will however be disabled when the current user logs off.

INVALID OPERATION



10 -- 8Amb_10.3_E/D LINEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.3 Enable/Disable Line

10.3.1 Introduction

The Enable/Disable Line key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used tore-enable a telephone line, or to disable a telephone line to prevent unauthoriseduse.

10.3.2 To Disable a Line

With the appropriate telephone page displayed, touch the E/D LINE key. It takeson its active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the required line and its status will be toggled to its Disabled state,with a ‘D’ showing in the lower border of the key. The message


CHOOSE A LINE TO ENABLE/DISABLE

LINE DISABLED

PROBLEM?

If you touch any key other than an idle, ringing in or disabled line,the message

will be displayed in the message area and the E/D LINE key willrevert to its Inactive state.

Engineers still have full access to any disabled line.

Should anyone else try to use a disabled line the message

will be displayed in their message area.

INVALID OPERATION

INVALID OPERATION: LINE DISABLED



10 -- 9Amb_10.3_E/D LINE E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.3.3 To Enable a Line

Touch the E/D LINE key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the appropriate disabled line (with ‘D’ in the lower border of its key)and its status will be toggled to the Enabled state. The message


CHOOSE A LINE TO ENABLE/DISABLE

LINE ENABLED

Helpful HintIf your PIN does not allow you to use disabled lines, you cannot enablethem. The message

is displayed in the message area of your terminal. If you accidentallytouch any key other than an idle, ringing in or disabled line, the message

is displayed in themessage area and theE/D LINE key reverts to its inac-tive state.

LINE DISABLED

INVALID OPERATION



10 -- 10Amb_10.4_E/D CHAN_1E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.4 Enable/Disable Channel

10.4.1 Introduction

The Enable/Disable Channel key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is usedto re-enable a radio channel/talkgroup, or to disable a radio channel/talkgroup toprevent unauthorised use.

10.4.2 To Disable a Channel

Touch the E/D CHAN key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the required channel and its status will be toggled to its Disabledstate, with a ‘D’ showing in the border of the key. The message

is displayed in the message area of your terminal and the key displays a ‘D’ at allother logged on terminals.

CHANNEL DISABLED

CHOOSE A CHANNEL TO ENABLE/DISABLE

Helpful Hint If you touch any key other than an idle, enabled or disabledradio//talkgroup key, the message

is displayed in the message area and the E/D CHAN key reverts to itsInactive state.

Interlocks prevent the disabling of a channel/talkgroup which is in use orwhich has audio present.

Engineers still have full access to any disabled channel/talkgroup.

Should anyone else try to use a disabled channel/talkgroup, themessage

is displayed in their message area.

INVALID OPERATION

INVALID OPERATION; CHANNEL DISABLED



10 -- 11Amb_10.4_E/D CHAN_1 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.4.3 To Enable a Channel

Touch the E/D CHAN key; it takes on its Active appearance and the message


Touch the key of the appropriate disabled channel and its status will be toggled tothe Enabled state. The message


CHOOSE A CHANNEL TO ENABLE/DISABLE

CHANNEL ENABLED

Helpful Hint

PROBLEM?

If your PIN does not allow you to use disabled channels, you can-not enable them.

If you accidentally touch any key other than an idle, enabled ordisabled radio key, the message

will be displayed in themessage area and theE/DCHAN key willrevert to its Inactive state.

INVALID OPERATION



10 -- 12Amb_10.5_ROUTE TONEE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.5 Route Tone

Route Tone is used to send a continuous 1060Hz5Hz test tone to specific radiochannels. The Route Tone facility is accessed via the ENG tab.

To use Route Tone, touch ENG then:

a) Select the radio channels onwhich youwish to transmit thetest tone.

b) Touch and hold the ROUTE TONE key. The transmitterswill be keyed and the tone will be sent on these channelsfor as long as your finger touches the key. The message


When you release the key, this message changes to

TEST TONE TO CHANNEL(S) ON

TEST TONE TO CHANNEL(S) OFF

Helpful Hint If you touch this key without having selected any radio channels, themessage

will be displayed in the message area.INVALID OPERATION



10 -- 13Amb_10.6_RADIO CONFIG E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6 Radio Configuration

The Radio Configuration key is accessed via the ENG tab. The facility is used,among other things, to enable/disable Pip Tones, specify CTSS state, changechannel numbers, change bay number.

10.6.1 Introduction

Within this file there is configuration data for two types of radio channels -- Physical andLogical.

Physical channels are individual radio Base Stations. Logical channels refer to a number ofPhysical channels which have been put into a Voting Group. The Logical channel allows thegrouped Base Stations to be treated as a single channel for most purposes.

The configuration of all radio channels is defined in the relevant file at three levels; thefollowing tables summarise the parameters which can be changed. Your ability to view orchange parameters is set by the System Manager.

The first level is the same for both Physical and Logical channels as described in Section10.6.2. The second level configuration parameters for Physical channels are described inSection 10.6.3 and for Logical channels in Section 10.6.4.

Radio Configuration -- First Level

NAME/LOCATION Cannot be changed within this facility

CTCSS STATE TOGGLE ON or OFF

PIP TONE TOGGLE ON or OFF

TOGGLE DYNAMIC VOTE(This field is not applicable to some instal-lations)

ENABLE or DISABLE



10 -- 14Amb_10.6_RADIO CONFIGE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Radio Configuration - Second Level (Physical Channels)Bay and Channel

SELECT MODE AUTOMATIC MANUAL 1, MANUAL 2

SELECTED BAY 1 or 2

CHANNEL 01 -- 99

Pip Tone Parameters

PIP TONE MODE PIPS SELECTED - RX VOX

TONE DURATION (ms) From 50 to 150 in steps of 10

REPETITION PERIOD (ms) From 500 to 3000 in steps of 50

SYNC DELAY(ms) From 200 to 2800 in steps of 50

T/O MODE DISABLED -- RX VOX -- TX/RX VOX

TIMEOUT PERIOD From 5 to 300 in steps of 5

Talkthrough

MODE DISABLED -- LOCAL -- LOCALVOX--REMOTE

TIMEOUT RESET MODE DISABLED -- RX VOX -- TX/RX VOX

TIMEOUT (s) From 5 to 300 in steps of 5

Radio Configuration - Second Level (Logical Channels)

Voting Group

VOTE GROUP STATE

VOTE GROUP LIST

VOTE GROUP TYPE

ENABLED -- DISABLED

Specify channels in group

SITE SELECT --

Pip Tone Parameters

As for Physical channels

Talkthrough

As for Physical channels




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6.2 First Level Configuration

The Radio Configuration key is accessed via the ENG tab.

Touch the idle RADIO CONFIG key to configure a radio channel. It will change totheActive state and your own terminal position number will be displayed in the lowerleft border. This key state will also be displayed at all other terminals. The first pageof the first levelRadioConfiguration file will be displayed in yourGeneralWorkArea.

This shows the channel name/location with the current state of CTCSS and Pip Tones.

Touch the SAVE key to save the parameter. The parameter displayed in the Baycolumn will revert to its original colour and


Use the PREV LEVEL key, where applicable, to return to the Main Screen.

Use the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE keys to leaf through the file.

If your PIN allows you to change CTCSS and Pip Tone states, touching the currentstate field will cause it to toggle to the other state.

PARAMETER UPDATE SAVED




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintIf the radio configuration facility is currently accessed at another operatorposition or the Radio Channel database update facility is being used, theRADIO CONFG key will be in its Active state and a terminal positionnumber will appear to the left of its lower border. Use the Intercom facilityto communicate with the user of that terminal to get clearance.

If you touch the PREV LEVEL key before the SAVE key, your changeswill not be actioned.

If you have changed the parameter and do not wish to save it, touch anduntouch the parameter itself to deselect it. It reverts to its original colour.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6.3 Second Level Configuration -- Physical Channels

10.6.3.1 Options

The Radio Channel Options are accessed from the Radio Configuration screen.

To reveal the second-level screen Radio Channel Options for any location, place a fingerwithin the Name/Location column of the Radio Configuration screen. The name of the radiostation underneath your finger will be highlighted. Slide your finger to the name of the radiolocation for which you want to reveal second level parameters and lift your finger to select it.

The screen below is displayed when you have selected a Physical channel. The TOGGLEDYNAMIC VOTE key is not applicable to all installations and may not be displayed.

The Radio Channels Options screen gives you access to four further screens (or five,depending on system specification) controlling different aspects of the radio.

Depending on the facilities enabled for your PIN you may not have access to all of these, oryou may be able to view the current state, but not make changes. The descriptions assumefull access is available to the user.

To view or modify a particular group of parameters, touch one of the four (or five) keys on thescreen. Further details for each option are given in the following pages.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6.3.2 Base Station Faults

This option allows you to view, acknowledge and reset faults which have been re-ported for the Base Station.

New Base Station faults are reported by the state of the B/STN FAULT key.

Touch the key to display a list of the current faults reported by the Base Station. (Alist of reportable fault messages for your equipment is given in Chapter 4, whenapplicable.)

The display lists the current faults reported by the Base Station. Three keys areprovided:

Touch the ACK FAULT key to acknowledge any unacknowledged (new) faults forthe Base Station. This function updates the display state of the individual BaseStation faults, the composite channel fault state, the Base Station Site Select keys(if applicable) and the B/STN FAULT key.

Touch the FAULT RESET key to reset any latched faults at the Base Station.

Touch the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Radio Channels Options screen.

Helpful HintUnless the fault condition has been cleared or the fault was a transientcondition the fault will not be cleared when you touch the FAULT RESETkey. This function does not directly affect thedisplay state of the individualbase station faults, composite channel fault state or B/STN FAULT key.The Display states are affected by the base station reporting that the faultcondition has cleared.

10.6.3.3 Bay and Channel Selection

Certain radio base stations have two bays which can be used to provide redundancy,whereby if the base station in one bay fails, the other bay can be used.

Commands can be transmitted from the ICCS to change bays on the channel.

This option allows you to view and change the bay and channel for the Base Station. Theillustration shows a typical installation. The parameters displayed will depend on thefunctionality of the Base Station.

Note: Instead of the above functionality, a new ’ALL BAY2’ key will change all ’automatic bay’selected radio base stations to bay 2. See section 10.13.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

To change a parameter, place your finger on the screen and slide it to the parameter valueyou wish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted.When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. The se-lected parameter will change colour and the message

is displayed in the message area.CHANGE PARAMETER USING UP/DOWN

Note: If a parameter is not configurable, the fields that refer to it will not be selectable or may not bedisplayed.

Use theUP andDOWN keys below the page to step through the range of availableparameters. As soonas you lift your finger fromone of these keys, a further changein the colour of the parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your fingerfrom the key until the desired value of the parameter is shown.

Repeat this procedure as required for the other parameters before saving them.

Touch theSAVE key to save those parameters that have been changed. The para-meter values displayed will revert to their original colours and


If you have changed a parameter and do not wish to save it, touch and untouch theparameter itself to deselect it. It will revert to its original colour and

will appear in the message area.

Touch the PREV LEVEL key to return to the Radio Channel Options screen.


PARAMETER CHANGE CANCELLED




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

Helpful HintIf Bay or Channel Change is not available for the particular Base Station,the fields will be displayed showing the current state, but they will not betouch-sensitive.

If Channel Change is not separate for each bay, Bay 2 Channel field willshow N/A.




Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6.3.4 Configure Pip Tone Parameters

This option allows you to view and change the Pip Tone parameters.

To changeaparameter, placea finger on the screenand slide it to theparameter value youwish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted.When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. Theselected parameter will change colour and the message


Use the UP and DOWN keys below the page to step through the range of para-meters available (these are listed on the first page of this section of themanual). Assoon as you lift your finger from one of these keys, a further change in the colour ofthe parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your finger from the key untilthe desired value of the parameter is shown.

Repeat this procedure as required for the other parameters before saving them.

Touch the SAVE key to save those parameters that have been changed. The para-meter values displayed will revert to their original colours and










Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.6.3.5 Configure Talkthrough Parameters

This option allows you to view and change Talkthrough for the Base Station.

To change a parameter, place a finger on the screen and slide it to the parameter valueyou wish to change. The parameters passing underneath your finger will be highlighted.When the parameter you wish to change is highlighted, lift your finger to select it. Theselected parameter will change colour and the message


Use the UP and DOWN keys below the page to step through the range of para-meters available (theseare listedon the first pageof this sectionof themanual). Assoon as you lift your finger from one of these keys, a further change in the colour ofthe parameter will take place -- keep touching and lifting your finger from the keyuntil the desired value of the parameter is shown.

Repeat this procedure as necessary for other parameters before saving them.

Touch theSAVE key to save thoseparameters that havebeenchanged. Thepara-meter values displayed will revert to their original colours and









10 -- 23Amb_10.7_DYN OP SCRN CONFIG_2 E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.7 Dynamic Operator Screen Configuration

TheDynamic Operator screen can be configured to represent the layout of theControlRoomor can display up to 99 terminals if they are arranged consecutively. Configuration of thescreen is achieved when viewing the Dynamic Operator screen. Only authorised users canadd, delete andedit the icons on the screen. SystemManagers canalsoadd lines and text byaccessing the Dyn Ops file in the DS2000 database. These operations are dealt with in therelevant sections of the Database Editing Functions manual Volume 2.

10.7.1 To Access the Edit Function

If you have the access rights to amend this screen, touching the DYN OP key asecond time gives access to the Edit function and the key changes colour state toindicate this. Now you can add, delete, move or edit terminal icons. After editing,touch the DNY OP key to end the session. The key reverts to its idle state.

10.7.2 To Add a Terminal Icon

a) View the Dynamic Operator screen

b) Touch the screen (or use the mouse) where you want to see the icon displayedThis invokes an option screen. Select between styles A, B or C.

c) Use the ID up or down key to change/select the required terminal number

d) Touch the OK key to save the changes or the Cancel key to abort

10.7.3 To Edit or Delete an Icon

a) Touch an icon of the terminal to be edited and the following menu appears:

b) Select the desired option from the menu.



10 -- 24Amb_10.7_DYN OP SCRN CONFIG_2E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A




10 -- 25Amb_10.8 CALIB E SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A

10.8 Calibrate Screen -- Adjustment

Use the calibration function as described in Chapter 3.

Where a user is having difficulty in calibrating the screen, check that the picturewidth and horizontal shift controls, located under the lower front edge of the VDU,have not been altered.

Reducing the width, or moving the display to the left, may cure the problem.

If the screen has vertical adjustment controls, these may also be tried. If there ismore than one, try the vertical shift control before trying the height control. In bothcases, horizontal and vertical, only small adjustments should be made each timeand to only one control at a time.

If no cure can be effected, contact the System Maintainer or SunGard VivistaLimited.



10 -- 26Amb_10.8 CALIBE SunGard Public Sector Limited

Part No. 808--Amb--0000--25--05A


Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7

Documents

Transcript of Vol 1 Op Man 191 Classic Issue 7